1 files changed, 9959 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/21979.txt b/21979.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a067ccd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21979.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9959 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, For Name and Fame, by G. A. Henty,
+Illustrated by Gordon Browne
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: For Name and Fame
+       Or Through Afghan Passes
+
+
+Author: G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 30, 2007  [eBook #21979]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOR NAME AND FAME***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Martin Robb
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21979-h.htm or 21979-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/9/7/21979/21979-h/21979-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/9/7/21979/21979-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+FOR NAME AND FAME
+
+Or Through Afghan Passes
+
+by
+
+G. A. HENTY.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Contents
+
+   Preface.
+   Chapter 1:   The Lost Child.
+   Chapter 2:   The Foundling.
+   Chapter 3:   Life On A Smack.
+   Chapter 4:   Run Down.
+   Chapter 5:   The Castaways.
+   Chapter 6:   The Attack On The Village.
+   Chapter 7:   The Fight With The Prahus.
+   Chapter 8:   The Torpedo.
+   Chapter 9:  The Advance Into Afghanistan.
+   Chapter 10: The Peiwar-Khotal.
+   Chapter 11: A Prisoner.
+   Chapter 12: The Advance Up The Khyber.
+   Chapter 13: The Massacre At Cabul.
+   Chapter 14: The Advance Upon Cabul.
+   Chapter 15: The Fighting Round Cabul.
+   Chapter 16: The Fight In The Pass.
+   Chapter 17: At Candahar.
+   Chapter 18: On The Helmund.
+   Chapter 19: The Battle Of Maiwand.
+   Chapter 20: Candahar.
+   Chapter 21: The Battle Of Candahar.
+   Chapter 22: At Home At Last.
+
+Illustrations
+
+   Sam Dickson finds little Willie Gale.
+   Will and Hans in Search of a Shelter.
+   Captain Herbert saved.
+   William Gale in the hands of the Afghans.
+   One of the Gunpowder Magazines had Exploded.
+   Letters from the General.
+   Will saves Colonel Ripon.
+   Gundi carried by the Bayonet.
+
+
+
+Preface.
+
+
+In following the hero of this story through the last Afghan war,
+you will be improving your acquaintance with a country which is of
+supreme importance to the British Empire and, at the same time, be
+able to trace the operations by which Lord Roberts made his great
+reputation as a general, and a leader of men. Afghanistan stands as
+a line between the two great empires of England and Russia; and is
+likely, sooner or later, to become the scene of a tremendous
+struggle between these nations. Happily, at the present time the
+Afghans are on our side. It is true that we have warred with, and
+beaten them; but our retirement, after victory, has at least shown
+them that we have no desire to take their country while, on the
+other hand, they know that for those races upon whom Russia has
+once laid her hand there is no escape.
+
+In these pages you will see the strength and the weakness of these
+wild people of the mountains; their strength lying in their
+personal bravery, their determination to preserve their freedom at
+all costs, and the nature of their country. Their weakness consists
+in their want of organization, their tribal jealousies, and their
+impatience of regular habits and of the restraint necessary to
+render them good soldiers. But, when led and organized by English
+officers, there are no better soldiers in the world; as is proved
+by the splendid services which have been rendered by the frontier
+force, which is composed almost entirely of Afghan tribesmen.
+
+Their history shows that defeat has little moral effect upon them.
+Crushed one day, they will rise again the next; scattered--it would
+seem hopelessly--they are ready to reassemble, and renew the
+conflict, at the first summons of their chiefs. Guided by British
+advice, led by British officers and, it may be, paid by British
+gold, Afghanistan is likely to prove an invaluable ally to us, when
+the day comes that Russia believes herself strong enough to move
+forward towards the goal of all her hopes and efforts, for the last
+fifty years--the conquest of India.
+
+G. A. Henty.
+
+
+
+Chapter 1: The Lost Child.
+
+
+"My poor pets!" a lady exclaimed, sorrowfully; "it is too bad. They
+all knew me so well; and ran to meet me, when they saw me coming;
+and seemed really pleased to see me, even when I had no food to
+give them."
+
+"Which was not often, my dear," Captain Ripon--her husband--said.
+"However it is, as you say, too bad; and I will bring the fellow to
+justice, if I can. There are twelve prize fowls--worth a couple of
+guineas apiece, not to mention the fact of their being pets of
+yours--stolen, probably by tramps; who will eat them, and for whom
+the commonest barn-door chickens would have done as well. There are
+marks of blood in two or three places, so they have evidently been
+killed for food. The house was locked up last night, all right; for
+you see they got in by breaking in a panel of the door.
+
+"Robson, run down to the village, at once, and tell the policeman
+to come up here; and ask if any gypsies, or tramps, have been seen
+in the neighborhood."
+
+The village lay at the gate of Captain Ripon's park, and the
+gardener soon returned with the policeman.
+
+"I've heard say there are some gypsies camped on Netherwood Common,
+four miles away," that functionary said, in answer to Captain
+Ripon.
+
+"Put the gray mare in the dog cart, Sam. We will drive over at
+once. They will hardly expect us so soon. We will pick up another
+policeman, at Netherwood. They may show fight, if we are not in
+strength."
+
+Five minutes later, Captain Ripon was traveling along the road at
+the rate of twelve miles an hour; with Sam by his side, and the
+policeman sitting behind. At Netherwood they took up another
+policeman and, a few minutes later, drove up to the gypsy
+encampment.
+
+There was a slight stir when they were seen approaching; and then
+the gypsies went on with their usual work, the women weaving
+baskets from osiers, the men cutting up gorse into skewers. There
+were four low tents, and a wagon stood near; a bony horse grazing
+on the common.
+
+"Now," Captain Ripon said, "I am a magistrate, and I daresay you
+know what I have come for. My fowl house has been broken open, and
+some valuable fowls stolen.
+
+"Now, policeman, look about, and see if you can find any traces of
+them."
+
+The gypsies rose to their feet, with angry gestures.
+
+"Why do you come to us?" one of the men said. "When a fowl is
+stolen you always suspect us, as if there were no other thieves in
+the world."
+
+"There are plenty of other thieves, my friend; and we shall not
+interfere with you, if we find nothing suspicious."
+
+"There have been some fowls plucked, here," one of the policemen
+said. "Here is a little feather--" and he showed one, of only half
+an inch in length "--and there is another, on that woman's hair.
+They have cleaned them up nicely enough, but it ain't easy to pick
+up every feather. I'll be bound we find a fowl, in the pot."
+
+Two of the gypsies leaped forward, stick in hand; but the oldest
+man present said a word or two to them, in their own dialect.
+
+"You may look in the pot," he said, turning to Captain Ripon, "and
+maybe you will find a fowl there, with other things. We bought 'em
+at the market at Hunston, yesterday."
+
+The policeman lifted the lid off the great pot, which was hanging
+over the fire, and stirred up the contents with a stick.
+
+"There's rabbits here--two or three of them, I should say--and a
+fowl, perhaps two, but they are cut up."
+
+"I cannot swear to that," Captain Ripon said, examining the
+portions of fowl, "though the plumpness of the breasts, and the
+size, show that they are not ordinary fowls."
+
+He looked round again at the tents.
+
+"But I can pretty well swear to this," he said, as he stooped and
+picked up a feather which lay, half concealed, between the edge of
+one of the tents and the grass. "This is a breast feather of a
+Spangled Dorking. These are not birds which would be sold for
+eating in Hunston market, and it will be for these men to show
+where they got it from."
+
+A smothered oath broke from one or two of the men. The elder signed
+to them to be quiet.
+
+"That's not proof," he said, insolently. "You can't convict five
+men, because the feather of a fowl which you cannot swear to is
+found in their camp."
+
+"No," Captain Ripon said, quietly. "I do not want to convict anyone
+but the thief; but the proof is sufficient for taking you in
+custody, and we shall find out which was the guilty man,
+afterwards.
+
+"Now, lads, it will be worse for you, if you make trouble.
+
+"Constables, take them up to Mr. Bailey. He lives half a mile away.
+Fortunately, we have means of proving which is the fellow
+concerned.
+
+"Now, Sam, you and I will go up with the Netherwood constable to
+Mr. Bailey.
+
+"And do you," he said, to the other policeman, "keep a sharp watch
+over these women. You say you can find nothing in the tents; but it
+is likely the other fowls are hid, not far off, and I will put all
+the boys of the village to search, when I come back."
+
+The gypsies, with sullen faces, accompanied Captain Ripon and the
+policeman to the magistrate's.
+
+"Is that feather the only proof you have, Ripon?" Mr. Bailey asked,
+when he had given his evidence. "I do not think that it will be
+enough to convict, if unsupported; besides, you cannot bring it
+home to any one of them. But it is sufficient for me to have them
+locked up for twenty-four hours and, in the meantime, you may find
+the other fowls."
+
+"But I have means of identification," Captain Ripon said. "There is
+a footmark in some earth, at the fowl house door. It is made by a
+boot which has got hobnails and a horseshoe heel, and a piece of
+that heel has been broken off.
+
+"Now, which of these men has got such a boot on? Whichever has, he
+is the man."
+
+There was a sudden movement among the accused.
+
+"It's of no use," one of them said, when the policeman approached
+to examine their boots. "I'm the man, I'll admit it. I can't get
+over the boot," and he held up his right foot.
+
+"That is the boot, sir," the constable exclaimed. "I can swear that
+it will fit the impression, exactly."
+
+"Very well," the magistrate said. "Constable, take that man to the
+lockup; and bring him before the bench, tomorrow, for final
+committal for trial. There is no evidence against the other four.
+They can go."
+
+With surly, threatening faces the men left the room; while the
+constable placed handcuffs on the prisoner.
+
+"Constable," Mr. Bailey said, "you had better not put this man in
+the village lockup. The place is of no great strength, and his
+comrades would as likely as not get him out, tonight. Put him in my
+dog cart. My groom shall drive you over to Hunston."
+
+Captain Ripon returned with his groom to Netherwood, and set all
+the children searching the gorse, copses, and hedges near the
+common, by the promise of ten shillings reward, if they found the
+missing fowls. Half an hour later, the gypsies struck their tents,
+loaded the van, and went off.
+
+Late that afternoon, the ten missing fowls were discovered in a
+small copse by the wayside, half a mile from the common, on the
+road to Captain Ripon's park.
+
+"I cannot bring your fowls back to life, Emma," that gentleman
+said, when he returned home, "but I have got the thief. It was one
+of the gypsies on Netherwood Common. We found two of the fowls in
+their pot. No doubt they thought that they would have plenty of
+time to get their dinner before anyone came, even if suspicion fell
+on them; and they have hidden the rest away somewhere, but I expect
+that we shall find them.
+
+"They had burnt all the feathers, as they thought; but I found a
+breast feather of a Spangled Dorking, and that was enough for me to
+give them in custody. Then, when it came to the question of boots,
+the thief found it no good to deny it, any longer."
+
+That evening, Captain Ripen was told that a woman wished to speak
+to him and, on going out into the hall, he saw a gypsy of some
+thirty years of age.
+
+"I have come, sir, to beg you not to appear against my husband."
+
+"But, my good woman, I see no reason why I should not do so. If he
+had only stolen a couple of common fowls, for a sick wife or child,
+I might have been inclined to overlook it--for I am not fond of
+sending men to prison--but to steal a dozen valuable fowls, for the
+pot, is a little too much. Besides, the matter has gone too far,
+now, for me to retract, even if I wished to--which I certainly do
+not."
+
+"He is a good husband, sir."
+
+"He may be," Captain Ripon said, "though that black eye you have
+got does not speak in his favor But that has nothing to do with it.
+Matters must take their course."
+
+The woman changed her tone.
+
+"I have asked you fairly, sir; and it will be better for you if you
+don't prosecute Reuben."
+
+"Oh, nonsense, my good woman! Don't let me have any threats, or it
+will be worse for you."
+
+"I tell you," the woman exclaimed, fiercely, "it will be the worse
+for you, if you appear against my Reuben."
+
+"There, go out," Captain Ripon said, opening the front door of the
+hall. "As if I cared for your ridiculous threats! Your husband will
+get what he deserves--five years, if I am not mistaken."
+
+"You will repent this," the gypsy said, as she passed out.
+
+Captain Ripon closed the door after her, without a word.
+
+"Well, who was it?" his wife inquired, when he returned to the
+drawing room.
+
+"An insolent gypsy woman, wife of the man who stole the fowls. She
+had the impudence to threaten me, if I appeared against him."
+
+"Oh, Robert!" the young wife exclaimed, apprehensively, "what could
+she do? Perhaps you had better not appear."
+
+"Nonsense, my dear!" her husband laughed. "Not appear, because an
+impudent gypsy woman has threatened me? A nice magistrate I should
+be! Why, half the fellows who are committed swear that they will
+pay off the magistrate, some day; but nothing ever comes of it.
+Here, we have been married six months, and you are wanting me to
+neglect my duty; especially when it is your pet fowls which have
+been stolen.
+
+"Why, at the worst, my dear," he went on, seeing that his wife
+still looked pale, "they could burn down a tick or two, on a windy
+night in winter and, to satisfy you, I will have an extra sharp
+lookout kept in that direction, and have a watchdog chained up near
+them.
+
+"Come, my love, it is not worth giving a second thought about; and
+I shall not tell you about my work on the bench, if you are going
+to take matters to heart like this."
+
+The winter came and went, and the ricks were untouched, and Captain
+Ripon forgot all about the gypsy's threats. At the assizes a
+previous conviction was proved against her husband, and he got five
+years penal servitude and, after the trial was over, the matter
+passed out of the minds of both husband and wife.
+
+They had, indeed, other matters to think about for, soon after
+Christmas, a baby boy was born, and monopolized the greater portion
+of his mother's thoughts. When, in due time, he was taken out for
+walks, the old women of the village--perhaps with an eye to
+presents from the Park--were unanimous in declaring that he was the
+finest boy ever seen, and the image both of his father and mother.
+
+He certainly was a fine baby; and his mother lamented sorely over
+the fact that he had a dark blood mark, about the size of a
+three-penny piece, upon his shoulder. Her husband, however,
+consoled her by pointing out that--as it was a boy--the mark did
+not matter in the slightest; whereas--had it been a girl--the mark
+would have been a disfigurement, when she attained to the dignified
+age at which low dresses are worn.
+
+"Yes, of course, that would have been dreadful, Robert. Still, you
+know, it is a pity."
+
+"I really cannot see that it is even a pity, little woman; and it
+would have made no great difference if he had been spotted all
+over, like a leopard, so that his face and arms were free. The only
+drawback would have been he would have got some nickname or other,
+such as 'the Leopard,' or 'Spotty,' or something of that sort, when
+he went to bathe with his school fellows. But this little spot does
+not matter, in the slightest.
+
+"Some day or other Tom will laugh, when I tell him what a fuss you
+made over it."
+
+Mrs. Ripon was silenced but, although she said nothing more about
+it, she was grieved in her heart at this little blemish on her boy;
+and lamented that it would spoil his appearance, when he began to
+run about in little short frocks; and she determined, at once, that
+he should wear long curls, until he got into jackets.
+
+Summer, autumn, and winter came and passed. In the spring, Tom
+Ripon was toddling about; but he had not yet begun to talk,
+although his mother declared that certain incoherent sounds, which
+he made, were quite plain and distinct words; but her husband,
+while willing to allow that they might be perfectly intelligible to
+her, insisted that--to the male ear--they in no way resembled
+words.
+
+"But he ought to begin to talk, Robert," his wife urged. "He is
+sixteen months old, now, and can run about quite well. He really
+ought to begin to talk."
+
+"He will talk, before long," her husband said, carelessly. "Many
+children do not talk till they are eighteen months old, some not
+till they are two years. Besides, you say he does begin, already."
+
+"Yes, Robert, but not quite plainly."
+
+"No, indeed, not plainly at all," her husband laughed. "Don't
+trouble, my dear, he will talk soon enough; and if he only talks as
+loud as he roars, sometimes, you will regret the hurry you have
+been in about it."
+
+"Oh, Robert, how can you talk so? I am sure he does not cry more
+than other children. Nurse says he is the best child she ever
+knew."
+
+"Of course she does, my dear; nurses always do. But I don't say he
+roars more than other children. I only say he roars, and that
+loudly; so you need not be afraid of there being anything the
+matter with his tongue, or his lungs.
+
+"What fidgets you young mothers are, to be sure!"
+
+"And what heartless things you young fathers are, to be sure!" his
+wife retorted, laughing. "Men don't deserve to have children. They
+do not appreciate them, one bit."
+
+"We appreciate them, in our way, little woman; but it is not a
+fussy way. We are content with them as they are, and are not in any
+hurry for them to run, or to walk, or to cut their first teeth. Tom
+is a fine little chap, and I am very fond of him, in his
+way--principally, perhaps, because he is your Tom--but I cannot see
+that he is a prodigy."
+
+"He is a prodigy," Mrs. Ripon said, with a little toss of her head,
+"and I shall go up to the nursery, to admire him."
+
+So saying, she walked off with dignity; and Captain Ripon went out
+to look at his horses, and thought to himself what a wonderful
+dispensation of providence it was, that mothers were so fond of
+their babies.
+
+"I don't know what the poor little beggars would do," he muttered,
+"if they had only their fathers to look after them; but I suppose
+we should take to it, just as the old goose in the yard has taken
+to that brood of chickens, whose mother was carried off by the fox.
+
+"By the way, I must order some wire netting. I forgot to write for
+it, yesterday."
+
+Another two months. It was June, and now even Captain Ripon allowed
+that Tom could say "Pa," and "Ma," with tolerable distinctness; but
+as yet he had got no farther. He could now run about sturdily and,
+as the season was warm and bright, and Mrs. Ripon believed in fresh
+air, the child spent a considerable portion of his time in the
+garden.
+
+One day his mother was out with him, and he had been running about
+for some time. Mrs. Ripon was picking flowers, for she had a dinner
+party that evening, and she enjoyed getting her flowers, and
+arranging her vases, herself. Presently she looked round, but Tom
+was missing. There were many clumps of ornamental shrubs on the
+lawn, and Mrs. Ripon thought nothing of his disappearance.
+
+"Tom," she called, "come to mamma, she wants you," and went on with
+her work.
+
+A minute or two passed.
+
+"Where is that little pickle?" she said. "Hiding, I suppose," and
+she went off in search.
+
+Nowhere was Tom to be seen. She called loudly, and searched in the
+bushes.
+
+"He must have gone up to the house.
+
+"Oh, here comes nurse. Nurse, have you seen Master Tom? He has just
+run away," she called.
+
+"No, ma'am, I have seen nothing of him."
+
+"He must be about the garden then, somewhere. Look about, nurse.
+Where can the child have hidden itself?"
+
+Nurse and mother ran about, calling loudly the name of the missing
+child. Five minutes later Mrs. Ripon ran into the study, where her
+husband was going through his farm accounts.
+
+"Oh, Robert," she said, "I can't find Tom!" and she burst into
+tears.
+
+"Not find Tom?" her husband said, rising in surprise. "Why, how
+long have you missed him?"
+
+"He was out in the garden with me. I was picking flowers for the
+dinner table and, when I looked round, he was gone. Nurse and I
+have been looking everywhere, and calling, but we cannot find him."
+
+"Oh, he is all right," Captain Ripon said, cheerfully. "Do not
+alarm yourself, little woman. He must have wandered into the
+shrubbery. We shall hear him howling, directly. But I will come and
+look for him."
+
+No better success attended Captain Ripon's search than that which
+his wife had met with. He looked anxious, now. The gardeners and
+servants were called, and soon every place in the garden was
+ransacked.
+
+"He must have got through the gate, somehow, into the park,"
+Captain Ripon said, hurrying in that direction. "He certainly is
+not in the garden, or in any of the hothouses."
+
+Some of the men had already gone in that direction. Presently
+Captain Ripon met one, running back.
+
+"I have been down to the gate, sir, and can see nothing of Master
+Tom; but in the middle of the drive, just by the clump of laurels
+by the gate, this boot was lying--just as if it had been put there
+on purpose, to be seen."
+
+"Nonsense!" Captain Ripon said. "What can that have to do with it?"
+
+Nevertheless he took the boot, and looked at it. It was a
+roughly-made, heavy boot, such as would be worn by a laboring man.
+He was about to throw it carelessly aside, and to proceed on his
+search, when he happened to turn it over. Then he started, as if
+struck.
+
+"Good Heaven!" he exclaimed, "it is the gypsy's."
+
+Yes, he remembered it now. The man had pleaded not guilty, when
+brought up at the assizes, and the boot had been produced as
+evidence. He remembered it particularly because, after the man was
+sentenced, his wife had provoked a smile by asking that the boots
+might be given up to her; in exchange for a better pair for her
+husband to put on, when discharged from prison.
+
+Yes, it was clear. The gypsy woman had kept her word, and had taken
+her revenge. She had stolen the child, and had placed the boot
+where it would attract attention, in order that the parents might
+know the hand that struck them.
+
+Instantly Captain Ripon ran to the stable, ordered the groom to
+mount at once, and scour every road and lane; while he himself rode
+off to Hunston to give notice to the police, and offer a large
+reward for the child's recovery. He charged the man who had brought
+the boot to carry it away, and put it in a place of safety till it
+was required; and on no account to mention to a soul where he put
+it.
+
+Before riding off he ran in to his wife, who was half wild with
+grief, to tell her that he was going to search outside the park;
+and that she must keep up her spirits for, no doubt, Tom would turn
+up all right, in no time.
+
+He admitted to himself, however, as he galloped away, that he was
+not altogether sure that Tom would be so speedily recovered. The
+woman would never have dared to place the boot on the road, and so
+give a clue against herself, unless she felt very confident that
+she could get away, or conceal herself.
+
+"She has probably some hiding place, close by the park," he said to
+himself, "where she will lie hid till night, and will then make
+across country."
+
+He paused at the village, and set the whole population at work, by
+telling them that his child was missing--and had, he believed, been
+carried off by a gypsy woman--and that he would give fifty pounds
+to anyone who would find him. She could not be far off, as it was
+only about half an hour since the child had been missed.
+
+Then he galloped to Hunston, set the police at work and, going to a
+printer, told him instantly to set up and strike off placards,
+offering five hundred pounds reward for the recovery of the child.
+This was to be done in an hour or two, and then taken to the police
+station for distribution throughout the country round. Having now
+done all in his power, Captain Ripon rode back as rapidly as he had
+come, in hopes that the child might already have been found.
+
+No news had, however, been obtained of him, nor had anyone seen any
+strange woman in the neighborhood.
+
+On reaching the house, he found his wife prostrated with grief and,
+in answer to her questions, he thought it better to tell her about
+the discovery of the boot.
+
+"We may be some little time, before we find the boy," he said; "but
+we shall find him, sooner or later. I have got placards out
+already, offering five hundred pounds reward; and this evening I
+will send advertisements to all the papers in this and the
+neighboring counties.
+
+"Do not fret, darling. The woman has done it out of spite, no
+doubt; but she will not risk putting her neck in a noose, by
+harming the child. It is a terrible grief, but it will only be for
+a time. We are sure to find him before long."
+
+Later in the evening, when Mrs. Ripon had somewhat recovered her
+composure, she said to her husband:
+
+"How strange are God's ways, Robert. How wicked and wrong in us to
+grumble! I was foolish enough to fret over that mark on the
+darling's neck, and now the thought of it is my greatest comfort.
+If it should be God's will that months or years should pass over,
+before we find him, there is a sign by which we shall always know
+him. No other child can be palmed off upon us, as our own. When we
+find Tom we shall know him, however changed he may be!"
+
+"Yes, dear," her husband said, "God is very good, and this trial
+may be sent us for the best. As you say, we can take comfort, now,
+from what we were disposed to think, at the time, a little cross.
+After that, dear, we may surely trust in God. That mark was placed
+there that we might know our boy again and, were it not decreed
+that we should again see him, that mark would have been useless."
+
+The thought, for a time, greatly cheered Mrs. Ripon but, gradually,
+the hope that she should ever see her boy again faded away; and
+Captain Ripon became much alarmed at the manifest change in her
+health.
+
+In spite of all Captain Ripon could do, no news was obtained of the
+gypsy, or Tom. For weeks he rode about the country, asking
+questions in every village; or hurried away to distant parts of
+England, where the police thought they had a clue.
+
+It was all in vain. Every gypsy encampment in the kingdom was
+searched, but without avail; and even the police, sharp eyed as
+they are, could not guess that the decent-looking Irishwoman,
+speaking--when she did speak, which was seldom, for she was a
+taciturn woman--with a strong brogue, working in a laundry in a
+small street in the Potteries, Notting Hill, was the gypsy they
+were looking for; or that the little boy, whose father she said was
+at sea, was the child for whose discovery a thousand pounds was
+continually advertised.
+
+
+
+Chapter 2: The Foundling.
+
+
+It was a bitterly cold night in January. The wind was roaring
+across the flats and fens of Cambridgeshire, driving tiny flakes of
+snow before it. But few people had been about all day, and those
+whose business compelled them to face the weather had hurried
+along, muffled up to the chin. It was ten at night; and the porter
+and his wife at the workhouse, at Ely, had just gone to bed, when
+the woman exclaimed:
+
+"Sam, I hear a child crying."
+
+"Oh, nonsense!" the man replied, drawing the bedclothes higher over
+his head. "It is the wind; it's been whistling all day."
+
+The woman was silent, but not convinced. Presently she sat up in
+bed.
+
+"I tell you, Sam, it's a child; don't you hear it, man? It's a
+child, outside the gate. On such a night as this, too. Get up, man,
+and see; if you won't, I will go myself."
+
+"Lie still, woman. It's all thy fancy."
+
+"You are a fool, Sam Dickson," his wife said, sharply. "Do you
+think I have lived to the age of forty-five, and don't know a
+child's cry, when I hear it? Now are you going to get up, or am I?"
+
+With much grumbling, the porter turned out of bed, slipped on a
+pair of trousers and a greatcoat, took down the key from the wall,
+lighted a lantern, and went out. He opened the gate, and looked
+out. There was nothing to be seen; and he was about to close the
+gate again, with a curse on his wife's fancies, when a fresh cry
+broke on his ears. He hurried out now and, directed by the voice,
+found lying near the gate a child, wrapped in a dark-colored shawl,
+which had prevented him from seeing it at his first glance. There
+was no one else in sight.
+
+Illustration: Sam Dickson finds little Willie Gale.
+
+The man lifted his lantern above his head, and gave a shout. There
+was no answer. Then he raised the child and carried it in; locked
+the door, and entered the lodge.
+
+"You are right, for once," he said. "Here is a child, and a pretty
+heavy one, too. It has been deserted by someone; and a heartless
+creature she must have been, for in another half hour it would have
+been frozen to death, if you had not heard it."
+
+The woman was out of bed now.
+
+"It is a boy," she said, opening the shawl, "about two years old, I
+should say.
+
+"Don't cry, my boy--don't cry.
+
+"It's half frozen, Sam. The best thing will be to put it into our
+bed, that has just got warm. I will warm it up a little milk. It's
+no use taking it into the ward, tonight."
+
+Ten minutes later the child was sound asleep; the porter--who was a
+good-natured man--having gone over to sleep in an empty bed in the
+house, leaving the child to share his wife's bed.
+
+In the morning the foundling opened its eyes and looked round.
+Seeing everything strange, it began to cry.
+
+"Don't cry, dear," the woman said. "I will get you some nice
+breakfast, directly."
+
+The kindness of tone at once pacified the child. It looked round.
+
+"Where's mother?" he asked.
+
+"I don't know, dear. We shall find her soon enough, no doubt; don't
+you fret."
+
+The child did not seem inclined to fret. On the contrary, he
+brightened up visibly.
+
+"Will she beat Billy, when she comes back?"
+
+"No, my dear, she sha'n't beat you. Does she often beat you?"
+
+The child nodded its head several times, emphatically.
+
+"Then she's a bad lot," the woman said, indignantly.
+
+The child ate its breakfast contentedly, and was then carried by
+the porter's wife to the master, who had already heard the
+circumstance of its entry.
+
+"It's of no use asking such a baby whether it has any name," he
+said; "of course, it would not know. It had better go into the
+infants' ward. The guardians will settle what its name shall be. We
+will set the police at work, and try and find out something about
+its mother. It is a fine-looking little chap; and she must be
+either a thoroughly bad one, or terribly pressed, to desert it like
+this. Most likely it is a tramp and, in that case, it's odds we
+shall never hear further about it.
+
+"Any distinguishing mark on its clothes?"
+
+"None at all, sir. It is poorly dressed, and seems to have been
+very bad treated. Its skin is dirty, and its little back is black
+and blue with bruises; but it has a blood mark on the neck, which
+will enable its mother to swear to it, if it's fifty years
+hence--but I don't suppose we shall ever hear of her, again."
+
+That afternoon, however, the news came that the body of a tramp had
+been found, frozen to death in a ditch near the town. She had
+apparently lost her way and, when she had fallen in, was so numbed
+and cold that she was unable to rise, and so had been drowned in
+the shallow water. When the master heard of it, he sent for the
+porter's wife.
+
+"Mrs. Dickson," he said, "you had better take that child down, and
+let it see the tramp they have found, frozen to death. The child is
+too young to be shocked at death, and will suppose she is asleep.
+But you will be able to see if he recognizes her."
+
+There was no doubt as to the recognition. The child started in
+terror, when he saw the woman lying in the shed into which she had
+been carried. It checked its first impulse to cry out, but
+struggled to get further off.
+
+"Moder asleep," he said, in a whisper. "If she wake, she beat
+Billy."
+
+That was enough. The woman carried him back to the house.
+
+"She's his mother, sir, sure enough," she said to the master,
+"though how she should be puzzles me. She is dressed in pretty
+decent clothes; but she is as dark as a gypsy, with black hair.
+This child is fair, with a skin as white as milk, now he is
+washed."
+
+"I daresay he takes after his father," the master--who was a
+practical man--said. "I hear that there is no name on her things,
+no paper or other article which would identify her in her pockets;
+but there is two pounds, twelve shillings in her purse, so she was
+not absolutely in want. It will pay the parish for her funeral."
+
+An hour later the guardians assembled and, upon hearing the
+circumstances of the newcomer's admission, and the death of the
+tramp, they decided that the child should be entered in the books
+as "William Gale,"--the name being chosen with a reference to the
+weather during which he came into the house--and against his name a
+note was written, to the effect that his mother--a tramp, name
+unknown--had, after leaving him at the door of the workhouse, been
+found frozen to death next day.
+
+William Gale grew, and throve. He was a quiet and contented child;
+accustomed to be shut up all day alone, while his mother was out
+washing, the companionship of other children in the workhouse was a
+pleasant novelty and, if the food was not such as a dainty child
+would fancy, it was at least as good as he had been accustomed to.
+
+The porter's wife continued to be the fast friend of the child whom
+she had saved from death. The fact that she had done so gave her an
+interest in it. Her own children were out in service, or at work in
+the fields; and the child was a pleasure to her. Scarce a day
+passed, then, that she would not go across the yard up to the
+infants' ward, and bring Billy down to the lodge; where he would
+play contentedly by the hour, or sit watching her, and sucking at a
+cake, while she washed or prepared her husband's dinner.
+
+Billy was seldom heard to cry. Perhaps he had wept all his stock of
+tears away, before he entered the house. He had seldom fits of bad
+temper, and was a really lovable child. Mrs. Dickson never wavered
+in the opinion she had first formed--that the dead tramp was not
+Billy's mother--but as no one else agreed with her, she kept her
+thoughts to herself.
+
+The years passed on, and William Gale was now no longer in the
+infants' ward, but took his place in the boys' school. Here he at
+once showed an intelligence beyond that of the other boys of his
+own age. The hours which he had, each day, spent in the porter's
+lodge had not been wasted. The affection of the good woman had
+brightened his life, and he had none of the dull, downcast look so
+common among children in workhouses. She had encouraged him to talk
+and play, had taught him the alphabet, and supplied him with an
+occasional picture book, with easy words. Indeed, she devoted far
+more time to him than many mothers, in her class of life, can give
+to their children.
+
+The guardians, as they went in and out to board meeting, would
+delight her by remarking:
+
+"That is really a fine little fellow, Mrs. Dickson. He really does
+you credit. A fine, sturdy, independent little chap."
+
+The child, of course, wore the regular uniform of workhouse
+children; but Mrs. Dickson--who was handy with her needle--used to
+cut and alter the clothes to fit him, and thus entirely changed
+their appearance.
+
+"He looks like a gentleman's child," one of the guardians said, one
+day.
+
+"I believe he is a gentleman's child, sir. Look at his white skin;
+see how upright he is, with his head far back, as if he was
+somebody. He is different, altogether, from the run of them. I
+always said he came of good blood, and I shall say so to my dying
+day."
+
+"It may be so, Mrs. Dickson; but the woman who left him here, if I
+remember right, did not look as if she had any good blood in her."
+
+"Not likely, sir. She never came by him honestly, I am sure. I
+couldn't have believed she was his mother, not if she had sworn to
+it with her dying breath."
+
+Mrs. Dickson's belief was not without influence upon the boy. When
+he was old enough to understand, she told him the circumstances of
+his having been found at the workhouse door, and of the discovery
+of the woman who had brought him there; and impressed upon him her
+own strong conviction that this was not his mother.
+
+"I believe, Billy," she said, over and over again, "that your
+parents were gentlefolk. Now mind, it does not make one bit of
+difference to you, for it ain't likely you will ever hear of them.
+Still, please God, you may do so; and it is for you to bear it in
+mind, and to act so as--if you were to meet them--they need not be
+ashamed of you. You have got to earn your living just like all the
+other boys here; but you can act right, and straight, and
+honorable.
+
+"Never tell a lie, Billy; not if it's to save yourself from being
+thrashed ever so much. Always speak out manful, and straight, no
+matter what comes of it. Don't never use no bad words, work hard at
+your books, and try to improve yourself. Keep it always before you
+that you mean to be a good man, and a gentleman, some day and, mark
+my words, you will do it."
+
+"You're spoiling that child," her husband would say, "filling his
+head with your ridiculous notions."
+
+"No, I am not spoiling him, Sam. I'm doing him good. It will help
+keep him straight, if he thinks that he is of gentle blood, and
+must not shame it. Why, the matron said only yesterday she could
+not make him out, he was so different from other boys."
+
+"More's the pity," grumbled the porter. "It mayn't do him harm
+now--I don't say as it does; but when he leaves the house he'll be
+above his work, and will be discontented, and never keep a place."
+
+"No, he won't," his wife asserted stoutly; although, in her heart,
+she feared that there was some risk of her teaching having that
+effect.
+
+So far, however, there could be no doubt that her teaching had been
+of great advantage to the boy; and his steadiness and diligence
+soon attracted the attention of the schoolmaster. Schoolmasters are
+always ready to help pupils forward who promise to be a credit to
+them, and William Gale's teacher was no exception. He was not a
+learned man--very far from it. He had been a grocer who had failed
+in business and, having no other resource, had accepted the very
+small salary offered, by the guardians of Ely workhouse, as the
+only means which presented itself of keeping out of one of the
+pauper wards of that institution. However, he was not a bad reader,
+and wrote an excellent hand. With books of geography and history
+before him, he could make no blunders in his teaching; and although
+he might have been failing in method, he was not harsh or
+unkind--and the boys, therefore, learned as much with him as they
+might have done with a more learned master, of a harsher
+disposition.
+
+He soon recognized not only William's anxiety to learn, but the
+fearlessness and spirit with which he was always ready to own a
+fault, and to bear its punishment. On several occasions he brought
+the boy before the notice of the guardians, when they came round
+the school and, when questions had to be asked before visitors,
+William Gale was always called up as the show boy.
+
+This prominence would have made him an object of dislike, among the
+other lads of his own age; had it not been that William was a
+lively, good-tempered boy; and if, as sometimes happened on these
+occasions, a sixpence or shilling was slipped into his hand by some
+visitor, who was taken by his frank open face and bright
+intelligent manner, it was always shared among his school fellows.
+
+At one of the examinations the wife of a guardian, who was present
+with her husband, said on returning home:
+
+"It must be very dull for those poor boys. I will pack up some of
+the boys' books, and send them. Now they have gone to college, they
+will never want them again; and they would make quite a library for
+the workhouse boys. There must be twenty or thirty of them, at
+least."
+
+If ladies could but know what brightness they can infuse into the
+lives of lads, placed like these in Ely workhouse, by a simple act
+of kindness of this kind, there would not be an institution in the
+kingdom without a well-supplied library. The gift infused a new
+life into the school. Hitherto the world outside had been a sealed
+book to the boys. They knew of no world, save that included within
+the walls of the house. Their geography told them of other lands
+and people, but these were mere names, until now.
+
+Among the books were Robinson Crusoe, Midshipman Easy, Peter
+Simple, three or four of Cooper's Indian tales, Dana's Life before
+the Mast, and several of Kingston's and Ballantyne's books. These
+opened a wonderland of life and adventure to the boys. The
+schoolmaster used to give them out, at twelve o'clock; and they
+were returned at two, when school recommenced; and only such boys
+as obtained full marks for their lessons were allowed to have them.
+In this way, instead of the library being a cause of idleness--as
+some of the guardians predicted, when they heard of its
+presentation--it was an incentive to work.
+
+Certainly its perusal filled the minds of most of the boys with an
+intense longing to go to sea but, as there is always a demand for
+apprentices for the Yarmouth and Lowestoft smacks, the guardians
+did not disapprove of this bent being given to their wishes--indeed,
+as no premium had to be paid, with apprentices to smack owners,
+while in most trades a premium is required, a preference was given
+to the sea by the guardians.
+
+When William Gale reached the age of fifteen, and was brought
+before the board to choose the trade to which he would be
+apprenticed, he at once said that he would go to sea. There were
+applications from several smack masters for apprentices; and he,
+with the five other boys brought up with him, were all of one
+opinion in the matter.
+
+"Mind, lads," the chairman said, "the life of an apprentice on
+board a North Sea smack is a hard one. You will get a great many
+more kicks than half pence. It will be no use grumbling, when you
+have once made your choice. It is a rough, hard life--none rougher,
+or harder. When you have served your time, it will be open to you
+either to continue as smacksmen, or to ship as seamen in sea-going
+ships.
+
+"Sailors who hail from the eastern fishing ports are always
+regarded as amongst the best of our seamen. Still, it is a rough
+life, and a dangerous one. The hardest life, on shore, is easy in
+comparison. There is time to change your minds, before you sign;
+when you have done so, it will be too late. Are you all
+determined?"
+
+None of them wavered. Their signatures were attached to the
+indentures, and they were told that the porter would take them to
+Yarmouth, on the following day. William Gale obtained leave to
+spend his last evening at the porter's lodge, and there he talked
+very seriously, with Mrs. Dickson, over his future prospects.
+
+"I know," he said, "from Dana's book, that the life is a very rough
+one, but that will not matter. A sailor, when he has been four
+years at sea, can pass his examination as a mate; and I mean to
+work hard, and pass as soon as I can. I don't care how much I am
+knocked about, that's nothing; there's a good chance of getting on,
+in the end."
+
+"You will meet a great many bad boys, Bill; don't you let them lead
+you into their ways."
+
+"Don't be afraid of that," he answered, "I won't do anything I
+should be ashamed of, afterwards. You have taught me better."
+
+"I suppose the guardians gave you a Bible, today; they always do,
+when boys goes out."
+
+Will nodded.
+
+"Be sure you read it often, my boy. You read that, and stick to it,
+and you won't go far wrong. You know what the parson said, last
+Sunday:
+
+"'No one is strong in himself, but God gives strength.'"
+
+"I remember," Will said. "I made up my mind, then, that I'd bear it
+in mind, and act upon it when I could. I think the thought of God,
+and the thought that I may meet my parents--and they must not be
+ashamed of me--will help me to be honest, and firm."
+
+"I hope, Bill, you will come, sometimes, and see me, when you are
+ashore."
+
+"I shall be sure to do that, when I can," he answered. "But of
+course, I shall have no money, at first; and it may be a long time
+before I can pay my railway fare here; but you may be sure I will
+come. Whoever may be my real mother, you are the only mother I ever
+knew, and no mother could have been kinder. When I grow to be a
+man, and go to sea in big ships, I will bring you all sorts of
+pretty things from abroad and, if ever you should want it, you may
+be sure that my wages will be quite as much yours as if I had been,
+really, your son!"
+
+Sam Dickson gave a snort. It was very good of the boy, but he
+considered it his duty to snub him, in order to counteract what he
+considered to be the pernicious counsels and treatment of his wife.
+
+"Fine talk," he said, "fine talk. We shall see."
+
+"You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Sam Dickson," his wife said,
+wrathfully. "The boy means what he says, and I believe him. If
+anything was to happen to you, and that boy was growed up, I
+believe he would come forward to lend me a helping hand, just as he
+says, as if he were my son. The gals is good gals, but gals in
+service have plenty to do with their wages--what with dress, and
+one thing or another. We must never look for much help from them
+but, if Bill is doing well, and I ever come to want, I believe as
+his heart would be good to help, a bit."
+
+"Well," the porter said, dryly, "there's time enough to see about
+it, yet. I ain't dead, you ain't a pauper, and he ain't a man, not
+by a long way."
+
+"Well, you needn't go to be short tempered over it, Sam. The boy
+says as he'll be as good as a son to me, if the time ever comes as
+how I may want it. There is no call for you to fly out, as if he'd
+said as he'd poison me, if he'd the chance.
+
+"Anyhow, you'll write to me regular, won't you, Bill?"
+
+"That I will," the boy said. "Every time I gets back to port, I'll
+write; and you'll write sometimes, won't you? And tell me how you
+are, and how every one is, schoolmaster and all. They have all been
+very kind to me, and I have nothing to say against any of them."
+
+The next morning William Gale laid aside, for ever, his workhouse
+dress; and put on a suit of rough blue cloth, fitted for his future
+work. Then, bidding adieu to all his friends, he--with his five
+fellow apprentices--started by rail, under charge of Sam Dickson,
+for Yarmouth.
+
+The journey itself was, to them, a most exciting event. They had,
+in all their remembrance, never been a mile from the workhouse; and
+the swift motion of the train, the changing scenery, the villages
+and stations, were a source of immense interest. As they neared
+Yarmouth their excitement increased, for now they were nearing the
+sea; of which they had read so much, but could form so little idea.
+They were disappointed, however, inasmuch as no glimpse was
+obtained of it, as they crossed the flat country leading to the
+town but, failing the sea, Yarmouth itself--the town which was
+henceforth to be their headquarters--was in the highest degree
+interesting.
+
+Presently the train reached the station, and then Sam Dickson--who
+had made many annual journeys to Yarmouth, on the same errand--at
+once started off with them to the smack owners who had written to
+the workhouse. These lived at Gorleston, a large village on the
+south side of the river. Walking down from the station, the boys
+caught a glimpse of the river, and were delighted at the sight of
+the long line of smacks, and coasters, lying by the wharves
+opposite.
+
+Presently they left the road, and made their way down to the river
+side. Their guardian had great difficulty in getting them along, so
+interested were they in the smacks lying alongside. Presently they
+stopped at a large wooden building, over which was the name of
+"James Eastrey."
+
+"Here we are," Sam Dickson said. "Now, stop quietly outside. I will
+call three of you up, when I have spoken to Mr. Eastrey."
+
+Presently the porter re-appeared at the door, and called three of
+the boys in. William Gale was one of the number, James Eastrey
+being the name of the owner to whom he had signed his indentures.
+
+A smell of tar pervaded the whole place. Nets, sails, and cordage
+were piled in great heaps in the store; iron bolts and buckets,
+iron heads for trawls, and ship's stores of all kinds.
+
+Mr. Eastrey came out from a little wooden office.
+
+"So," he said, "you are the three lads who are going to be my
+apprentices. Well, boys, it is a rough life but, if you take the
+ups and downs as they come, it is not a bad one. I always tell my
+captains to be kind to the boys but, when they are at sea, they do
+not always act as I wish them. When you are on shore, between the
+voyages, I give you eight shillings a week, to keep yourselves; or
+I put you in the Smack Boys' Home, and pay for you there. The last
+is the best place for you, but some boys prefer to go their own
+way.
+
+"I suppose you are all anxious to go to sea--boys always are, for
+the first time. One of my boats is going out, tomorrow.
+
+"You," he said, pointing to William Gale, "shall go in her. What is
+your name?"
+
+"William Gale, sir."
+
+"Very well, William Gale, then you shall be off first. The others
+will only have a day or two to wait.
+
+"I can only send one new hand in each smack. The others will go to
+the Home, till the smacks are ready. I will send a man with them,
+at once. They can have a day to run about the town. I shall find
+plenty of work for them, afterwards.
+
+"You, Gale, will stop on the smack. I will take you on board, in
+half an hour, when I have finished my letter."
+
+The three lads said goodbye to their comrades and to Sam Dickson. A
+sailor was called up, and took two off to the Smack Boys' Home; and
+Will Gale sat down on a coil of rope, to wait till his employer was
+ready to take him down to the craft to which he was, henceforth, to
+belong.
+
+
+
+Chapter 3: Life On A Smack.
+
+
+"Now come along, Gale," Mr. Eastrey said, at last, "the Kitty is
+close by."
+
+Following his master, the lad went out from the store and along the
+wharf and, presently, stepped upon a smack on which several men,
+and a boy, were at work.
+
+"Harvey," Mr. Eastrey said, "I have brought you a new lad. He will
+sail with you, tomorrow. I have a very good account of him, and I
+think you will find him quick, and ready."
+
+"So as he's not up to tricks, I shall do very well with him, I
+don't doubt," the skipper said; "but boys are an awful trouble, the
+first voyage or two. However, I will do my best for him.
+
+"Are you ready to begin work at once, young 'un? What is your
+name?"
+
+"William Gale, and I am quite ready."
+
+"Very well, Bill, chuck off your jacket, then, and pass those bags
+along from the wharf."
+
+The boy was soon hard at work. He was a little disappointed at
+finding that the skipper was, in dress and manner, in no way
+superior to the rest of the crew. The Kitty was a yawl of
+forty-five tons, deep in the water and broad in the beam. Her deck
+was dirty and, at present, in disorder; and she did not come up to
+the perfection of neatness and cleanliness which William Gale had
+read of, in the pages of his favorite author. However--as he told
+himself--there must, of course, be a good deal of difference
+between a man of war, where the crew have little to do but to keep
+things neat and bright, and a fishing smack.
+
+The work upon which he was, at present, engaged was the
+transferring of the provisions for the voyage from the quay to the
+hold. These consisted principally of barrels of salt meat, and bags
+of biscuits; but there were a large tin of tea, a keg of sugar, a
+small barrel of molasses--or treacle--two or three sacks of
+potatoes, pepper and salt. Then there was a barrel of oil for the
+lamps, coils of spare rope of different sizes, and a number of
+articles of whose use William Gale had not the most remote idea.
+
+After two hours' work, the skipper looked at his watch.
+
+"Time to knock off work," he said, "and we've got pretty near
+everything on board. Now, be sure you are all here by six in the
+morning. Tide will begin to run out at eight, and I don't want to
+lose any of it.
+
+"Bill, you are to come home with me, for the night."
+
+It was but a hundred yards to the sailor's cottage, which stood on
+the edge of the sharp rise, a short distance back from the river.
+
+"Here, wife," he said as he entered, "I've got a new apprentice,
+and I expect he's pretty hungry; I am, I can tell you, and I hope
+tea's ready. His name's Bill, and he's going to stop here,
+tonight."
+
+"Tea is quite ready, John, and there's plenty of mackerel. I
+thought you would not be getting them again, for a spell.
+
+"Do you like fish?" she asked the boy.
+
+"I don't know, ma'am--I never tasted them."
+
+"Bless me!" the woman cried, in astonishment; "never tasted fish!
+To think, now!"
+
+"I've been brought up in a workhouse," William said, coloring a
+little as he spoke, for he knew the prejudice against the House.
+
+"Ah!" she said, "we have had a good many of that sort; and I can't
+say as I likes 'em, for the most part. But you haven't got the look
+about you. You don't seem that sort."
+
+"I hope I shall turn out none the worse for it," the boy said; "at
+any rate, I'll do my best."
+
+"And none can't do more," the good woman said, briskly. "I like
+your looks, Bill, and you've a nice way of talking. Well, we shall
+see."
+
+In a few minutes tea was upon the table, and Will sat down with the
+skipper, his wife, and two daughters--girls of ten and twelve. The
+lad enjoyed his meal immensely, and did full justice to the fish.
+
+"You will have plenty of them, before you eat your next tea on
+shore. We pretty nigh live on them, when we are on the fishing
+grounds."
+
+"The same kind of fish as this?"
+
+"No, mackerel are caught in small boats, with a different sort of
+gear, altogether. We get them, sometimes, in the trawl--not shoals
+of 'em, but single fish, which we call horse mackerel."
+
+After tea, the skipper lit his pipe; and his wife, after clearing
+up, took some knitting, and sat down and began to question the new
+apprentice.
+
+"It's lucky, for you, you found such a good friend," she said, when
+he had finished his story. "That's how it is you are so different
+from other boys who have been apprenticed from the House. I should
+never have thought you had come from there.
+
+"And she gave you good advice as to how you should go on, I'll be
+bound."
+
+"Yes, ma'am," Will said, "and I hope I shall act up to it."
+
+"I hope so, Bill; but you'll find it hard work to keep yourself as
+you should do, among them boys. They are an awful lot, them smack
+boys."
+
+"Not worse nor other boys," her husband said.
+
+"Not worse than might be looked for, John, but they are most of 'em
+pretty bad. The language they use make my blood run cold, often.
+They seems to take a delight in it. The hands are bad enough, but
+the boys are dreadful.
+
+"I suppose you don't swear, Will. They look too sharp after you, in
+the House; but if you take my advice, boy, don't you ever get into
+the way of bad language. If you once begin, it will grow on you.
+There ain't no use in it, and it's awful to hear it."
+
+"I will try not to do so," Will said firmly. "Mother--I always call
+her mother--told me how bad it was, and I said I'd try."
+
+"That's right, Will, you stick to that, and make up your mind to
+keep from liquor, and you'll do."
+
+"What's the use of talking that way?" the skipper said. "The boy's
+sure to do it. They all do."
+
+"Not all, John. There's some teetotalers in the fleet."
+
+"I won't say I'll never touch it," Will said, "for I don't know,
+yet, how I may want it--they say when you are cold and wet through,
+at sea, it is really good--but I have made up my mind I'll never
+drink for the sake of drinking. Half the men--ay, nineteen out of
+twenty in the House--would never have been there, I've heard mother
+say, if it hadn't been for drink; and I told her she need never
+fear I'd take to that."
+
+"If you can do without it on shore, you can do without it at sea,"
+the skipper said. "I take it when I'm on shore, but there's not a
+drop goes out on the Kitty. Some boats carries spirits, some don't.
+We don't. The old man puts chocolate on board instead and, of a wet
+night, a drink of hot chocolate's worth all the rum in the world.
+
+"As for giving it up altogether, I see no call for it. There are
+men who can't touch liquor, but they must go on till they get
+drunk. That sort ought to swear off, and never touch it at all.
+It's worse than poison, to some. But for a man who is content with
+his pint of beer with his dinner, and a glass of grog of an
+evening, I see no harm in it."
+
+"Except that the money might be better spent, John."
+
+"It might be, or it might not. In my case, the saving would be of
+no account. The beer costs three pence, and the rum as much more.
+That's six pence a day. I'm only at home ten days, once every two
+months; so it come to thirty shillings a year, and I enjoy my
+dinner, and my evening pipe, all the better for them."
+
+"The thing is this, Will: you don't know, when you begin, whether
+you are going to be one of the men who--like my John--is content
+with his pint of beer, and his glass of grog; or whether you will
+be one of them as can't touch liquor without wanting to make beasts
+of themselves. Therefore the safest plan is, don't touch it at
+all--leastways, till you've served your time. The others may laugh
+at you, at first; but they won't like you any the worse for it."
+
+"Thank you, ma'am. I will make up my mind to that--not to touch
+liquor till I am out of my apprenticeship. After that, I can see
+for myself."
+
+"That's right, lad. When you come back from your first trip, you
+can join the lodge, if you like. I and my girls are members."
+
+"Thank you, ma'am," Will said; "but I won't take any pledge. I have
+said I will not do it, and I don't see any use in taking an oath
+about it. If I am so weak as to break my word, I should break my
+oath. I don't know why I shouldn't be able to trust myself to do as
+I am willed, in that way as in any other. If I'd a craving after
+it, it might be different; but I never have tasted it, and don't
+want to taste it, so I don't see why I can't trust myself."
+
+"Yes, I think as how you can trust yourself, Will," the woman said,
+looking at him; "and I've noticed often that it isn't them who say
+most, as do most.
+
+"Now, I daresay you are sleepy. There's my boy's bed for you. He is
+fourth hand in one of the smacks at sea."
+
+The next morning Will was out of bed the instant he was called,
+excited at the thought that he was going really to sea. The
+skipper's wife had tea made, and the table laid.
+
+"Here," she said, "are some oilskin suits my boy has given up. They
+will suit you well enough for size and, although they are not as
+good as they were, they will keep out a good deal of water, yet.
+You will get half-a-crown a week, while you are at sea so, by the
+time you get back, you will have enough to buy yourself a fresh
+suit."
+
+Half an hour later Will was at work, getting two spare sails and
+the last of the stores on board.
+
+"Now, Bill, come below," the skipper said. "I will show you your
+bunk."
+
+The cabin was larger than Will had expected. It was about twelve
+feet square, and lofty enough for a tall man to stand upright. By
+the side of the companion stairs was a grate, on which a kettle was
+boiling; and this, as he afterwards learned, was a fixture, except
+when cooking was going on, and the men could have tea whenever they
+chose. Round three sides of the cabin extended lockers, the tops
+forming seats. Above were what looked like cupboards, running round
+the sides; but the skipper pushed open a sliding door, and showed a
+bed place.
+
+"That is your bunk," he said. "You see, there are two at the end,
+and one each side, above, and as many under them--eight bunks, in
+all. You will have to help Jack--that is the other boy--in cooking,
+and make yourself useful, generally, in the day. The crew are
+divided into two watches, but you will not have much to do on deck.
+If the night is clear you can sleep, except when the trawl is being
+got up. Of a thick or stormy night, you will keep your watch.
+
+"Now, as the other lad is more handy on deck than you are, you can
+take charge here. All you have to do is to see that the kettle is
+kept boiling. You can come on deck and lend a hand, if wanted; but
+you must come down sometimes, and see the fire is all right."
+
+After inspecting the contents of the kettle, and seeing that it was
+full, Will climbed up the steep ladder again; and was soon working
+away, coiling down the ropes with the other lad, while the crew
+hoisted sails and got the boat under weigh.
+
+"Are there only two hands under the captain?" he asked the other
+boy.
+
+"There are two others," the boy said. "They will come on board
+after we get out of the river, and you'll see they will be just as
+drunk as they can stand."
+
+"What, drunk at this time in the morning?"
+
+"Yes, they got drunk last night and, as they won't have fairly
+slept it off, they will be beginning again this morning. The old
+man will look them up, and get them off."
+
+"Who is the old man?"
+
+"Old Eastrey, of course, stupid.
+
+"I wish they were all on board. There's a fine breeze, and I hate
+wasting four or five hours off the bar, waiting for the hands to
+come off."
+
+"I wonder the old man stands it," Will said.
+
+"He can't help it," the other answered. "Scarce a smack goes out of
+Yarmouth without half the hands being drunk, when she starts. They
+don't get much chance afterwards, you see; and they sleep it off by
+night, so it don't make any odds. Our skipper is always sober, and
+that's more than many of them are. I have gone out when me and the
+other boy were the only two sober on board."
+
+"But isn't it very dangerous?"
+
+"Dangerous? No," the boy said, "one of them is sure to be sober
+enough to manage to stand at the helm and, though I've bumped
+pretty heavy on the sands, sometimes, we generally strike the
+channel. There is no fear of anything else. We never start, if a
+gale is blowing; and the smacks are safe in anything but a gale.
+They are too deep to capsize and, at sea, there's no more
+drinking."
+
+The smack dropped down the river and stood, off and on, near its
+entrance. Will was delighted with the bright sea, dotted with ships
+and fishing craft. The sun was shining, and there was just enough
+wind to send the smack along briskly through the water, without
+raising any waves sufficiently high to give her a perceptible
+motion. At eight o'clock the captain went on shore in the boat,
+with a man, to look after the absent sailors; leaving only one hand
+and the two boys on board. At ten the boat was again seen, coming
+out.
+
+"One, two, three, four," the boy said, "he has got them both. Now
+we shall be off."
+
+The boat was soon alongside. The two drunken men were helped on
+board and, at once, went below to sleep themselves sober. Then the
+boat was hoisted on board and, the second hand taking the helm, the
+Kitty started fairly on her way.
+
+"Now," the captain said, "let us get her a little tidy."
+
+It took some hours' work before the deck was washed, the ropes
+coiled down, and everything ship-shape. By the time all was done,
+the low coast of Norfolk had sunk below the horizon, and the smack
+was far out at sea. There was more motion now, but the wind was
+still light.
+
+The skipper was pleased with the earnestness and alacrity which the
+new apprentice showed.
+
+"Now, Jack," he said to the other boy, "take Will below with you,
+and show him how to make tea."
+
+The process of tea making, on board a smack, is not a difficult one
+to master; the sole operation consisting in putting a few more
+spoonfuls of tea into the kettle boiling over the fire, when it
+begins to get low, and filling up with fresh water. But, simple as
+the thing was, William Gale did not learn it on that occasion. He
+had been feeling somewhat shaky, even while on deck; and the heat
+of the cabin, and the smell of some grease which Jack had just put
+in the frying pan, preparatory to cooking some fish brought off
+from shore, completed the effect of the rising sea. Until next
+morning he was not in a condition to care, even had the tea
+remained unmade to the end of time. He did not go below, but lay
+under the shelter of a tarpaulin, on deck.
+
+In the morning, the skipper roused him up.
+
+"Now, lad, just take off your coat and shirt. Here is a bucket of
+water. Put your head in that, and give yourself a good sluice; and
+then come down and have a cup of tea, and a bit of biscuit, and you
+will find yourself all right again."
+
+Will followed the instructions, and found himself wonderfully
+better.
+
+"Now, lad, lend a hand in tidying up on deck. There is nothing like
+work, for keeping off seasickness. Jack shall cook, for today."
+
+The boy set to work with a will; and felt so refreshed that, by one
+o'clock, he was able to go below and take his share of the dinner.
+At present, while on their way to the fishing grounds, their meals
+were taken at the same time as on shore but, once at work, there
+were only two meals a day. Of these the first was taken when the
+fishing was over, the fish cleaned, picked, weighed, and
+packed--the hour varying between nine and eleven. The second meal
+was taken before the trawl was lowered, at six or seven o'clock in
+the evening.
+
+After five days' sailing, the smack arrived off the fishing ground;
+but another two days were spent in finding the fleet, as the
+fishing grounds extend over a distance of some hundreds of miles.
+When they came up with it, William Gale was astonished at the vast
+number of boats that dotted the sea.
+
+In the Yarmouth fleet there are between four and five hundred
+vessels and, were it not that the most perfect order and discipline
+reign, the number of accidents which would occur, from so many
+boats fishing close to each other at night, would be terrible. The
+fleet is commanded by one of the most experienced skippers, who is
+termed the admiral. His authority is absolute. He leads the fleet
+to the grounds he selects for fishing and, by signals by day and
+rockets by night, issues his orders--when the nets are to be
+lowered down and drawn up, the course which is to be steered, and
+the tack on which they are to stand.
+
+The fishing is entirely done at night. The trawls are let down
+about dusk, and the fleet attached to these moving anchors forge
+slowly ahead and to leeward, until daybreak. Then the trawls are
+got in, and the fleet sail in a body to the spot where the admiral
+decides that fishing shall be continued in the evening. At 10
+o'clock at night the trawls are hauled in, and the nets emptied.
+All hands are called up for this operation. When it is concluded,
+the trawl is again lowered and the fish cleaned and packed; by the
+light of a torch formed of rope, dipped in tar. The watch who have
+hitherto been on deck turn in, and the others remain on deck until
+morning, when the nets are again hauled in.
+
+There is not, indeed, much for the watch to do; as the smack needs
+no steering, and the attention of the men on deck is directed
+chiefly to see that no other smack drifts down upon them. Should
+there appear any danger of this, a flare is lit to warn the other
+smacksmen. The trawl rope is slacked out or hauled in, as the case
+may require and, generally, volleys of strong language pass between
+the respective crews.
+
+The trawl beam is a heavy pole, some 30 or 35 feet long. At each
+end are fitted strong iron hoops, of about three feet in diameter.
+These keep the pole from touching the ground, and keep open the
+mouth of the net; one side of which is attached to the pole, while
+the other drags along the bottom. The net resembles in shape a
+long, deep purse; and has various pockets and other contrivances by
+which, when a fish has once entered its mouth, it is prevented from
+returning.
+
+The trawl rope--which is from 40 to 80 yards in length, according
+to the depth of water--is hauled in by means of a winch; and its
+great weight taxes the united strength of the crew, to get it level
+with the bulwark. When it is up, the net is hauled on board, the
+small end is opened, and the fish tumble on to the deck. They are
+then separated and packed in trunks--as the wooden cases, in which
+they are sent to market, are called.
+
+Soles fetch by far the highest price, and fortunate are the crew
+who get a good haul of this fish; for the men work upon shares, an
+account being kept of all the sales made, during the fishing trip.
+The owner deducts the cost of the provisions and stores which have
+been put on board, and takes one or more shares for the vessel.
+Each man has one share, the skipper and mate receiving rather a
+larger proportion than the others; thus the men have a lively
+interest in each haul, and great is the satisfaction when the net
+comes up well filled, and there is seen to be a good proportion of
+soles among the contents.
+
+The coarse fish--as they are called--include brill, haddock, hake,
+ling, whiting, and many others. Turbot are also caught. In each
+haul there would probably be a vast number of objects which would
+delight the heart of a naturalist. Dog fish, too, are sometimes
+taken; as are conger eels, and horse mackerel. Stones, and oysters,
+too, come up in the nets; and the latter are the betes-noires of
+the fishing. Sometimes, when the fleet gets over a bed of oysters,
+a score of nets will be lost in a single night for, when the bag
+becomes full of oysters, its weight is so great that the utmost
+power of the fishermen's exertions, on the winch, is insufficient
+to lift it from the bottom; and there is nothing to be done but to
+cut the rope, and abandon trawl and net. Upon these occasions the
+language applied to the admiral is scarcely of a kind for polite
+ears.
+
+The food of the crews, when once upon the fishing ground, consists
+almost wholly of fish. With the exception of soles, each man may
+select any fish he fancies from the glistening mass upon the deck;
+and the amount which each consumed at a meal at first astonished
+William Gale, accustomed as he was to meager workhouse rations. He
+soon, however, found himself able to keep up with the rest; but the
+operation of frying seemed sometimes interminable, so many times
+had the pan to be filled and emptied.
+
+Hard biscuits were eaten with the fish, and the whole washed down
+with copious draughts of tea, without milk. Two or three times a
+week the men would, as a change, have a meal of salt meat; and on
+Sundays a duff--or pudding--of flour and currants was made.
+
+A few days after joining the fleet the weather changed, the sky
+became gloomy and threatening. The wind blew hard, and a heavy sea
+got up. Will found that keeping watch at night--which was pleasant
+enough on a fine, star-light night--was a very different thing,
+now. It was no joke looking ahead with the wind blowing fiercely,
+and showers of spray dashing into the eyes; and yet a vigilant
+watch must be kept for, if the rockets which ordered the hauling of
+the trawl were not noticed, some other smack, moving rapidly when
+released from the drag of its net, might at any moment come into
+collision with the smack.
+
+Still more important was it to notice upon which side the trawl was
+to be lowered, after being emptied; and upon which tack the vessel
+was to proceed. For a mistake in this respect would be certain to
+bring the smack across another; in which case the trawl ropes would
+become entangled--involving, in a heavy sea, the certain loss of
+one or the other. Many of the smacks carry dogs, and it is found
+that these become even better watchers than their masters; for they
+can be relied on to call the attention of the watch, by sharp
+barking, to the letting up of the rocket, however distant.
+
+A rocket may seem to be an easy thing to see but, in a large fleet,
+the stern-most smacks may be three or four miles away from the
+leaders and, in a dark, thick night, it is exceedingly difficult to
+make out even a rocket, at that distance.
+
+The wind increased to a gale. The trawls were up now, and the fleet
+lay to. It may be explained that this operation is performed by
+bringing a ship nearly into the eye of the wind, and then hauling
+the foresail across, and belaying the sheet. The aft sail--or
+mizzen--is then hauled tight, and the tiller lashed amidships. As
+the fore-sail pays the vessel off from the wind, the after sail
+brings her up again; and she is thus kept nearly head to sea, and
+the crew go below, and wait till the storm abates.
+
+
+
+Chapter 4: Run Down.
+
+
+William Gale was astonished at the fury of the tempest, and the
+wildness of the sea. Although, at the workhouse, he had often heard
+the wind roaring round the walls, there was nothing to show him the
+force that was being exerted. There were but few trees in the
+neighborhood, and William had hardly ever been without the walls,
+except in fine summer weather. He was, therefore, almost bewildered
+by the force and fury of the gale; and by the noise, as it shrieked
+through the rigging, and howled across the water. The occasional
+flapping of the sails, and the rattling of the heavy blocks added
+to the din; and it seemed to him that the Kitty which, like all
+fishing smacks, was very deep in the water, must be completely
+engulfed by the great waves which swept down upon her.
+
+Several times, indeed, he was obliged to leap down into the cabin,
+to avoid being swept away by the great masses of green water
+which--pouring over her bows--swept aft, carrying away all before
+them. But the Yarmouth smacks are admirable sea boats and, pounded
+and belabored as she was, the Kitty always shook off the water that
+smothered her, and rose again for the next wave. In twenty-four
+hours the gale abated, the scattered fleet were assembled--each
+flying its flag--and it was found that three were missing, having
+either foundered, or been driven away from their consorts.
+
+With the return of fine weather the fishing began again, and
+William thoroughly enjoyed his life. The skipper was kind and
+forbearing; he neither ill treated the boys, himself, nor permitted
+any of the crew to do so; and everything went on regularly and
+comfortably. There were a few books on board and, of an evening,
+after the trawl was lowered and before the watch below turned into
+their bunks, William--who was the best reader on board--would be
+asked to read aloud for an hour. Sometimes there were songs and, as
+the Kitty was fortunate, and her taking of fish good, the men were
+all cheerful and good tempered.
+
+Once every three or four days, the collecting steamer came in
+sight; then there was a general race, in the fleet, to put the
+trunks of fish on board her. Each did his best to be in good time
+for, when the catch had been heavy, the steamer was sometimes
+unable to take the whole of it; in which case the portion left
+behind would be wholly spoilt, before the arrival of another
+steamer. The whole of the fleet, therefore, ran down towards the
+steamer as soon as she was seen; the heavy boats were tossed
+overboard, and the trunk lowered into them, and two hands jumped in
+to row them to the steamer. Round her a swarm of boats would soon
+be collected, each striving to get alongside, to deliver the fish.
+
+In calm weather the scene was simply amusing but, when the sea was
+high, it was exciting and even dangerous; indeed, in the course of
+a year more lives are lost, in the process of taking the fish from
+the smack to the steamer, than in vessels foundered by gales.
+
+Sometimes the fleet will be joined by Dutch trading smacks, who
+exchange fresh bread and meat, tobacco, and spirits for fish. This
+traffic is the cause, alike, of loss to the owners, by the fish
+thus parted with; and of injury to the men, by the use of spirits.
+Fortunately the skipper of the Kitty--although not averse to the
+use of spirits, on shore--was a strict man at sea, and saw that no
+one took more than a single glass of grog, of an evening.
+
+Over and over again, Will congratulated himself that he had the
+good fortune to make his first voyage under such a skipper; for he
+shuddered at the stories Jack told him, of the cruelties and
+barbarities with which apprentices are treated on board some of the
+smacks. Although, however, there is no doubt many brutal skippers
+hail from Yarmouth; the fleet from that town bears a good
+reputation, in comparison with that of Grimsby--where the number of
+apprentices returned as drowned, each year, is appalling.
+
+One night, when the wind was high and the fleet trawling lower down
+the North Sea than usual, Will--who was on deck--was startled at
+seeing a great ship bearing down upon the smack. He gave a shout of
+terror and warning, which was joined in by the crew on deck. One
+ran for the hatchet to cut the trawl, and thus give steerage way to
+the smack.
+
+It was too late. In another moment the great ship bore down upon
+them with a crash, and the Kitty sunk beneath the waves. The
+bowsprit of the vessel projected across the deck, just at the point
+where William Gale was standing and, in a moment, he caught at the
+bob stay and quickly hauled himself on to the bowsprit. Climbing
+along this, he was soon on board.
+
+Two or three sailors were leaning over the bows, peering into the
+darkness. They had not seen the smack, until too late to avoid it;
+and the collision, which had proved fatal to the Kitty, had
+scarcely been felt by the ship. Will was at ones taken to the
+captain, who spoke English. The boy implored him to turn back, but
+the captain shook his head.
+
+"It would be useless," he said; "the sea is heavy and, in these
+long boots--" and he pointed to the sea boots, up to the thigh,
+which all fishermen wear, "--no man could swim for two minutes; nor
+would there be a chance, if they could, of our finding them on so
+dark a night. I am very sorry, my lad, but it cannot be helped. It
+would take half an hour to bring the ship about, and go back to the
+spot where the smack sunk; and we might not get within half a mile
+of it. You know that, as well as I do."
+
+Will had been long enough at sea to recognize the truth of what the
+captain said. As he was led forward, he burst into tears at the
+thought of the loss of his kind friend the captain, and the rest of
+his mates. The sailor who accompanied him patted him on the back,
+and spoke cheeringly to him in a foreign language; and he was soon
+between decks with the crew. Several of these could speak English,
+and Will found that he was on board a Dutch merchantman, bound with
+troops for Java.
+
+The wind got up and, in the morning, it was blowing a heavy gale
+from the east; and the vessel, with reefed topsails, was running
+for the straits between Dover and Calais, at twelve knots an hour.
+After breakfast, the captain sent for William.
+
+"I am sorry, for your sake, that the state of the weather will
+prevent our communicating with any ship we may meet. But I promise
+you that, if the gale breaks before we are fairly out from the
+channel, I will heave to and put you on board a homeward-bound
+ship."
+
+Such a chance did not occur. For four or five days the gale
+continued with great severity and, before it ceased, the ship was
+well down the coast of Spain, on her way south. When the captain
+saw that there was but small chance of his being able to transship
+his involuntary passenger, he said to him:
+
+"Look you, my lad. I fear that you will have to make the voyage
+with me, for we shall not touch at any port, until we arrive at our
+destination. If you like, I will ship you as a hand on board, as
+from the day of the collision. A hand, more or less, will make no
+difference to the owners; and the money will be useful to you, when
+you leave the ship. Of course, you can return in her, if you think
+fit; but it is likely enough that, when we reach Java, we may be
+sent up to China for a homeward cargo--in which case I will procure
+you a passage in the first ship sailing for your home."
+
+Will gladly accepted the offer. He was, however, by no means
+penniless for, upon the morning after his coming on board, the
+Dutch officers and passengers--hearing what had happened in the
+night--made a collection among themselves, and presented the boy
+with a purse containing fifteen pounds.
+
+It was a long voyage, but not an unpleasant one for William. His
+duties were not very heavy--he had far less to do than had been the
+case, on board the smack. A month on board the Kitty had done much
+towards making a sailor of him, for there are no better seamen in
+the world than the Yarmouth smacksmen. Going aloft was, at first, a
+trial; but he soon learned his duties and, being a strong and
+active lad, he was quickly able to do efficient work; and speedily
+gained the good opinion of the Dutch sailors, by his good temper
+and anxiety to please.
+
+They ran some little distance to the south of the Cape before
+shaping an easterly course, to avoid the bad weather so frequently
+met with there and, beyond encountering two or three gales, of no
+exceptional severity, nothing occurred to break the monotony of the
+voyage, until the coasts of Java were in sight. Upon their arrival
+in port, they found no vessel there about to sail for Europe; and
+the captain's expectation was fulfilled, as he found orders
+awaiting him to proceed to China, when he had landed the troops and
+discharged his cargo. Will determined to continue his voyage in her
+to that place.
+
+Among the ship boys on board was one between whom, and Will Gale, a
+great friendship had been struck up. He was a year or two Will's
+senior, but scarcely so tall; upon the other hand, he was nearly
+twice his girth. He talked but little, but his broad face was ever
+alight with a good-tempered grin. He spoke a few words of English;
+and Will had, when first picked up, been given specially into his
+charge. Will's superior activity and energy astonished the Dutch
+lad, whose movements were slow and heavy; while Will, on his part,
+was surprised at the strength which Hans could exert, when he
+chose. One day, when Will had been plaguing him, and ventured
+within his reach, the lad had seized and held him out at arm's
+length, shaking him as a dog would a rat, till he shouted for
+mercy.
+
+The two were soon able to get on in a queer mixture of Dutch and
+English and, when words failed, they would eke out their words by
+gestures.
+
+The vessel had sailed but a few days from Java when there were
+signs of a change of weather. Hitherto it had been lovely; now a
+slight mist seemed to hang over the sea while, overhead, it was
+clear and bright. There was not a breath of wind, and the sails
+hung listlessly against the masts. Will--who was leaning against
+the bulwarks, chatting to Hans--observed the captain, after looking
+round at the horizon, go into his cabin. He reappeared in a minute,
+and spoke to the officer; who immediately shouted an order for "all
+hands to shorten sail."
+
+"What is that for?" Will said, wonderingly; "there is not a breath
+of wind."
+
+"I egzpect captain haz looked at glass," Hans said, "find him fall.
+I egzpect we going to have ztorm--very bad ztorms in dese zeas."
+
+Will ran aloft with the sailors and, in ten minutes, every inch of
+canvas--with the exception of a small stay sail--was stripped from
+the ship. Still, there was not a breath of wind. The sea was as
+smooth as glass, save for a slight ground swell. Although the mist
+did not seem to thicken, a strange darkness hung over the sky; as
+if, high up, a thick fog had gathered. Darker and darker it grew,
+until there was little more than a pale twilight. The men stood in
+twos and threes, watching the sea and sky, and talking together in
+low tones.
+
+"I don't like this, Hans," Will said. "There is something awful
+about it."
+
+"We have big ztorm," Hans replied, "zyclone they call him."
+
+Scarcely had Hans spoken when the sky above seemed to open, with a
+crash. A roar of thunder, louder than ten thousand pieces of
+artillery, pealed around them while, at the same moment, a blinding
+flash of lightning struck the mainmast, shivering it into
+splinters, and prostrating to the deck five seamen who were
+standing round its foot. As if a signal had been given by the peal
+of thunder, a tremendous blast of wind smote the vessel and,
+stripped though she was of sails, heaved her over almost to the
+gunwale.
+
+For a moment, the crew were paralyzed by the suddenness of the
+catastrophe; stunned by the terrible thunder, and blinded by the
+lightning. None seemed capable of moving. Will had instinctively
+covered his eyes with his hands. It seemed to him, for a moment,
+that his sight was gone. Then the voice of the captain was heard,
+shouting:
+
+"Helm, hard up. Out axes, and cut away the wreck, at once!"
+
+Those who were least stupefied by the shock sprang, in a dazed and
+stupid way, to obey the order. Will drew out his knife and, feeling
+rather than seeing what he was doing, tried to assist in cutting
+away the shrouds of the fallen mast--it had gone a few feet above
+the deck. Presently he seemed, as he worked, to recover from his
+stupor; and the power of sight came back to him. Then he saw that
+the vessel--taken on the broadside by the gale--was lying far over,
+with several feet of her lee deck under water. So furious was the
+wind that he could not show his head over the weather bulwark. The
+sea was still smooth, as if the water was flattened by the force of
+the wind. The stay sail had been blown into ribbons.
+
+In order to get the ship's head off the wind, the head of the jib
+was hauled up a few feet. It happened to be a new and strong one
+and, although it bellied and lashed, as if it would tear itself
+into fragments, it still stood. Again the captain gave an order,
+and the sail was hauled up to its full height. Still further the
+vessel heaved over; and Will expected, every moment, that she would
+capsize. Then, gradually, her head paid off, and slowly she
+righted, and flew before the gale.
+
+"That was a near squeak," Will said.
+
+"What is zqueak?" Hans shouted.
+
+"I mean a close shave," Will replied.
+
+Hans' blue eyes opened wider than usual.
+
+"A zhave!" he repeated; "what are you talking about zhaving?"
+
+"No, no," Will said, laughing, "I mean a narrow escape of being
+capsized."
+
+Hans nodded. There was no time for talk, for orders were given for
+getting preventer stays on the foremast. The jib, having done its
+work, had been hauled down the instant the ship payed off; and a
+small storm sail set, in its place.
+
+The men now had time to attend to those who had been struck by
+lightning. Three of them were found to be dead, but the other
+two--who were stunned and senseless--still lived, and were lifted
+and carried below.
+
+Serious as the disaster had been, Will felt that the stroke of
+lightning had saved the ship. The pressure of the wind, upon two
+masts and hull, had nearly sufficed to capsize her. Had the main
+mast stood, he felt that she must have gone over.
+
+The sea got up in a very few minutes but, being now only in light
+ballast, the vessel rose easily over them. Four men were at the
+helm, for the waves soon became so high that the ship yawed
+dangerously on her course. The gale seemed to increase, rather than
+diminish in fury; and the sea, instead of following in regular
+waves, became a perfect chaos of tossing water, such as Will had
+never before seen. He understood it, however, when--half an hour
+after the outburst of the gale--he heard one of the men, who had
+just been relieved at the wheel, say that in that time the ship had
+already run twice round the compass. She was therefore in the very
+center of the cyclone, and the strangely tossed sea was accounted
+for.
+
+The motion of the ship was extraordinary. Sometimes she was thrown
+on one side, sometimes on the other. Mountains of water seemed to
+rise suddenly beside her, and tumbled in great green masses over
+the bulwarks. So wild and sudden were her movements that even the
+oldest sailors were unable to keep their feet; and all clung on to
+shrouds, or belaying pins. Will and Hans had lashed themselves by
+the slack of a rope to the bulwarks, close to each other, and there
+clung on; sometimes half drowned by the waves, which poured in
+above them; sometimes torn from their feet by the rush of green
+water, as the ship plunged, head foremost, into a wave, or shipped
+one over her poop.
+
+Presently there was a crash that sounded even above the fury of the
+gale--the fore top-mast had gone, at the cap. The axes were again
+called into requisition, for a blow from the floating spar would
+have instantly stove in the side. While engaged upon this, the
+captain called two of the men with axes aft. These were set to work
+to chop through the shrouds of the mizzen and, in a minute later,
+the mast snapped asunder on the level of the deck, and went over
+the side with a crash, carrying away several feet of the bulwark.
+This act was necessitated by the loss of the fore top-mast, as the
+pressure of the wind upon the mizzen would have brought her head
+up, and laid her broadside to the gale.
+
+The motion of the vessel was now considerably easier, and there was
+no longer any difficulty in keeping her dead before the wind. She
+was now describing much larger circles in her course, showing that
+she was farther removed from the center of the cyclone. After five
+or six hours, the extreme violence of the wind somewhat abated, and
+it seemed to settle down into a heavy gale.
+
+For two days the vessel ran before it. She had made a good deal of
+water, from the opening of the seams by straining, and the pumps
+were kept going. They were, they found, able to prevent the water
+from gaining upon them; and all felt that they should weather the
+tempest, provided that they were not dashed upon any of the islands
+in which this portion of the ocean abounds.
+
+The crew had had no regular meals, since the gale began; for the
+caboose had been broken up, and washed overboard, soon after the
+commencement of the storm; and they had been obliged to be content
+with biscuits. There was little to be done on deck and, the watch
+over, they passed their time in their bunks.
+
+In the afternoon of the third day of the tempest, the cry was
+raised of "Breakers ahead!" Will, with his comrades of the watch
+below, sprang from their berths and hurried on deck. Far ahead, as
+the vessel lifted on the waves, could be seen a gleam of white
+water.
+
+In anticipation of such a danger, a small spar had been erected
+upon the stump of the mizzen, and steadied with strong stays. Sail
+was now hoisted upon this, and an effort was made to bring the
+vessel's head to wind. Watching for a favorable moment between the
+passage of the heavy seas, the helm was put down and, slowly, her
+head came up into the wind. Under such sail, the captain had no
+hope of being able to reach out, in the teeth of the gale; but he
+hoped to be able to claw off the shore until clear of the land,
+which lay to leeward of him.
+
+That hope soon vanished. One of the mates was sent to the top of
+the foremast, and descended with news that, as far as could be
+seen, the line of breakers stretched away, both on her beam and
+quarter. As the minutes went by the anxious crew could see, but too
+clearly, that the ship was drifting down upon the land; and that
+she must inevitably be wrecked upon it.
+
+The outlines of the shore could now be seen--a forest of tossing
+trees, behind which high land could be made out, through the
+driving clouds. Orders were now given to prepare to anchor, but all
+knew that the chances were slight, indeed. The water is for the
+most part deep, close alongside the islands of the Eastern
+Archipelago and, even were the holding ground good, hemp and iron
+would hardly hold the vessel head to the gale, and tremendous sea.
+
+When within a quarter of a mile of the breakers, the man with the
+lead proclaimed a depth of ten fathoms. This was better than they
+had expected. The jib was lowered, and her head brought dead to
+wind. The captain shouted "cut," and, in an instant, the stoppers
+were severed, and two heavy anchors dropt into the sea. One had a
+heavy chain cable, the other hemp; and these were allowed to run
+out to the bits. The vessel brought up with less shock than could
+be expected. A wave or two passed under her, and still her cable
+held.
+
+A gleam of hope began to reign, when a mountainous sea was seen,
+approaching. Higher and higher it rose and, just as it reached the
+ship, it curled over and crashed down upon her deck. The cables
+snapped like pack thread, and a cry of despair arose from the crew.
+The captain was calm and collected, and shouted orders for the jib
+to be again hoisted, and the helm put up; so as to run her, head
+first, on to the shore.
+
+As they neared the line of breakers, they could see heads of jagged
+rocks rising among them while, beyond, a belt of smooth water--a
+quarter of a mile wide--extended to the land. The ship's head was
+directed towards a point where no rocks appeared above the surface.
+Everyone held their breath and, clinging to the bulwarks, awaited
+the shock.
+
+The vessel lifted on a great wave, just as she came to the line of
+broken water and, as she settled down, struck with a tremendous
+crash. So great was the shock that she broke in two, amidships, as
+if she had been made of paper; the portion aft going instantly to
+pieces and, at once, the sea around was covered with fragments of
+wreck, bales, boxes, and casks. Another great sea followed, filling
+the now open ship, forcing up the deck, and sweeping everything
+before it.
+
+William Gale and Hans had gone as far forward as possible.
+
+"Come out to the end of the bowsprit," Will said to Hans; and the
+two lads crawled out together, and sat on the end of the spar.
+
+The sea beneath them was white as milk, with the foam which poured
+over the reef; but Will thought that they were beyond the rocks.
+Every sea which struck the wreck added to the disaster; until a
+larger one than usual struck it, and broke it into fragments. The
+lads clung to the spar, as it fell. It sank deep in the water, but
+they retained their hold until it came to the surface, and Will
+looked round.
+
+They were safely beyond the edge of the reef. The sea was still
+rough and broken; but it was quiet, compared to that beyond the
+reef. He saw that the fore mast was floating near and, to it,
+several were clinging.
+
+In a quarter of an hour the spar floated to land, the boys felt the
+bottom with their feet, and soon scrambled ashore. A few minutes
+later the fore mast also drifted up; and several men, clinging to
+fragments of the wreck, were also cast ashore. In all eleven men,
+including the first mate, were saved.
+
+
+
+Chapter 5: The Castaways.
+
+
+After waiting on the shore, until all hope that any more of their
+shipmates survived was at an end, the party--by the mate's
+orders--detached a sail from a yard that had drifted ashore, and
+carried it well into the wood; where they were sheltered, to some
+extent, from the force of the gale. A stout pole was then cut, and
+lashed between two trees. The sail was thrown over this, and pegged
+down at both sides. A fire was lit, with some difficulty. Then a
+quantity of ferns and branches of trees were cut. These made a soft
+and elastic bed, and the whole party slept heavily until the
+morning.
+
+Then they went back to the shore. It was littered thickly with
+fragments of wreck, casks, boxes, and other articles. Here, too,
+were nearly a score of the corpses of their shipmates. The first
+duty was to dig a long shallow trench in the sand, beyond high
+water mark; and in this the bodies of their drowned comrades were
+laid.
+
+The storm was now breaking. Glimpses of blue sky were visible
+overhead, and the wind had greatly abated. The sea upon the reef
+was, however, as high as ever. Setting to work, they hauled a large
+number of boxes and bales beyond the reach of the waves. One of the
+casks contained biscuits and, knocking in the head, they helped
+themselves to its contents, and sat down to talk over their
+position.
+
+"I am not sure," the mate said, "that our poor comrades there--"
+and he nodded towards the grave, "--have not the best of it. The
+inhabitants of most of these islands are bloodthirsty pirates who,
+if they find us, will either cut our throats at once, or keep us as
+slaves. Our only hope is that we may not be discovered, until we
+have time to build a boat in which to sail away to Singapore, or
+back to Java.
+
+"Had we been wrecked further south, things would have been more
+hopeful; for the Papuans are friendly, and inoffensive people.
+These islands here are inhabited by Malays, the most bloodthirsty
+pirates in the world. However, we must hope that we may not be
+found, before we have finished a boat.
+
+"My chest is among those which have been washed up, and there are a
+few tools in it. I always had a fancy for carpentry; and it's hard
+if, in a fortnight, we cannot make some sort of craft which will
+carry us. Indeed, if we content ourselves with a strong framework,
+covered with canvas, we may be ready in four or five days."
+
+The men set cheerfully to work, under his directions. In his chest
+was a hatchet, saw, and chisels. With these, young trees of
+flexible wood were cut down and split. A keel was laid, 25 feet in
+length. Cross pieces, 12 feet long, were pegged to this by
+trenails--nails formed of tough and hard wood. The cross pieces
+were then bent upwards, and fastened to the strips which were to
+form the gunwale. Strengthening pieces were placed along, at
+distances of 7 or 8 inches apart, and firmly lashed. When the whole
+was finished, after three days' labor, the framework of a boat 25
+feet long, 3 feet deep, and 7 feet in beam stood upon the beach. A
+barrel of oil had been thrown ashore and, with this, the mate
+intended thoroughly to soak the canvas with which the frame was to
+be covered. The boat would, he calculated, carry the whole of the
+men, with an ample store of food and water for the voyage.
+
+Upon the morning of the fourth day as, on their way to work, they
+emerged from the wood upon the open beach, the mate gave a low cry,
+and pointed along the shore. There, between the reef and the
+island, was a large Malay prahu. The party instantly fell back
+among the trees. The Malays were apparently cruising along the
+reef, to see if the late storm had thrown up the wreckage--which
+might be useful to them--and a loud shout proclaimed their
+satisfaction, as they saw the shore strewn with the remains of the
+Dutch ship. The prahu was rowed to the shore, and fifty or sixty
+Malays sprang from the bows on to the sand.
+
+Scarcely had they done so when a shout, from one of them, called
+the attention of the others to the framework of the boat. There was
+a minute's loud and excited chatter among them. Then they dashed
+forward to the wood, the deep footsteps in the sand showing,
+plainly enough, the direction from which the builders of the boat
+had come and gone. The latter, as the Malay boat neared the shore,
+had retired further into the wood but, from the screen of leaves,
+they were able to see what was going on. As they saw the Malays
+rush, in an excited and yelling throng, towards the wood, the
+little party took to their heels.
+
+"Scatter," the mate said. "Together, they are sure to overtake us;
+singly, we may escape."
+
+"Let us keep together, Hans," Will said, as they dashed along
+through the wild jungle. Torn by thorns, often thrown down by
+projecting roots and low creepers, they kept on; their pace at
+times quickening, as shouts and screams told them that some of
+their comrades had fallen into the hands of the Malays. Presently
+they came upon the little stream which flowed into the sea, close
+to where they had been cast ashore.
+
+"Let us follow this up," Will said. "They can track us, through the
+forest; but the water will set them off our scent."
+
+For a quarter of a mile, they followed the course of the stream;
+stopping breathlessly, many times, as they heard voices in the
+wood, not far off. Presently Will pointed to a tree, rising from a
+clump of bushes, close to the bank.
+
+"Let us get through those bushes," he said. "Be careful, Hans, not
+to break a twig, as you go. We can climb that tree. There are
+plants, with stems like cords, winding round it. The top is so
+thick and bushy that I don't think they can see us, there."
+
+Very carefully they parted the bushes that overhung the stream, and
+entered the thicket. Then they made their way, with great
+difficulty, to the foot of the tree. It was a very large one, with
+a trunk fully 15 feet in diameter, rising some forty feet without a
+branch. Then a number of great arms grew out, at right angles.
+These were covered thickly with parasitic vegetation. Round the
+trunk, like a snake embracing its victim, a great climber had wound
+itself. Its main stem was as thick as a man's arm, and there were
+dozens of smaller, cord-like climbers. Thus, the lads had no
+difficulty in climbing to the point where the branches grew out.
+Above these was a mass of foliage, completely covered by the
+climbers; whose drooping sprays, and clusters, gave the tree the
+appearance of a solid mass of verdure. The boys continued to climb
+until they were nearly at the top of the tree.
+
+"There!" Will said, wiping away the perspiration which streamed
+from his face, "if they do not track us through the bushes to the
+very foot of this tree, I defy them to find us."
+
+For some hours, the wood was alive with noises. The Malays were
+evidently beating every foot of it, and were determined that none
+of their victims should escape. Several times parties of men came
+up the stream, searching the banks on both sides but, happily, even
+their sharp eyes did not detect the spot where the boys had entered
+the bushes and, gradually, the noises ceased and, at night, a great
+glare by the seashore told the lads that their enemies had gathered
+again there; and were continuing, by fire light, the work of
+breaking open and examining the treasures which the sea had cast up
+for them.
+
+"What do you zay, Will? Zhall we get down and go furder into wood,
+or zhall we wait here?"
+
+"I think, anyhow, we had better wait till tomorrow night," Will
+answered. "They may search again, tomorrow, and might come upon our
+tracks. If they don't find us, they may suppose that they have
+caught us all, or that we have escaped right into the interior. If
+they find no traces of us they will, likely enough, set sail before
+night."
+
+There was no difficulty in finding a place in which they could
+sleep; for the cord-like climbers from bough to bough formed
+natural cradles, in which they lay as securely as if in a hammock,
+on board a ship. In the morning they were woke, at daybreak, by the
+cries of the many birds which throng the forests of the Eastern
+Archipelago. No one approached them during the day, and they
+doubted not that the Malays were all hard at work, on the shore.
+
+That night there was no reflection of a fire on the beach. In the
+morning they descended from their perches and made their way
+carefully, and as noiselessly as possible, through the wood; to a
+point upon the shore, a mile distant from the point where they
+landed. Going to the edge of the trees, they were enabled to take a
+view along the shore. It was deserted. The Malay prahu was gone.
+
+Confident that none of their enemies would have remained behind,
+they walked boldly along the shore to the spot where the Malays had
+landed. Every box and barrel had been broken open, and the contents
+carried away. Planks and beams had been split asunder, to obtain
+the copper bolts and fastenings. The framework of the boat had been
+destroyed, and every portion of canvas and rope carried away. The
+lads sat down on the shore.
+
+"What shall we do next, Hans?"
+
+Hans shook his head.
+
+"Perhaps some of the others may have got away, and may join us
+here, today or tomorrow. If any are alive, they would be certain to
+come back here, when they thought the Malays had left."
+
+Hans grunted an assent.
+
+"Anyhow, the first thing to do," Will went on, "is to gather up the
+pieces of biscuits. They have wasted lots, in breaking open the
+barrels, and I am famishing."
+
+Hans rose with alacrity, and they soon were at work collecting
+pieces of biscuits.
+
+"Let us gather up all the pieces, carefully. There are a good lot,
+altogether; and we may want them, badly, before we have done."
+
+In half an hour they had collected about 30 pounds of biscuits and,
+having gone to the stream and taken a drink, they made for the spot
+where their tent had stood. As they expected, they found the canvas
+was gone. They set to work with their knives and, cutting a number
+of boughs, erected a shelter sufficient to shield them from the
+night air.
+
+All day they hoped, but in vain, that some of their comrades would
+return, and listened eagerly to every sound in the forest; but no
+call, or footstep, met their ears. They had no means of lighting a
+fire, the first having been lit by the mate who--being a
+smoker--had had a small tin box of matches in his pocket. This had
+fitted closely, and kept out the water.
+
+"What had we better do, if no one comes back?" Will said, as they
+sat in their little hut.
+
+"Build anoder boat," Hans answered.
+
+"But how are we to do that, Hans? We might make the framework, but
+we have no canvas to cover it with. Besides, even if we had, I have
+no idea of the direction of Singapore, and I doubt if we could find
+our way back to Java."
+
+Hans had no further suggestion to offer.
+
+"I suppose we could live in the forest for some time," Will said.
+"I read a book called Robinson Crusoe, and a sailor there lived on
+a desert island for years; but then he had a gun, and all sorts of
+things. There are plenty of birds but, even if we could make bows
+and arrows, I suppose we should be months before we could shoot
+straight enough to hit them."
+
+Several days passed. The lads found plenty of fruit; but the season
+was advancing, and Will said one day to Hans:
+
+"What on earth are we to do, when the fruit and biscuits are all
+finished?"
+
+Wandering in the woods, they found the bodies of the whole of their
+companions. All were headless, the Malays having carried off these
+coveted trophies. They did not attempt to bury the bodies for, in
+such a climate, decomposition sets in rapidly, and swarms of
+insects complete the work. In the grass near the hut they found one
+treasure--the mate's ax--which had evidently fallen from his belt,
+in his flight, and had been overlooked by the Malays.
+
+"I tell you what, Hans," Will said, one day, "fruit is getting
+scarcer and scarcer, and there are not more than five or six pounds
+of biscuits left. I vote that we make through the forest into the
+interior of the island. There must be some villages scattered
+about. If we enter one boldly, they may not kill us. I don't know
+whether they have any respect for the laws of hospitality, as some
+savages have but, even if they did kill us, it's better than being
+starved to death, here. It's a chance, anyhow.
+
+"What do you say, Hans?"
+
+"I don't zay noding," Hans answered. "I don't have no obinion, at
+all. If you dink zat is ze best plan, let us do it."
+
+So saying, Hans collected the biscuit, tied it up in his
+handkerchief, and was ready to start at once.
+
+"There is no hurry, Hans," Will said, laughing; "still, if we are
+to make a start, we may as well go at once."
+
+Turning their backs upon the sea, they struck into the wood. They
+had never before gone farther than a mile from the shore. After an
+hour's walking, they found that the character of the forest was
+changing: the ground rose rapidly, the thick, tangled undergrowth
+disappeared, and they were able to walk briskly forward, under the
+shade of the large trees. The hill became steeper and steeper, as
+they advanced; and Will knew that they were ascending the hill that
+they had seen from the ship, when she was coming towards the shore.
+
+Three hours after leaving the coast, they were upon its top. The
+ground was rocky here and, in some places, bare of trees. Inland,
+they saw hill rising behind hill, and knew that the island must be
+a large one.
+
+Illustration: Will and Hans in Search of a Shelter.
+
+"Look, Hans, there is smoke curling up at the foot of that hill,
+over there. Don't you see it? It is very faint, but it is certainly
+smoke. There must be a house there and, most likely, a village.
+
+"Come on, we shall get there before the sun sets. I don't think it
+can be more than a mile and a half away."
+
+Hans, as usual, assented and, in about half an hour, they arrived
+at a Malay village. The aspect was curious, each hut being built in
+a tree. At the point where the lower branches started, a platform
+was made. The tree above this was cut down, and on the platform the
+hut was erected--access being obtained to it by a ladder. Several
+of the inhabitants were walking about. These, upon seeing the lads,
+uttered cries of warning and, instantly flying to the ladders,
+which were constructed of light bamboo, climbed to the huts and
+raised the ladders after them. Then, at every door, men appeared
+with bent bows and pointed arrows, threatening the invaders.
+
+Will had cut a green bough, and this he waved as a token of peace;
+while Hans threw up his hands, to show that he was unarmed. Then
+they bowed several times, almost to the ground; held out their arms
+with outstretched hands and, finally, sat down upon the ground.
+
+The Malays apparently understood that their visitors came in peace.
+They held a long conversation among themselves and, at last, the
+ladder of one of the huts--which appeared larger and better
+finished than the others--was lowered, and four men descended. One
+of these carried a kriss in his hand. His bow was slung behind his
+back. The others kept their bows bent in readiness for instant
+action.
+
+The chief was a tall and well-built man, of about forty years of
+age. He, like his followers, was dressed only in a loincloth; he
+had copper bracelets round his wrists. As he approached, the lads
+rose and bowed deeply; then Will held out to him the ax and,
+placing it in his hand, motioned to him that it was a present.
+
+The chief looked pleased at the gift, placed his hands on Will's
+shoulder and nodded, and performed the same gesture to Hans. Then
+he led them towards his hut, and motioned to them to sit down at
+the foot of the tree.
+
+Curious faces were watching from every hut and, as soon as it was
+seen that peace was established, the ladders were lowered and a
+swarm of men, women, and children soon surrounded the visitors. At
+the chief's order a woman approached them, bringing a dish of food.
+This was composed, the boys found, principally of birds; cut up and
+stewed, with some sort of vegetable. The dish was by no means bad
+and, after living for nearly a fortnight upon biscuit and fruit,
+they much enjoyed it.
+
+Presently, women brought bundles of dried fern and spread them at
+the foot of the tree and, soon after it was dark, the boys lay down
+upon them. It was long, however, before they went to sleep; for the
+din and chatter in the village continued, until far into the night.
+The lads guessed that the reason and manner of their coming was
+warmly debated; and judged by their reception that the prevailing
+opinions were favorable, and that the visit from the two white men
+was considered to be a fortunate omen.
+
+The next day they were again amply supplied with food, and were
+constantly surrounded by a little group of women and children, to
+whom their white skins appeared a source of constant wonder. Their
+movements were entirely unchecked, and they were evidently
+considered in the light of guests rather than prisoners.
+
+The next night the village retired to rest early. The boys sat
+talking together, for a long time, and then lay down to sleep.
+Presently, Will thought that he heard a noise and, looking up, saw
+in the moonlight a number of savages, stealthily approaching. They
+carried with them ladders; and intended, he had no doubt, to
+surprise the sleeping villagers. They were already close at hand.
+
+Will shook Hans--who had already gone off to sleep--and pointed out
+to him the advancing foes. These were already in the village and,
+separating, fixed a ladder against each of the huts. So far the
+boys, who lay in the shadow of the hut, had not been noticed. The
+Malays--who belonged to a hostile village--began to climb the
+ladders; when the lads, grasping the heavy sticks which they always
+carried, and springing to their feet with loud shouts, ran to the
+ladders, before the Malays could recover from their astonishment at
+the approach of the white-faced men, rushing upon them.
+
+Half a dozen of the ladders were upset, the men who had mounted
+them coming heavily to the ground. Some of these, as they rose, at
+once took to their heels; others, drawing their krisses, rushed at
+their assailants. But the lads were no longer alone. At the first
+shout, the doors of the huts had opened; and the inhabitants rushed
+out, with their arms. The remaining ladders were instantly
+overthrown, and a shower of arrows poured upon their assailants.
+
+Will and Hans knocked down the foremost of their assailants; and
+the whole body, foiled in their attempted surprise, discomfited at
+the appearance of the strange white-faced men, and exposed to the
+arrows of the defenders, at once darted away--several of their
+number having already fallen, under the shafts from above. With
+exulting shouts, the warriors of the village poured down their
+ladders from the huts, and took up the pursuit; and soon no one
+remained in the village, save the white lads and the women and
+children.
+
+Towards morning the warriors returned, several of them bringing
+with them gory heads, showing that their pursuit had not been in
+vain. The village was now the scene of great rejoicings. Huge fires
+were lighted, and a feast held in honor of the victory. The chief
+solemnly placed the white men, one on each side of him, and made
+them a speech; in which, by his bowing and placing his hand on
+their heads, they judged he was thanking them for having preserved
+their village from massacre. Indeed, it was clear, from the
+respectful manner of all towards them, that they were regarded in
+the light of genii, who had come specially to protect the village
+from the assaults of its enemies.
+
+After the feast was over the chief, after a consultation with the
+rest, pointed to a tree close to that in which his own hut was
+situated. The whole village set to work, ladders were fixed against
+it; and the men, ascending, hacked away with krisses and stone
+hatchets at the trunk. Hans--seeing their object--made signs to the
+chief to lend him his ax and, ascending to the tree, set to work
+with it; doing, in five minutes, more work than the whole of the
+natives employed could have accomplished in an hour. After working
+for some time, he handed the ax to one of the natives, who
+continued the work. The tree was not a large one--the trunk, at
+this point, being about 18 inches in diameter. Half an hour's work
+sufficed to cut it through; and the upper part of the tree fell,
+with a crash.
+
+In the meantime the women had brought in, from the forest, a
+quantity of bamboos and, with these, the men set to work and
+speedily formed a platform. Upon this a hut was erected, the roof
+and sides being covered with palm leaves laid closely together,
+forming a roof impervious to rain. Two large bundles of fern, for
+beds, were then taken up; and the chief, ascending, solemnly
+invited the boys to come up and take possession.
+
+A woman was told off to prepare food for them, and attend to their
+wants and, by nightfall, the lads found themselves in a comfortable
+abode of their own. Pulling up the ladder, after the manner of the
+natives, they sat down to chat over their altered prospects. They
+were now clearly regarded as adopted into the village community,
+and need have no further fear as to their personal security, or
+means of living.
+
+"For the time we are safe," Will said; "but--as I don't want to
+turn Malay, and live all my life with no other amusement than
+keeping my own head on, and hunting for those of the enemies of the
+village--we must think of making our escape, somehow; though at
+present, I own I don't see how."
+
+
+
+Chapter 6: The Attack On The Village.
+
+
+A day or two later a Malay ran at full speed into the village, and
+said a few words which caused a perfect hubbub of excitement. The
+men shouted. The women screamed and, running up the ladders to
+their tree abodes, began gathering together the various articles of
+value, in their eyes. The chief came up to the boys and, by signs,
+intimated that a large number of hostile natives, belonging to
+several villages, were advancing to attack them; and that they must
+fly into the interior.
+
+This was very unwelcome news for the lads. Once removed farther
+from the sea the tribe might, not improbably, take up their abode
+there, as they would fear to return to the neighborhood of their
+enemies. This would be fatal to any chance of the lads being taken
+off by a passing ship. After a few words together, they determined
+to oppose the movement. Will, in a loud voice and with threatening
+gestures, intimated that he disapproved of the plan, and that he
+and his companion would assist them in defending their village.
+
+The Malays paused in their preparations. Their faith in their white
+visitors was very great and, after a few minutes' talk among
+themselves, they intimated to the boys that they would obey their
+orders. Will at once signed to a few men to stand as guards round
+the village, to warn them of the approaching enemy; and then set
+the whole of the rest of the population to work cutting
+sharp-pointed poles, boughs, and thorny bushes. With these a circle
+was made around the trees upon which the village was built.
+Fortunately the hostile Malays had halted in the forest, two or
+three miles away, intending to make their attack by night and, as
+the news of their coming had arrived at noon, the villagers had,
+before they ceased work late in the evening, erected a formidable
+hedge round the village.
+
+Some of the women had been set to work manufacturing a number of
+torches, similar to those used by them for lighting their
+dwellings, but much larger. They were formed of the stringy bark of
+a tree, dipped in the resinous juice obtained from another. Will
+had one of these fastened to each of the trees nearest to the
+hedge. They were fixed to the trunks on the outside, so that their
+flame would throw a light on the whole circle beyond the hedge
+while, within, all would be shadow and darkness.
+
+It was very late before all preparations were completed. Will then
+placed a few men as outposts, some hundred yards in the forest, in
+the direction from which the enemy were likely to approach. They
+were ordered to give the alarm, the moment they heard a noise; and
+were then to run in and enter the circle by a small gap, which had
+been left in the abbatis for the purpose. Many of the men then took
+their posts, with their bows and arrows, in the trees near the
+hedge. The others remained on the ground, ready to rush to any
+point assailed.
+
+For several hours no sound save the calls of the night birds, and
+the occasional distant howls of beasts of prey, were heard in the
+forest; and it was not until within an hour of morning--the hour
+generally selected by Malays for an attack, as men sleep at that
+time the heaviest--that a loud yell, at one of the outposts, told
+that the enemy were close at hand.
+
+Two or three minutes later the scouts ran in, and the gap through
+which they had entered was at once filled up with bushes, which had
+been piled close at hand for the purpose. Aware that their approach
+was discovered, the enemy abandoned all further concealment; and
+advanced with wild yells, intending to strike terror into the
+defenders of the village. As they advanced the torches were all
+lighted and, as the assailants came within their circle of light, a
+shower of arrows from the Malays on the ground, and in the trees
+above, was poured into them.
+
+Yells and screams told that the volley had been a successful one
+but, discharging their arrows in turn, the Malays, with demoniac
+yells, rushed against the village. The advance, however, was
+arrested suddenly when they arrived at the abbatis. From behind its
+shelter, so deadly a rain of arrows was poured in that they soon
+shrank back, and bounded away beyond the circle of light, while
+taunting shouts rose from its defenders.
+
+For a time they contented themselves by distant shouting; and then,
+with a wild yell, charged forward again. Several dropped from the
+fire of arrows, from those in the trees and behind the abbatis but,
+discharging their arrows in return, the assailants kept on until
+they again reached the impediment. Here they strove furiously to
+break through--hacking with their krisses, and endeavoring to pull
+up the stakes with their hands--but the defenders, in the shade
+behind, sent their arrows so fast and thick that the assailants
+again shrank back, and darted away to shelter.
+
+Throughout the night there was no renewal of the attack and, in the
+morning, not a foe was visible. Two or three scouts went out to
+reconnoiter; but no sooner did they enter the forest than one of
+them was shot down, and the rest sent flying back.
+
+"I believe the scoundrels are going to try to starve us out," Will
+said. "Let us speak to the chief, and ask how much provisions they
+have got."
+
+After much pantomime, Will succeeded in conveying his meaning to
+the chief; and the latter at once ordered all the inhabitants to
+produce their stock of food. This was unexpectedly large, and Will
+thought that there was sufficient for a fortnight's consumption. He
+now made signs of drinking, but the reply to this was disheartening
+in the extreme. A few gourds full of water were brought forward,
+and two or three of the close-woven baskets in which water is often
+carried, in this country. There was, in fact, scarce enough to last
+the defenders for a day. The stream from which the village drew its
+supply of water was about a couple of hundred yards away;
+consequently the villagers fetched up their water as they needed
+it, and no one thought of keeping a store.
+
+Will looked in dismay at the smallness of the supply.
+
+"If they really intend to starve us out, Hans, we are done for. No
+doubt they reckon on our water falling short. They would know that
+it was not likely that there would be a supply here."
+
+The natives were not slow to recognize the weak point of their
+defense One or two of the men, taking water baskets, were about to
+go to the stream; but Will made signs to the chief that they must
+not do this. The only hope was that the enemies would draw off; but
+if they saw that water was already short, they would be encouraged
+to continue to beleaguer the place. Will was unable to explain his
+reasons to the chief; but the latter, seeing how great was the
+advantage that they had already gained, by following the counsel of
+their white visitors in the matter of the hedge, acquiesced at once
+in their wishes.
+
+Will then ascended to one of the huts, and carefully reconnoitered
+the whole ground. There was, he saw, at the end farthest from the
+stream, a slight dip in the land extending into the forest.
+Beckoning the chief to join him, he made signs that, at night, the
+warriors should issue silently from the village at this point, and
+make noiselessly through the wood. They would then take a wide
+circuit, till they came upon the stream; and would then, working up
+it, fall upon the enemy in the rear.
+
+The chief was dubious; but Will made an imperative gesture and the
+chief, in a humble manner, agreed to do as he was ordered. The day
+passed slowly and, before nightfall, the supply of water was
+entirely finished. Once or twice scouts had gone out, to see if the
+enemy were still round the village; but returned, each time, with
+the news that they were there.
+
+The last time, just before nightfall, Will directed two or three of
+them to take water buckets, and to go in the direction of the
+stream; signing to them, however, to return the moment they saw
+signs of the enemy. They were soon back and, as Will had expected,
+the sight of the water buckets showed the enemy that the garrison
+of the village were badly supplied, in that respect; and taunting
+shouts arose from the woods, asking them why they did not go down
+to drink.
+
+Will felt certain that the Malays would now draw the greater part
+of their number down to the side of the stream; and that there
+would therefore be the more chance of the garrison making their way
+out, at the other end of the village. Three hours after it was
+dark, the chief mustered all his men. They were about five-and-forty,
+in all. Will signed that each should take with him a water basket or
+large gourd so that, in case they failed in defeating the enemy, and
+breaking up the blockade, they might at least be able to bring a
+supply of water into the village. Will then, with much difficulty,
+explained to the chief that the old men, boys, and women remaining in
+the village were, the moment they heard the sound of the attack upon
+the enemy's rear, to shout and yell their loudest, and to shoot
+arrows in the direction of the enemy.
+
+A few sticks had already been pulled up at the point of the hedge
+through which Will intended to make a sally, and the band now
+passed noiselessly out. The chief himself led the way, the white
+boys following behind him. Lying upon their stomachs, they crawled
+noiselessly along down the little depression and, in ten minutes,
+were well in the wood; without having met with an enemy, although
+they had several times heard voices among the trees, near them.
+
+They now rose to their feet and, making a wide detour, came down,
+after a quarter of an hour's walk, upon the stream. Here the gourds
+and baskets were filled; and then, keeping along by the waterside,
+they continued their march. Presently they saw a number of fires,
+round which many Malays were sitting. They crept noiselessly up
+until within a few yards and then, with a yell, burst upon the
+enemy. Numbers were cut down at once; and the rest, appalled by
+this attack on their rear, and supposing that the inhabitants of
+some other village must have arrived to the assistance of those
+they were besieging, at once fled in all directions. Those
+remaining in the village had seconded the attack by wild shouts, so
+loud and continuous that their besiegers had no reason to suppose
+that their number had been weakened.
+
+For a few minutes the pursuit was kept up; then the chief recalled
+his followers, with a shout. The water baskets--many of which had
+been thrown down in the attack--were refilled, and the party made
+their way up to the village, where they were received with shouts
+of triumph.
+
+The panic of the Malays had been, in no slight degree, caused by
+the appearance of the two boys; who had purposely stripped to the
+waist, and had shouted at the top of their voices as, waving the
+krisses which they had borrowed, they fell upon the foe. The idea
+that white devils were leagued with the enemies against them had
+excited the superstitious fear of the Malays to the utmost; and
+when, in the morning, scouts again sallied from the village, they
+found that the enemy had entirely gone--the fact that they had not
+even returned to carry off the effects which had been abandoned, in
+the first panic, showing that they had continued their flight,
+without stopping, to their distant villages.
+
+The chief, like an able politician, took advantage of the
+impression which his white visitors had created and, the same day,
+sent off messengers to the villages which had combined in the
+attack against them, saying that the white men--his guests--were
+very angry; and that, unless peace was made, and a solemn promise
+given that there should be no renewal of the late attempts, they
+were going to lay a dreadful spell upon the villages. Women and
+children would be seized by disease, and the right arms of the
+warriors wither up.
+
+This terrible threat carried consternation into the Malay villages.
+The women burst into prolonged wailings, and the bravest of the men
+trembled. The messenger said that the white men had consented to
+abstain from using their magical powers until the following day;
+and that the only chance to propitiate them was for deputations
+from the villages to come in, early the next morning, with promises
+of peace and offerings for the offended white men.
+
+It was not for some time afterwards that the lads learned enough of
+the language to understand what had been done; but they guessed,
+from the exultation of the chief, and the signs which he made that
+their late enemies would shortly come in, in an attitude of
+humiliation, that he had in some way succeeded in establishing a
+scare among them.
+
+On the following morning deputations--consisting of six warriors, and
+women bearing trays with fruit, birds, and other offerings--arrived at
+the village. The men were unarmed. At their approach, the chief made
+signs to the boys to take a seat at the foot of the principal tree; and
+then, accompanied by his leading warriors, led the deputation--with much
+ceremony--before them. The women placed their trays at their feet, and the
+men addressed them in long speeches, and with many signs of submission.
+
+The boys played their part well. As soon as they saw what was
+required of them they signified, with an air of much dignity, that
+they accepted the offerings; and then went through the ceremony of
+shaking hands, solemnly, with each of the warriors. Then they made
+a speech in which, with much gesticulation, they signified to the
+visitors that a terrible fate would befall them, should they again
+venture to meddle with the village.
+
+Much awed and impressed, the Malays withdrew. The boys made a
+selection, from the baskets of fruit, for their own eating; and
+then signified, to the chief, that he should divide the rest among
+the inhabitants of the village. When this was done, the boys
+ascended to their tree and passed the day there quietly; the
+villagers indulging in feasting, singing, and rejoicing over their
+victory.
+
+"The worst of all this is," Will said to Hans, "that the more they
+reverence us, and the more useful they find us, the more anxious
+they will be to keep us always with them. However, there is one
+comfort: we are safe, as long as we choose to remain here; and that
+is more than we could have hoped for, when we first landed from the
+wreck. It is curious that the Malays, who have no hesitation in
+attacking English ships, and murdering their crews, have yet a sort
+of superstitious dread of us. But I suppose it is something the
+same way as it was in England, in the days of the persecution of
+old women as witches: they believed that, if left to themselves,
+they could cast deadly spells, and yet they had no hesitation in
+putting them to death. I suppose that it is something of the same
+feeling, here."
+
+
+
+Chapter 7: The Fight With The Prahus.
+
+
+Very frequently, in the days that followed, William Gale and his
+friend Hans talked over the possibility of effecting an escape; but
+the difficulties appeared almost invincible. The various villages
+which, so far as the boys could understand, were scattered at some
+distance apart, had little dealings with each other; and indeed,
+were frequently engaged in feuds. The particular people with whom
+they lived had nothing whatever to do with the sea. They used--at
+least so the boys understood, by their signs--to fish, at one time;
+but they had been robbed of their boats, and maltreated, by some of
+the cruising tribes who lived in villages on the coast, or on
+creeks and rivers.
+
+The possibility of escape seemed small, indeed. To escape they must
+get on board a ship and, to do this, they must first go out to sea;
+and this could only be done in a boat of their own, or in one of
+the piratical prahus. The latter course could not be thought of,
+for the coast pirates were bloodthirsty in the extreme and, even
+could they change their residence to one of the seaside villages,
+and gain the friendship of the inhabitants, they would be no nearer
+to their end. For as these go out to attack, and not to trade with
+European ships, there would be no chance of escaping in that way.
+
+Upon the other hand, they might build a boat of their own; but they
+considered it improbable that the Malays would allow them to
+depart, for they evidently regarded their presence as a prodigy;
+and revered them as having miraculously arrived, at the moment when
+a great danger threatened the village. But, even should they be
+allowed to build a boat and depart, they knew not whither to go.
+They knew nothing of navigation, and were ignorant of the geography
+of the Archipelago; and the chances of their striking upon the one
+or two spots, where, alone they could land with safety, were so
+small that it would be madness to undertake the voyage.
+
+For six months they lived quietly in the Malay village. The people
+instructed them in the use of their blowguns, in which they are
+wonderfully skilful; being able to bring down a bird, sitting on a
+lofty bough of a tree, with almost an unerring accuracy. They also
+taught them to shoot with the bow and arrow, and they found that
+the natives used the roots of various kinds of plants for food. The
+time did not pass unpleasantly and, had they known that it would
+last but a few months, only, they would have enjoyed it much.
+
+At last, after much deliberation, they determined that they
+would--as a first step towards escape--construct a little boat,
+under pretense of wanting to fish. Accordingly one day, when out
+with the chief and two or three of his men in the direction of the
+sea, they pointed there, and signified that they wished to go
+there--for they had picked up a good many Malay words. The chief
+shook his head, but they insisted in so authoritative a manner that
+he gave way, and followed them.
+
+When they reached the shore, they made signs that they wanted to
+construct a boat. Again the chief shook his head vehemently; and
+enforced his meaning by pointing along shore, and going through the
+action first of rowing, then of fighting--intimating that they
+would certainly be killed, if they ventured out, by the fierce
+coast tribes. The boys nodded, to show that they understood what he
+wished to say but, pointing to the water a few yards from shore,
+went through the action of fishing; then, burdening themselves with
+imaginary fish, they pointed to the village, and showed that they
+would supply it with food.
+
+The Malays talked for some time among themselves. They had so vast
+a respect for the white men that they did not like to thwart their
+wishes. The thought, too, of a supply of fish--of which they had
+been long deprived owing to their feuds with some of the coast
+villages--also operated strongly in favor of their yielding an
+assent and, at last, the chief made signs that he agreed and,
+pointing to the village, intimated that assistance should be given
+in building a boat.
+
+The next day, accordingly, ten or twelve men came down to the shore
+with them. A tree was felled, the ends were pointed, and the whole
+formed roughly into the shape of a canoe. Fires were lighted on the
+top and, by dint of flame and ax, a hollow was dug out. The
+operation lasted three days, the men having brought provisions with
+them, so as to avoid making the journey--two and a half hours
+long--to and from the village each day. The boat, when finished,
+was but a rough construction; and would have excited the mockery of
+any of the coast villagers, as they are expert boat builders.
+Still, it was amply sufficient for the purpose for which it was
+intended--namely, for fishing inside the line of reefs.
+
+It was heavy, and paddled slowly; and the lads had a strong
+suspicion that the Malays had purposely made it more clumsy and
+unseaworthy than need be, in order that they should have no
+temptation to attempt a distant journey in it.
+
+There was no difficulty about lines, the Malays being skilled in
+making string and ropes from the fibers of trees. The hooks were
+more difficult but, upon searching very carefully along the shore,
+the lads found some fragments of one of the ship boats; and in
+these were several copper nails which, hammered and bent, would
+serve their purpose well. The lines were ready on the day the canoe
+was finished and, as soon as she was launched, the chief and one of
+the other Malays, and the boys, took their seats in her.
+
+The natives paddled her out nearly to the edge of the reef. Four
+lines, baited with pieces of raw birds' flesh, were thrown
+overboard. A few minutes passed--rather anxiously for the lads, who
+were most desirous that the fishing should be successful, so as to
+afford them an excuse for frequently pursuing it. Then there was a
+bite; and Hans, who held the line, found that it taxed his strength
+to haul in the fish which tugged and strained upon it. When it was
+got into the boat, it proved to be some fourteen pounds in weight.
+By this time two of the other baits had been taken and, in less
+than an hour, they had caught upwards of thirty fish, most of them
+of considerable size.
+
+The natives were delighted and, paddling to shore, the burden was
+distributed among the whole party, with the exception of the chief
+and the two whites. Before starting, a young tree was cut down and
+chopped into lengths of a few feet each; and on these rollers the
+canoe was hauled high up the beach. Then the party set out for the
+village; where their arrival, with so large a supply of food,
+occasioned great rejoicing.
+
+After this, the boys went down regularly, every day, to fish. At
+first three or four of the natives always accompanied them, under
+pretense of carrying back the fish; but really, as they thought, to
+keep a watch over them. To lessen their hosts' suspicions,
+sometimes one or other stayed in the village. As time went on, the
+suspicion of the Malays abated. The number of the guard was
+lessened and, finally, as the men disliked so long a tramp, some of
+the boys were told off to accompany the white men, and assist in
+bringing back their fish. They were in the habit of starting soon
+after daybreak, and of not returning till late in the evening;
+accounting for their long absence by pointing to the sun.
+
+The fishing was always performed immediately they reached the
+coast. When they had caught as many as they and the boys could
+carry, these were placed in a large covered basket; which was sunk
+in the water close to the shore, to keep the fish in good condition
+until they started. Then they would paddle about within the reef
+or, during the extreme heat of the day, lie in the boat, shaded by
+bunches of palm leaves. The Malay boys--who were set on shore after
+the fishing--were left alone; and amused themselves by bathing, or
+passed the time asleep under the trees.
+
+After the first day or two, it had struck the boys that it was
+dangerous to leave the canoe high on the sand; as it would be
+observed, even at a distance, by a passing prahu. Consequently a
+deep trench had been dug from the sea, far enough up to allow the
+canoe, when floating in it, to lie below the level of the beach.
+Before leaving her she was, each day, roughly covered with seaweed;
+and might, therefore, escape observation by any craft passing at a
+short distance from the shore.
+
+In their expeditions along the reef, the boys discovered a passage
+through it. It was of about double the width of a ship, and of
+amply sufficient depth to allow a vessel of any size to cross. At
+all other points, for a distance of a mile or two either way--which
+was the extent of their excursions--the reef came very near to the
+surface; its jagged points, for the most part, showing above it.
+
+Several months passed, and still no sail which promised a hope of
+deliverance had shown over the surface of the sea. Scarce a day
+passed without their seeing the Malay prahus passing up and down
+the coast; but these always kept some distance out, and caused no
+uneasiness to the fishermen. They had, during this time, completed
+the hollowing out of the boat; until her sides were extremely thin,
+and she was so light that she could be paddled at a high rate of
+speed.
+
+They were both now expert with the paddle; and felt that if, in a
+light wind, a vessel should be seen off the coast, they would be
+enabled to row out and reach her. It might be, they knew, months or
+even years before such a ship could be seen. Still, as there were
+many vessels trading among the islands, at any moment an occurrence
+might arise.
+
+One afternoon, they had been dozing under their leafy shade when
+Will, who first awoke, sat up and uttered a cry. Almost abreast of
+them, and but a quarter of a mile outside the reef, was a large
+brig. The wind was light and, with every stitch of canvas set, she
+was making but slow progress through the water. Hans leaped up,
+echoed the cry and, seizing their paddles, they rowed with all
+their strength away to the opening through the reef; passed
+through, and headed for the ship.
+
+They now saw what they had not, at first, observed. At a distance
+of some three miles astern were five large prahus, with their sails
+set, and the banks of oars rising and falling rapidly. The brig was
+chased by the pirates.
+
+The boys rested on their paddles, for a moment.
+
+"They are more than a match for her, I am afraid," Will said. "What
+do you say, Hans, shall we go on, or not?"
+
+Hans made no reply. He was never quick at coming to a decision.
+
+"We had better go," Will went on. "We can see whether they mean to
+fight, or not."
+
+The boys were naked to the waist--for the thorns of the forest had
+long since torn in pieces the shirts which they had on, when they
+landed from the wreck--and their skins were bronzed to a deep
+copper color Still, they differed in hue from the natives of the
+island; and the men on board the brig regarded them with some
+surprise, as they approached it.
+
+"Throw us a rope!" Will shouted as they neared her.
+
+There was a cry of surprise from the crew, at being addressed in
+English; but a rope was thrown, and the boys soon sprang on board.
+They saw, at once, that the ship was an English one.
+
+"Hallo! Where do you spring from?" asked the captain.
+
+"We were shipwrecked here, ten months ago," Will said, "and have
+been living with the natives."
+
+"At any other time, I should have been glad to see you," the
+captain said; "but just at present, if you will take my advice, you
+will get into your canoe and row on shore again.
+
+"As you see," and he pointed to the prahus, "we are chased and,
+although I mean to fight to the last--for there is no mercy to be
+expected from these bloodthirsty scoundrels--I fear the chances are
+small."
+
+Will looked round and saw that the six cannons which the brig
+carried--for vessels trading in the Eastern Archipelago are always
+armed--had already been loosened ready for action; and that a group
+of men were at work mounting a long gun, which had just been raised
+from the hold. Knowing the number of men that the prahus carried,
+Will felt that the chance of a successful resistance was slight.
+
+There were about eighteen men on deck--a number larger than the
+brig would carry in other seas, but necessary in so dangerous a
+trading ground as this. The prahus, however, would each carry from
+eighty to one hundred men; and these, attacking at once from
+opposite sides, would be likely to bear down all opposition.
+
+Suddenly an idea occurred to him.
+
+"Look, sir, there is a passage through the reef, there; with plenty
+of water and width enough for your ship. I can take her through.
+There is no other passage, for some distance. If you take her
+inside, and lay her across the channel, the prahus can only attack
+on one side; and you can place all your guns and strength there."
+
+The captain at once saw the advantage of this scheme.
+
+"Capital!" he exclaimed. "Take the helm at once, my lad.
+
+"Ease off the sheets, men."
+
+They were now nearly opposite the entrance, and the light wind was
+blowing towards the shore. The captain ordered all hands to reduce
+sail, only keeping on enough to give the vessel steerage way. Two
+boats were lowered, and an anchor and cable passed into each and,
+as the brig passed through the opening, the rest of the sail was
+lowered.
+
+The boats rowed to the reef, one on either side. The anchors were
+firmly fixed into the rock and, one being taken from the head and
+the other from the stern, the crews set to work at the capstan, and
+speedily had the vessel safely moored, broadside on, across the
+entrance to the reef.
+
+The Malay boats were now about a mile astern. They had ceased
+rowing, when they saw the vessel headed for the land, supposing
+that the captain was about to run on shore. When, to their
+astonishment, they saw her pass the reef with safety, they again
+set to at their work.
+
+The guns were now all brought over to the side facing the entrance,
+and were loaded to the muzzle with bullets. A number of shots,
+belonging to the long gun, were placed by the bulwarks; in
+readiness to hurl down into the prahus, should they get alongside.
+The sailors--though determined to fight till the last--had, when
+the boys came on board, been making their preparations with the
+silence of despair. They were now in high spirits, for they felt
+that they could beat off any attempt of the enemy to attack them.
+
+When the Malays were abreast of the ship, they ceased rowing and
+drew close together, and evidently held a consultation.
+
+The brig at once opened fire with her long gun, and the first shot
+hulled one of the prahus, close to the water's edge.
+
+"That's right, Tom," the captain said, "stick to the same craft. If
+you can sink her, there is one the less."
+
+Several more shots were fired, with such effect that the Malays
+were observed jumping overboard in great numbers, and swimming
+towards the other boats--their own being in a sinking condition.
+The other four prahus at once turned their heads towards shore, and
+rowed with full speed towards the ship.
+
+They knew that the entrance, of whose existence they had been
+previously unaware, was an exceedingly narrow one and, as they
+neared the shore, could see--by the line of breaking surf--that it
+could, at most, be wide enough for one to pass at a time,
+Accordingly one drew ahead and, discharging the cannon which it
+carried in its bow, rowed at full speed for the entrance; another
+following so close behind that its bow almost touched the stern.
+
+"Train the guns to bear on the center of the channel," the captain
+said. "Let the three bow guns take the first boat, the other three
+the second.
+
+"Do you, Tom, work away at the two behind."
+
+The prahus came along at a great rate, the sweeps churning up the
+water into foam. The leading boat dashed through the channel, the
+sweeps grating on the rocks on either side. Her bow was but two
+yards distant from the side of the ship when the captain gave the
+word. The three cannon poured their contents into her, sweeping her
+crowded decks and tearing out her bottom. Great as was her speed,
+she sank below the water, just as her bow touched the side of the
+ship.
+
+Ten seconds later the command was again given; and a broadside, as
+destructive, was poured into the second boat. The damage done was
+somewhat less, and her bow reached the side of the ship. A dozen
+Malays sprang on board, as their boat sank under their feet; but
+the sailors were ready and, with musket, pistol, and cutlass fell
+upon them, and either cut down or drove them overboard. The sea
+around was covered with swimmers, but the ship was too high out of
+the water for them to attempt to board her; and the Malays at once
+struck out for the shore, the sailors keeping up the musketry fire
+upon them, until out of range.
+
+The other two boats had not followed. The mate had plumped a shot
+from the long gun full into the bow of the first and--seeing the
+destruction which had fallen upon their leaders--both turned their
+heads and made for sea; the mate continuing his fire until they
+were out of range, one shot carrying away the greater part of the
+oars, on one side of the boat previously struck. When at a distance
+of upwards of a mile they ceased rowing and, for some time, lay
+close together. The men of the injured boat were observed to be
+stopping the yawning hole in her bows, a few inches above the water
+level; the other started off, at full speed, up the coast.
+
+It was now evening, and there was scarcely a breath of wind. The
+men crowded round the lads, and thanked them warmly for having been
+the means of saving them from destruction.
+
+"I am afraid you are not out of danger, yet," Will said, as the
+captain shook him by the hand. "No doubt that boat has gone off
+with the news and, before morning, you will have half a dozen fresh
+enemies coming down, inside the reef, to attack you."
+
+"If we had but a breath of wind, we might do," the captain said.
+
+"I fear you will have none before morning; then it generally blows
+fresh, for two or three hours. I don't know how far it is to the
+village which is the headquarters of the pirates. As far as I could
+make out, from the Malays with whom we have been living, it is
+about six hours' walking; but the boats will row twice as fast as a
+man would walk through the forest. In that case you may be attacked
+at two or three o'clock in the morning, and you won't get the
+breeze till after sunrise."
+
+"Are there any other channels through the reef?" the captain asked.
+
+"I do not know," Will replied. "We have never explored it very far,
+either way; but as I should think, from the action of the Malays,
+that they did not know of this, they might not know of any other,
+did it exist."
+
+"Then," the captain said, "I will warp the brig out through the
+channel again; and anchor her, stem and stern, across it outside.
+They will find it as hard to attack us, there, as they did before.
+Then, when the breeze comes, we will slip our cable and run for it.
+She is a fast sailer; and can, I think, get away from the pirates,
+even with their sails and oars. Besides, by shifting the long gun
+and two of the others to her stern, we can give it them so hot
+that, even if they are the fastest, we may sicken them."
+
+"I do not know, sir," Will said. "They would be likely to hang
+about you, until the breeze drops; and then to attack you on all
+sides at once. If we could but keep them from coming through the
+channel, in pursuit, we should be safe."
+
+"Ah! But how on earth are we to do that?" the captain asked.
+
+William Gale was silent for a minute or two.
+
+"Have you plenty of powder on board the ship, sir?"
+
+"Plenty--we use it for barter."
+
+"It seems to me--" Will went on, "--that if, before sailing, you
+could sink a couple of barrels of powder in the channel, with a
+fuse to explode them, a few minutes after we had left; the Malays
+would be so astonished, at the explosion, that they would not
+venture to pass through."
+
+"Your idea is a capital one," the captain said, warmly; "but how
+about a fuse which would burn under water?
+
+"What do you think, Tom? Could it be managed?"
+
+"I should think so, sir," the mate answered. "Suppose we take one
+of those empty 30-gallon beer casks, and fill that up with
+powder--it will hold ten or twelve of the little barrels--and then
+we might bung it up, and make a hole in its head. Over the hole we
+might fix a wine bottle, with the bottom knocked out; and so
+fastened, with tow and oakum, that the water won't get in. Then we
+might shove down through the mouth of the bottle, and through the
+hole below it into the powder, a long strip of paper dipped in
+saltpetre, to make touch paper of it. I don't know as a regular
+fuse would do, as it might go out for want of air; but there would
+be plenty to keep touch paper alight.
+
+"We could sling three or four 18-pounder shots under the bottom of
+the cask, to make it sink upright. Just before we slip our cables,
+we might lower it down with the boats; lighting the fuse the last
+thing, and sticking in the cork. If we don't put too much
+saltpetre, it might burn for some minutes before it reached the
+powder."
+
+"It's worth trying, at any rate," the captain said; "but I fear it
+would not burn long enough. I think that, instead of a bottle, we
+might jam a piece of iron tube--six or eight feet long--into the
+head of the cask, and cut a bung to fit it. In that way we could
+get a good length of fuse."
+
+This plan was carried out. A large cask was filled with powder; and
+an iron tube, three inches in diameter and six feet long, fitted
+into it, and made water tight. A long strip of paper, after being
+dipped in water in which gunpowder had been dissolved; was then
+dried, rolled tight, and lowered down the tube, until it touched
+the powder. A bung was cut to fit the top of the tube; a piece of
+wash-leather being placed over it, to ensure its being perfectly
+water tight. The top of the fuse was then cut level with the pipe.
+Several bits of iron were lashed to the lower end of the cask, to
+make it sink upright; and the cask was steadily lowered into a boat
+lying alongside the ship, in readiness for use.
+
+The sailors entered into the preparations with the glee of
+schoolboys; but the machine was not ready until long after the ship
+had been towed out again through the channel, and moored broadside
+to it, just outside.
+
+
+
+Chapter 8: The Torpedo.
+
+
+It was about two o'clock in the morning when the watch awoke the
+crew, with the news that they could hear the distant sound of oars
+coming along the shore. All took their places, in silence. After a
+time the rowing ceased, and all was quiet again. Half an hour
+passed, and then there was a slight sound close alongside and, in
+the channel, they could dimly make out a small boat--which was
+rapidly rowed away into the darkness again, several musket shots
+being fired after it.
+
+"They have sent on ahead, to find if we were lying in the same
+berth," the captain said. "I expect they will be puzzled when they
+hear that we are outside, and that the entrance is guarded. I
+should not be surprised if they did not attack before morning. They
+had such a lesson, yesterday, that I don't think they will try to
+force the channel in our teeth again; but will play the waiting
+game, sure that they will secure us, sooner or later."
+
+So it turned out. The hours passed slowly on, but no sound was
+heard. Then, in the dim morning light, a pirate fleet of eight
+prahus was seen, lying at a distance of half a mile within the
+reef.
+
+As the day broke, the breeze sprang up, the sails were hoisted, and
+the captain prepared to slip his cables. A similar preparation
+could, through the glasses, be observed on board the Malay fleet.
+
+"That will do very well," the captain said. "Those fellows will be
+along in about eight or ten minutes after we have started; and the
+fuse, according to the experiments we made as to its rate of
+burning, will last about seven.
+
+"Now, quick, lads, into the boat.
+
+"Tom, you take charge of the sinking."
+
+In another minute the boat was rowed to the channel, and the cask
+lowered over the side. It was held there, for a minute, while the
+mate struck a light and applied it to the touch paper. Then he
+pressed the bung firmly into the top of the tube, the lashings of
+the cask were cut, and the boat rowed back to the ship. The anchors
+were already on board, and the brig was getting way on her as the
+boat rowed alongside. The men jumped on board, and the boat was
+suffered to tow behind, while all hands set the whole of the sails.
+The vessel was soon running briskly before the land breeze.
+
+The pirate fleet was instantly in motion. Every eye in the ship was
+directed towards them.
+
+"They will be there in less than ten minutes from the moment I
+lowered the cask," the mate said, looking at his watch.
+
+"Not much," the captain said, "they are rowing fast, now; but the
+trees keep off the wind, and their sails do not help them. They
+were a minute or two behind us in starting."
+
+It was just eight minutes, from the time when the cask had been
+lowered, that the first of the Malay boats rowed out through the
+channel.
+
+"I hope nothing has gone wrong," the mate growled.
+
+"I am not afraid of that; though we may be wrong, a minute or two,
+as to the length of the fuse."
+
+Another boat followed the first. The third was in mid channel when,
+suddenly, she seemed to rise bodily in the air, and then to fall
+into pieces. A mighty column of water, a hundred feet high, rose
+into the air; mingled with fragments of wood, and human bodies. A
+deep, low report was heard; and the brig shook, as if she had come
+into collision with some floating body.
+
+Although they were nearly a mile away, the yell of astonishment,
+and fright, of the Malays reached the ship. The prahus still inside
+the reef were seen to turn round, and row away along the coast at
+the top of their speed; while those which had passed the channel,
+after rowing wildly for some distance, lay on their oars--the crews
+apparently stupefied at what had taken place. The craft which had
+been injured the day before still lay seaward, on watch; but now
+turned her head, and rowed towards the shore to join her consorts.
+
+The Sea Belle left the coast. The Malays attempted no pursuit but,
+so long as they could be seen, remained inactive near the scene of
+the sudden and--to them--inexplicable catastrophe which had
+befallen their consort.
+
+Once fairly freed from all fear of pursuit, the captain invited the
+two lads into his cabin; and there heard from them an account of
+all the adventures through which they had passed. When they had
+finished, he questioned them as to their plans.
+
+Hans said that he intended to take the first ship bound for
+Holland.
+
+"And you?" he asked Will.
+
+"I have no particular plan," Will said. "I am in no hurry to return
+to England, having no relatives there. After being so long
+absent--for it is now a year since I sailed from Yarmouth--I should
+not care to return and take up my apprenticeship as a fisherman."
+
+"Will you ship regularly on board the Sea Belle?" the captain
+asked.
+
+"Thank you, sir, I think I would rather not decide upon anything
+until we get to Calcutta. I have thirty pounds in money--fifteen
+pounds of which were given me on board the Dutch ship, and the rest
+I received as wages for the voyage from England to Java. I carried
+the money in a belt round my waist, and have kept it ever since. So
+I need not be in any great hurry to settle upon what I shall do;
+but certainly, after a regular sea life, I should not like to go
+back to being a fisherman. I am now past sixteen and, in another
+three years, shall be able to earn more wages.
+
+"I should have taken you for at least two years older," the captain
+said; "you are as big and strong as many lads of eighteen."
+
+"I have done a good lot of hard work, in the last two years," Will
+said; "for on board the Dutch ship--although, of course, I was only
+rated as a boy--I used to do man's work, aloft."
+
+Other people would have been deceived, as well as the captain. Hard
+work and exposure to the air had done much to age the boy. He had
+been tall and slight for his age when he left the workhouse and,
+while he had not ceased growing in height, he had widened out
+considerably and, had he asserted himself to be eighteen years of
+age, few would have questioned the statement.
+
+The Sea Belle for some time kept south, touching at some of the
+islands where a trade was done with the Papuans; then her head was
+turned north and, after an eventful voyage, she reached Calcutta,
+where the captain had been ordered to fill up with cotton, or
+grain, for England. The captain at once landed, and proceeded to
+the office of the agent of the firm who owned the Sea Belle. He was
+shown into that gentleman's private room where, at the time, two
+gentlemen were seated, chatting. The agent was personally
+acquainted with the captain, and asked him to sit down and smoke a
+cigar.
+
+"This is Captain Mayhew, of the Sea Belle," he said to his friends.
+"He has been trading, for the last three months, down among the
+islands.
+
+"These gentlemen, Captain Mayhew, are Major Harrison and Captain
+Edwards, who have just arrived from China, with their regiment, in
+the Euphrates.
+
+"Has your voyage been a pleasant one, captain?"
+
+"Pleasant enough, sir, on the whole; but we were attacked by the
+Malay pirates, and I should certainly not be here to tell the tale,
+at present, had it not been for the quickness and shrewdness of a
+lad, who had been shipwrecked on the coast."
+
+"How is that, Mayhew? Tell us all about it."
+
+Captain Mayhew related the whole story of the fight with the
+pirates; saying that, unquestionably, had it not been for Will's
+pointing out the passage through the reef, in the first place, and
+his idea of burying a submarine mine, in the second, the Sea Belle
+would have fallen into the hands of the pirates.
+
+"But where did the boy spring from? How on earth came he to be
+there?"
+
+Captain Mayhew then related the story of William Gale's adventures,
+as he had them from his own lips.
+
+"He must be a cool and plucky young fellow, indeed," Major Harrison
+exclaimed. "I should like to see him.
+
+"What style and type is he, captain? A rough sort of chap?"
+
+"By no means," the captain answered. "He is surprisingly well
+mannered. Had I met him elsewhere, and in gentleman's clothes, I do
+not think that I should have suspected that he was not what he
+appeared. His features, too, somehow or other, strike one as being
+those of a gentleman; which is all the more singular when, as a
+fact, he told me he had been brought up in a workhouse.
+
+"In a workhouse!" Major Harrison repeated. "Then I suppose his
+parents were farm laborers."
+
+"No," the captain answered; "he was left at the door, on a stormy
+night, by a tramp who was found drowned, next morning, in a ditch
+near. He had, when found, a gold trinket of some kind round his
+neck; and he tells me that, from that and other circumstances, it
+was generally supposed by the workhouse authorities that he did not
+belong to the tramp, but that he had been stolen by her; and that
+he belonged, at least, to a respectable family."
+
+"All this is very interesting," Captain Edwards said. "I should
+like much to see the boy. Will you come and dine with us this
+evening on board the Euphrates--Mr. Reynolds, here, is coming--and
+have the boy sent on board--say, at nine o'clock--when we can have
+him in, and have a chat with him?"
+
+Captain Mayhew readily agreed. William was even then waiting
+outside for him, having landed with him; and the captain, when he
+entered the office, had told him to walk about for an hour and
+amuse himself with the sights of Calcutta, and then return and wait
+for him. He said nothing about his being close at hand, as he did
+not wish the officers to see him in the rough outfit which had been
+furnished him on board ship; intending to surprise them by his
+appearance in decent clothes. Accordingly, on leaving Mr. Reynolds'
+office he took him to one of the numerous shops, in the town, where
+clothes of any kind can be procured.
+
+"Now, Will," he said, "I want you to get a suit of shore-going
+clothes. You can get your sea outfit tomorrow, at your leisure; but
+I want you to show up well at the mess, this evening, and a suit of
+good clothes will always be useful to you."
+
+Captain Mayhew had intended to pay for the outfit, himself, but
+this Will would not hear of; and Captain Mayhew was the less
+reluctant to let the lad have his own way as he had, in the course
+of the interview with the agent, agreed that the lad's services
+deserved a handsome recognition from the firm; and that the sum of
+one hundred guineas should be given to him, at once. The agent
+felt, no doubt, that the firm would thoroughly approve of the
+payment. Twenty pounds were to be given to Hans, for his share of
+the services; but the two suggestions which had saved the Sea Belle
+had both originated with Will.
+
+By Captain Mayhew's advice, Will purchased a suit of dark-colored
+tweed, a black tie, and some white shirts and collars. At other
+shops, he bought some boots and a Panama straw hat. Having
+completed their purchases, they walked for some hours about
+Calcutta; Will being delighted with the variety of the native
+costumes, and the newness and singularity of everything which met
+his eye.
+
+On their return to the ghaut--as the landing stage is called--they
+found their various purchases already stowed in the Sea Belle's
+boat; which had, about an hour before, come to shore to fetch them
+off. At seven o'clock Captain Mayhew went off to the Euphrates,
+leaving orders that the boat was to bring Will over, at nine. At
+that hour the lad was dressed in his new clothes which,
+fortunately, fitted him well.
+
+"By jingo, Will," the first mate said, as he entered the cabin,
+"you look a tip-topper, and no mistake."
+
+The mate was right. The lad, with his sunburnt face, quiet manner,
+and easy carriage, looked thoroughly at home in his attire.
+
+"I don't know who your parents were, but I would bet a month's pay
+that the old tramp you were telling us of had nothing to do with
+it; for you look every inch a gentleman, from head to foot."
+
+Will found, on gaining the deck of the Euphrates, that orders had
+been left by the officer in command that he was to be shown into
+the saloon cabin upon his giving his name to the sergeant, who came
+up at the sentry's call. He was at once conducted below. For a
+moment he felt almost bewildered as he entered; the size of the
+cabin, the handsomeness of its fittings, the well-laid table decked
+with fragrant flowers, so far surpassed anything he had ever seen,
+or thought of.
+
+He was conducted to the head of the table, where Major Harrison,
+with Mr. Reynolds on one hand and Captain Mayhew on the other, sat
+near the colonel commanding the regiment. Captain Mayhew, who had
+already told the outline of the story, smiled quietly to himself at
+the expression of surprise which crossed the faces of the major and
+Mr. Reynolds, as well as of the other officers sitting near, at the
+appearance of the lad he introduced to them. The colonel ordered a
+chair to be placed next to himself, and told the servant to fill a
+glass of wine for Will, and entered into conversation with him.
+
+"I think, gentlemen," he said, after a minute or two, seeing that
+the lad did not touch the wine that was poured out for him, "it
+will be pleasanter on deck; for it is terribly hot here, and I see
+that most of you have finished your wine."
+
+An adjournment was at once made, to the deck. Here cigars were
+lighted and, the colonel and senior officers taking their places in
+some of the easy chairs--which were still all out--the rest
+gathered round to hear the story, which Major Harrison had promised
+them would be an interesting one.
+
+Captain Mayhew first gave his account of the fight between the Sea
+Belle and the pirates, beginning at the point when, as he was hotly
+chased and despairing of making a successful defense, the canoe
+with the two lads in it came out to him. Then Will was called upon
+to explain how he came to be there, at that moment. He told briefly
+how the fishing smack was sunk, how he had saved himself by
+clinging to the bob stay of the Dutch Indianan, and how he had
+sailed in this vessel to Java; and was on his way in her to China,
+when wrecked in the cyclone.
+
+Here his audience insisted upon his giving them full details; and
+he accordingly told them the manner in which he and a few of the
+crew had escaped; how, when they were building a boat, they had
+been attacked by Malays, and all--except another lad and himself,
+who were hiding in a tree--were massacred by the pirates; how they
+had gone inland to a village where, having aided the natives when
+attacked by a hostile tribe, they had been most kindly received;
+how they had finally obtained a canoe, and spent their time in
+fishing, in hopes of seeing a passing sail; until the Sea Belle,
+chased by the Malay pirates, had appeared off the shore.
+
+There was a genuine murmur of approval, from those thickly
+clustered round, as the lad finished his story; and the colonel
+warmly expressed his approval of his conduct, under such exciting
+circumstances.
+
+"What are you going to do, now?" he asked.
+
+"I have not made up my mind, sir," the lad said. "I expect that I
+shall ship in some vessel sailing for England, shortly."
+
+"Major Harrison," the colonel said, "will you and Captain Mayhew
+come with me to my cabin?
+
+"I should like to have a few minutes' private chat with you," he
+went on, putting his hand on Will's shoulder.
+
+A minute or two later, the three gentlemen and Will were seated in
+the private cabin.
+
+"Look here, my boy," the colonel said; "I have heard, from Major
+Harrison, what you had told Captain Mayhew concerning your birth
+and, certainly, your appearance and manner go far to sustain the
+belief that the tramp who left you was not your mother, and that
+your parents were of gentle birth. I do not say that a man's birth
+makes much difference to him; still, it does go for something and,
+in nine cases out of ten, the difference both in face and figure is
+unmistakable. Unless I am very wrong, your father was a gentleman.
+
+"However, that is not to the point: it is your quickness and
+activity, your coolness in danger, and the adventures which you
+have gone through which interest us in you. Now I think it is a
+pity that a lad, who has shown that there is so much in him, should
+remain a sailor before the mast. You have not been so long at sea
+as to become wedded to it, and to be unable to turn your hands to
+anything else.
+
+"Now, what do you say to enlisting? In the ranks are men of all
+sorts--gentlemen, honest men, and blackguards. The steady,
+respectable man is sure to rise. You can, the captain tells me,
+read and write well. There is a chance of active service, at
+present; and when there is active service, a man who distinguishes
+himself gets rapid promotion. The regiment land, tomorrow; and go
+straight through, by train, to the North. There is trouble in
+Afghanistan; and an ultimatum has just been sent, to the Ameer,
+that if he does not comply with our terms it will be war; and we
+hope to be there in time for the beginning of it. I can only say
+that, if you like to join, Major Harrison and myself will keep our
+eyes upon you and, if you deserve it, you may be sure of rapid
+promotion. You have greatly interested me in your story, and I
+should be very glad to give a helping hand to so deserving a young
+fellow.
+
+"It is not usual, certainly, for a regiment to take recruits in
+India; but I don't suppose that there can be any objection to it."
+
+"Thank you very much," Will said, when the colonel ceased. "I am
+greatly obliged to you for your kindness. I have never thought
+about the army, but I am sure that I cannot possibly do better than
+accept your kind offer.
+
+"The only thing, sir, is about my age.
+
+"Tut, tut!" the colonel interrupted, "I don't want to know anything
+about your age. When you go up for attestment, you will say that
+you are under nineteen, which will be strictly true. I will give a
+hint, and no further questions will be asked. Neither I nor anyone
+else know that you are not past eighteen and, in time of war, no
+one is particular as to the age of recruits, as long as they are
+fit to do their duty.
+
+"You must work hard, to pick up enough knowledge of drill to enable
+you to take your place in the ranks. There is neither parade work,
+nor difficult maneuvering, in the face of an enemy; and you can
+finish up, afterwards.
+
+"Are you quite agreed?"
+
+"Quite, sir," Will said, joyously, "and am, indeed, obliged to
+you."
+
+"Come on board, then, tomorrow at eight o'clock, and ask for
+Sergeant Ringwood."
+
+William Gale left the cabin with a new prospect of life before him.
+He had, of late, rather shrunk from the thought of again taking his
+place as a ship boy; and the prospect of adventures--to say nothing
+of the advancement which might befall him, through the interest
+taken in him by the colonel--was delightful to him.
+
+The last words the colonel had said when he left the cabin were:
+
+"Say nothing about the workhouse, and as little as possible of
+anything which happened before you were wrecked on the island, in
+the barrack room."
+
+When William and Captain Mayhew had left the cabin, Colonel
+Shepherd sent for Sergeant Ringwood.
+
+"Sergeant," he said, "a young fellow will come on board, tomorrow
+at eight o'clock, to join the regiment as a recruit. Take him at
+once to the surgeon, and get him passed. I know we shall be able to
+give him but little drill, before we get to the frontier; but do
+all you can for him, and I will make it up to you. He is a smart
+young fellow, and I have a good deal of interest in him.
+
+"He was on his way to China, and was wrecked among the Malays, and
+has gone through a good deal. Finding himself here with nothing to
+do, and with a prospect of active service on the frontier, he has
+decided to enlist and, as he is a gallant young fellow, I do not
+wish to balk his fancy."
+
+The sergeant saluted and took his leave, impressed with the
+idea--although the colonel had not said so--that the new recruit
+was a young gentleman, who had joined the service simply for the
+sake of taking part in the war.
+
+The next morning Will took leave of his friend Hans; who had, the
+previous day, shipped on board a Dutch ship, homeward bound; and
+who was, a few hours later, to shift his berth to her, after he had
+been on shore to fit himself out in clothes. Hans was much affected
+at saying goodbye to his companion, and the two promised to
+correspond with each other.
+
+On bidding farewell to his friend the captain of the Sea Belle, the
+latter informed Will that Mr. Reynolds had, on behalf of the owners
+of the Sea Belle, paid 100 pounds to his account into the Bank of
+Hindustan; and that this, or any portion of it, would be paid to
+his order; as the captain had furnished the agent with a slip of
+paper upon which Will had, at his request, signed his name. This
+had, with the money, been deposited at the bank; so that his
+signature might be recognized, and honored.
+
+On reaching the Euphrates, Will was at once taken charge of by
+Sergeant Ringwood; who took him before the doctor, to whom the
+colonel had already spoken. The medical examination was
+satisfactory, the doctor remarking:
+
+"You are rather slight yet, but you will fill out, in time."
+
+The age was asked, and given as under nineteen; and eighteen was
+inscribed against him, in the books. Then he was taken before the
+colonel, and attested; and was, from that moment, a member of the
+regiment. A uniform was served out to him, and the usual articles
+of kit. The sergeant saw that his belts were put on properly, and
+his knapsack packed; and half an hour afterwards he fell in, with
+his musket on his shoulder, among the troops paraded on the deck of
+the Euphrates, prior to embarkation.
+
+So quickly had it all been managed that Will could hardly believe
+that he was awake as, feeling strangely hampered by his belts and
+accouterments, he descended the accommodation ladder, and took his
+place with his new comrades on board one of the great native boats,
+and rowed to the shore. The regiment was marched direct to the
+railway station, where the heavy baggage had been sent, on the
+previous day. The men took their places in the long train which
+stood in readiness and, half an hour later, steamed north from
+Calcutta.
+
+Hitherto, none of his comrades had spoken to Will. In the bustle of
+landing, all had enough to do to look to themselves; and it was not
+until he found himself, with eight comrades and a corporal, in the
+railway carriage that he was addressed.
+
+"Well, young 'un," one said, "what's yer name, and where do you
+come from? Calcutta isn't much of a place for recruiting."
+
+"I was on my way to China," Will replied, "and got wrecked among
+the Malays; then I got picked up by a vessel, and we had some hot
+fighting. Then I was landed at Calcutta and, seeing nothing much to
+do, and hearing that there was a chance of a fight with the
+Afghans, I thought the best thing to do was to enlist.
+
+"My name is William Gale."
+
+"I wasn't quite sure that you were an Englishman. You are pretty
+nigh as dark as them copper-colored niggers here."
+
+"So would you be," Will laughed, "if you had been living, as I
+have, for ten months among savages, without even a shirt to your
+back."
+
+"Tell us all about it," the soldier said.
+
+"This is a bit of luck, mates, our having someone who can tell us a
+tale, when we have got such a long journey before us."
+
+Will made his story as full as he could, and it lasted a long time.
+When it was finished, the men expressed their opinion that he was a
+good sort and, Will having handed over to the corporal a
+sovereign--to be expended on drinks by the way, as his footing in
+the regiment--he became quite a popular character, and soon felt at
+home in his new position.
+
+
+
+Chapter 9: The Advance Into Afghanistan.
+
+
+There was but little talking in the middle of the day, in the
+train, for the heat was excessive. All the men had taken off their
+coats, and sat in their shirt sleeves. But they were, nevertheless,
+bathed in perspiration.
+
+Late at night, the train arrived at Allahabad. Here there was a
+stop, till morning. The men alighted from the train; and lay down
+on their folded blankets, with their knapsacks for pillows, on the
+platform or in the waiting rooms. A plentiful supply of water had
+been prepared for their use, at the station; and outside were
+several water carriers; and many of the men stripped off their
+shirts, and had water poured over their heads and bodies. Will Gale
+was among these and, greatly refreshed, he enjoyed some fruit and
+cakes which he purchased from native vendors; and then, lying down
+on a bench in the station, was soon asleep.
+
+Four days' traveling brought them to the end of the railway. They
+were ferried across the Attock, and then their real work began.
+Although it was now late in September, the heat was still intense.
+Tents were struck an hour before daybreak and, by eleven o'clock
+each day, the column was at its halting place. It was, however,
+hours before the tents and baggage arrived.
+
+Many of the draft cattle were very poor, forage was scarce, and the
+arrangements far from good. The consequence was that great numbers
+of the oxen broke down and died, and many of the troops were often
+obliged to sleep in the air, owing to the non-arrival of their
+tents. The defects of the transport were aggravated, as the time
+went on; and the Norfolk Rangers fared much better than some of the
+troops which followed them.
+
+The regiment was destined to operate in the Khuram valley, under
+the command of General Roberts. The advanced column of this
+division consisted of the 7th company of Bengal Sappers, the 23rd
+Bengal Pioneers; a battery of horse artillery, one of Royal
+Artillery, and two mountain batteries; a squadron of the 10th
+Hussars, and the 12th Bengal Cavalry. The first brigade of infantry
+comprised the 2nd battalion of the 8th Foot, the 29th Bengal Native
+Infantry, and the 5th Punjaub Infantry. The second brigade
+consisted of the 72nd Highlanders, the 21st Native Infantry, the
+2nd Punjaub Infantry, and the 5th Ghoorkas. The place of assembly
+was Kohat. The Norfolk Rangers were to act as a reserve.
+
+It was on the 2nd of October that the Rangers arrived at Kohat,
+heartily glad that their march across the sandy plains of the
+Punjaub was at an end. The other regiments comprising the force
+poured in rapidly and, on the 9th, the general arrived and assumed
+the command. The next day the Punjaub regiments were sent forward
+to Thull. It was not until the middle of November that the European
+regiments followed them; and the six weeks were, by the Rangers,
+for the most part employed in drill for, after their voyage and
+journey up the country, their commanding officer considered it
+necessary to work them hard, to get them to the highest state of
+discipline.
+
+William Gale was worked exceptionally hard; as he had, in that
+short time, to learn the manual and platoon exercises, and to pick
+up enough of drill to enable him to take his place in the ranks.
+Fortunately he carried himself well, and required far less drilling
+than the majority of the recruits. By the time that the regiment
+moved forward, he was able to take his place in his company; and
+had mastered all the movements which were likely to be necessary,
+in the campaign.
+
+The road between Kohat and Thull runs in a valley between
+mountains, those on the right being inhabited by the Waziries, a
+fierce and independent tribe. The regiment which had first marched
+had exercised every precaution against an attack. The convoys of
+stores and provisions sent forward had always been accompanied by
+strong escorts, and orders were issued that officers going forward
+on duty should not travel without protection. The Waziries,
+however--contrary to expectation--remained quiet; probably waiting
+to see the turn which matters took for, had we suffered a repulse,
+they would assuredly have taken part, at once, against us; and
+would have aided in massacring fugitives, and robbing baggage
+wagons.
+
+The march to Thull occupied five days, which were very pleasant
+ones to William Gale. His heavy work at drill was now over. He was
+no longer considered a recruit, but ranked as a soldier. The
+marches were not long and, for many hours in the afternoon, the
+high hills threw the valley in shade; and the soldiers, after
+pitching their tents, were able to stroll about, or to lie under
+the trees in which the valley abounded. The regiment reached Thull
+on the 18th of November and, on the morning of the 21st, the column
+advanced.
+
+The river, whose bed was 500 yards wide, was fortunately now low,
+being reduced to a stream of 40 yards wide by 3 deep. A trestle
+bridge had been thrown across it, for the use of the infantry. The
+river was distant a mile and a half from the town. No opposition
+was expected but, as a small Afghan garrison was stationed in a
+fort at Kapizang, a short distance beyond the river, an attempt was
+to be made to capture it.
+
+The 29th Punjaub Infantry first crossed the river, at the bridge.
+The 10th Hussars forded the river and extended, in skirmishing
+order, to cut off the retreat of the garrison. When they reached
+the fort, however--which was a square enclosure, with round towers
+at the corners--it was found that the garrison, who had doubtless
+received warning from spies in Thull, had abandoned the place in
+the night.
+
+The cavalry were now sent forward to reconnoiter, the infantry
+following; and the advanced force halted at Ahmed-I-shama for the
+night. Not a single habitation was passed, during the nine miles
+march. The road was generally a mere track, 6 feet wide; passing
+through tangled brakes of dwarf palms, intersected by stony
+gullies, except when it ran along the steep bank of the river.
+
+The following day the rest of the first brigade marched up to
+Ahmed-I-shama; while the advanced force, under Colonel Gordon,
+moved on to Hazir-pir. The Rangers were with the first brigade, but
+not with the advanced party. This was composed wholly of native
+troops, consisting of the Pioneer regiments and the Sappers and
+Miners. These had hard work, for the road--which was fifteen miles
+in length--was scarcely passable for wheeled carriages, and the
+guns could not be taken along until the boulders and blocks of
+stone, which strewed the way, were removed or blasted into pieces.
+
+On the 23rd the Rangers, with the Horse Artillery battery and two
+native regiments, marched towards Hazir-pir; but the difficulties
+of the road were so great that they had to camp, for the night,
+four miles short of that place. General Roberts and the
+headquarters went forward the same day.
+
+As the general passed along the road, the headmen of all the
+villages near came and paid their respects; and the villagers lined
+the roads as the troops passed, offering fowls, eggs, milk, and
+dried fruit for sale. As William Gale had brought a supply of money
+with him, he was able to indulge in all those luxuries and, indeed,
+as the men had had few opportunities of spending money at Thull,
+all were well supplied with cash.
+
+The halt at Hazir-pir was, then, a very pleasant one. Supplies of
+grass, fuel, and provisions were brought in, in considerable
+quantities, there; but much difficulty arose in settling the terms
+of purchase, as coin was almost unknown in the valley and,
+therefore, there was no established price--one native being ready
+to sell, for a few coppers, articles for which another demanded as
+many pieces of silver. On the hills around a considerable number of
+sheep were seen grazing; but the natives did not care about selling
+these which, indeed, belonged for the most part, not to the
+Turis--the tribe which inhabit the valley--but to nomad Ghilzais
+who, like the Swiss shepherds, move about with their charges among
+the mountains, wherever fodder is to be obtained.
+
+Khuram valley, itself, is bare and monotonous. With the exception
+of fruit trees planted round the villages, scarce a tree is to be
+found; but each village is marked by a huge chunar--or oriental
+plane--beneath which the villagers rest during the noonday heat.
+
+But if the valley itself was bare and desolate, the scenery around
+was lovely. The great range of mountains known as the Safaid-Koh
+bound the valley on the east and north. This range averages 14,000
+feet high, from which spurs run out at right angles, enclosing
+narrower valleys, with broiling torrents rushing through boulders.
+The slopes of these valleys are covered with luxuriant vegetation,
+till the limit of trees is reached at a height of about 11,000
+feet; above which, in winter, the snow lies thick while, in summer,
+it furnishes the finest pasture to the Ghilzai flocks and herds.
+The valley lands and the lower slopes of the hills are laid out in
+terraces, and irrigated rice fields extend near the rivers. Valley
+and hill are alike covered with stones and boulders, Afghanistan
+being probably the most stony country in the world.
+
+On the 24th the headquarters, with the cavalry and two regiments,
+moved forward ten miles and encamped at the south end of the
+Darwazi Pass--the road leading to open, broad valleys, covered with
+dwarf palms, and wholly uncultivated. On the 25th the advanced
+force crossed the pass, which was a gentle slope and offered no
+great difficulty and, at night, encamped at the Khuram fort, which
+had been evacuated by the enemy. The buildings--which would have
+been useful for the troops--had, however, been wrecked by the
+Turis; who have a deadly hate for the Afghans--their masters--and
+who were also animated in their work of destruction by a desire to
+obtain wood, which is exceedingly scarce there.
+
+At Khuram there are two forts, the one 120 yards and the other 100
+yards square. Inside these were quarters for the governor, and huts
+for the garrison and officers; and in the smaller forts were
+stables for the cavalry forces. This place was made the
+headquarters of the forces in the Khuram valley.
+
+The general now rode on, with two squadrons of the 12th Bengal
+Cavalry, to reconnoiter in the direction of the Peiwar-Khotal;
+towards which the enemy were supposed to be retreating, and where
+they were expected to make a stand. As they approached the village
+of Peiwar, two villages were seen in flames; and news was brought
+in that three Afghan regiments, with twelve guns, had lately passed
+through. The natives reported that they were encumbered by their
+guns, and that forced labor was procured for the purpose of
+removing them. Later on, a rumor came that the twelve guns were
+stuck in the ravine at the foot of the Khotal, or pass.
+
+With but a small force of cavalry at his command, the general could
+do nothing; and so returned to Khuram, and determined to hurry up
+the troops faster than he had intended, so as to capture the guns
+reported--as was afterwards proved, falsely--to have been left
+behind by the Afghans. The sick and all superfluous baggage were
+left behind at Khuram and, on the 28th, the troops moved at
+daybreak; the two brigades marching in parallel columns.
+
+The cold was now severe at night, although it was hot in the
+daytime. It had been intended to halt at Halid-Kitta, four miles
+from the Khotal; but the intelligence arriving--that the Ameer's
+troops had abandoned their guns, and were in disorderly
+retreat--decided the general to push forward at once to the
+Peiwar-Khotal--seven miles further--instead of waiting, and giving
+the enemy time to strengthen their position. A mile from the foot
+of the actual ascent of the Khotal lies the village of Turrai, two
+miles and a half beyond Peiwar. Turrai is situated in a valley, the
+ground at whose entrance is very much broken up by the shoulders
+and spurs of the hill.
+
+The left column--the 5th and 29th Punjaub in advance, with the 2nd
+battalion of the 8th and the 23rd Pioneers, the Rangers, and two
+guns of the Number 1 mountain battery in support--were sent to the
+left, with instructions to turn a ridge forming the south boundary
+of the valley, and to seize the village of Turrai. They were also
+to follow up, closely, any body of retreating Afghan troops that
+they might come across. The light brigade were to march up the
+regular road to the Peiwar, thus supporting the attack of the left
+brigade.
+
+The left brigade followed out its orders, except that the regiment
+in support did not go round the southern side of the spur, but kept
+to the north. No enemy was seen on the south side of the spur so,
+when a track leading across to Turrai was reached, the troops moved
+down towards the village; the regiments in support advancing at the
+foot of the open, on the north side. The mountain path that the
+advanced troops were now filing down did not lead directly to the
+village, but fell into the valley ahead of it, at a point where it
+widens out into what was known as the "punch bowl valley," at the
+foot of the Peiwar-Khotal.
+
+As soon as the head of the column reached this spot, they came in
+sight of the Afghans; who showed themselves in great numbers on the
+crest of the mountain, far above their heads. As the troops had no
+orders to attack so formidable a position, they fell back towards
+Turrai, which was about a quarter of a mile to the rear. At the
+sight of this movement, the Afghans swarmed down a spur of the
+hill, and commenced an attack on the regiments that were moving
+towards the village. The 29th Punjaubees climbed the hill and a
+sharp skirmish ensued, the two mounted guns coming into action.
+
+While this was going on, the main body of the troops arrived at
+Turrai. The advanced troops were recalled, and the 5th Ghoorkas
+were advanced to cover the movement. As it was now seen that the
+story of the abandonment of the guns was false, orders were given
+to pile arms in the village, and to encamp there.
+
+This step was an imprudent one, as the Afghans speedily showed.
+While our men were sitting or lying upon the ground, waiting for
+the baggage to arrive, the Afghans brought up a mountain gun from
+the main ridge--about three-quarters of a mile distant--to the
+point of the spur overlooking the village of Turrai, and opened
+fire at 1700 yards range.
+
+The astonishment of the troops, when the first shell fell among
+them, was great. Every one jumped to his feet, and seized his
+rifle; and the guns of the Royal Horse Artillery were brought at
+once into action. It was four o'clock in the afternoon when the
+Afghans opened fire. Had they waited for a few hours, brought up
+another gun or two, and made a night attack immediately after
+opening fire, it is morally certain that the imprudence of camping
+in such a position would have been punished by a disaster, which
+might have vied with that of Isandula. Huddled together in a small
+village surrounded by scrub; and impeded, as the troops would have
+been, by the baggage animals and native followers, rushing in
+terror in all directions, our men would have been taken at an
+immense disadvantage.
+
+Fortunate was it that the enemy opened fire before the darkness set
+in. The troops were at once ordered to fall back a mile and a half,
+and to pitch on fresh ground. There was much confusion in the
+retreat, as the road in the rear was crowded with the baggage
+animals. The spot chosen for the camp was a rough one; for the
+ground was covered with scrub, and a scattered growth of hill oak
+and thorny bushes, and was broken by the remains of some ancient
+terraces but, as the jungle and broken ground extended for three
+and a half miles, there was nothing for it but to take up the best
+position possible, under the circumstances. The troops bivouacked
+on the ridge of a ravine, with steep banks; which formed a line of
+defense in front of the camp, while the view in every other
+direction was obscured by trees.
+
+The regiments passed a wretched night on the rough ground. Most of
+them were unable to find their baggage, which was wandering in the
+scrub in the dark; and the greater part of the troops lay down on
+the bare ground, and went supperless to sleep, after their
+fatiguing march of twenty-one miles.
+
+In the morning, both men and cattle were greatly exhausted by their
+long marches and almost sleepless nights; and General Roberts
+determined to wait, for a day or two, to reconnoiter the formidable
+position of the enemy before undertaking its attack. The camp was
+shifted to a more secure site, the brushwood and trees were cleared
+away, the tents pitched, and the troops were again comfortable.
+
+A reconnaissance was made by Colonel Perkins--commanding the Royal
+Engineers--with two companies of the Pioneers. He ascertained that
+a deep ravine lay between the ridge on which they were encamped and
+the Khotal itself, and that it was impossible to direct an attack
+on that side.
+
+Major Collett also, with two companies of the 23rd, proceeded to
+reconnoiter the route known as the Spingawi--or Cow--Pass. This,
+instead of going straight up the hill in front, wound round its
+foot to the right of the valley. Ascending the mountain at a point
+some three or four miles to the east of the Peiwar-Khotal, the
+reconnaissance reached the summit of a ridge about five miles
+distant from the camp, and overlooking the Spingawi-Khotal. It was
+ascertained that the road up the pass seemed easy and practicable,
+for all arms; that the top of the pass appeared to be on the same
+ridge as the Peiwar-Khotal; and that a force, working from it
+towards the Peiwar, would pass over a series of dominating
+positions. It did not appear to Major Collett that the enemy held
+the Peiwar-Khotal in force; although there was a gun on a
+commanding knoll on the south, and there seemed to be one at the
+top of the pass. The road from the village of Peiwar to the top of
+the Spingawi Pass seemed perfectly easy, for troops of all arms.
+
+The next two days were spent in clearing the camp and, so far as
+possible, improving its military position; but it was still
+surrounded by thick oak jungle, which would have afforded cover for
+an enemy making a sudden attack.
+
+A further reconnaissance was made of the Spingawi Pass and, as the
+examination confirmed Major Collett's report, it was determined to
+attack by it. Orders were issued, on the 1st of December, for a
+march that night. The regiments which were to form the main attack,
+by the Spingawi plateau route, were the 29th Punjaub Infantry and
+the 5th Ghoorkas--commanded by Colonel Gordon--in advance; these
+were to be followed by the mountain battery, a wing of the 72nd
+Highlanders, a company of the Rangers, the 2nd Punjaubees, and the
+23rd Pioneers, under Brigadier General Thelwall. Four guns, on
+elephants, were to proceed with the column. The 5th Punjaub
+Infantry, the 8th Regiment, two guns Royal Horse Artillery, three
+guns Royal Artillery, and the 5th Bengal Cavalry--the whole under
+the command of Brigadier General Cobbe--were to make an attack on
+the Peiwar-Khotal direct.
+
+The rest of the force was to remain to guard the camp and--in order
+to convince the enemy that a front attack upon the Peiwar-Khotal
+was intended--a party of pioneers, with an engineer officer and a
+covering party of the 8th Regiment, were to construct a battery
+near the village of Turrai. Frequent reconnoitering parties had
+also been sent out in this direction and, so well was the secret of
+the general's intention to attack by the Spingawi Khotal kept, that
+everyone in camp who had not been let into the secret was confident
+that the Peiwar-Khotal would be stormed, on the morrow.
+
+The enemy--although those in camp were ignorant of the fact--were
+reinforced, on the 1st, by four regiments of infantry, with a
+mountain battery and, on their side, were meditating an attack upon
+the British camp. The regiments which had freshly arrived were,
+however, fatigued by their long march; and the assault on our camp
+was postponed until the next day, and the chance of its coming off
+was, therefore, lost for ever.
+
+To William Gale's great satisfaction, a company of the
+Rangers--that to which he had been posted--was the one selected by
+the colonel to accompany the column marching up the pass. He did
+not, indeed, know that this was the route by which they were to
+advance; but he was pleased at not being left behind, with the
+regiment, in charge of the camp.
+
+"Well, young 'un," a corporal said to him, that evening, "we are
+going to be under fire, at last; and a nice climb we shall have of
+it. It puts one out of breath, to look at that steep road running
+up the hill and, when it comes to fighting one's way up it, with
+cannon and Afghans on the top, we shall find it hard work."
+
+"I expect," William answered, "that we sha'n't go up it at any
+extraordinary pace. If we skirmish up--as I expect we shall--from
+rock to rock, we shall have plenty of time to get our wind, at each
+halt. We are not to take our knapsacks; so we shall fight light,
+and we have not much extra weight to carry. What with the heat, and
+what with the long marches, I should think I must have lost a stone
+in weight, since we landed in Calcutta."
+
+"I don't think you have lost weight at all," the corporal said; "it
+seems to me that you have grown and widened out, in the two months
+and, only yesterday, when I was sizing the company, I had to move
+you two men higher; for a young 'un, you stand the fatigues well."
+
+"I am all right," Will said, "except that I have got some frightful
+blisters on my feet. I was not going to say anything about it,
+because I should have been kept in hospital, and left behind at
+Khuram; but I have hardly known how to march, the last few days. I
+don't think I could possibly have managed it, if I had not adopted
+the native dodge of wearing putties--which I have greased well on
+the inside, and wear instead of stockings."
+
+Putties, it may be said, are slips of woolen cloth, about two and a
+half yards long and three inches wide, with a tape sewn into one
+end. They are wound round and round the leg, from the ankle to
+below the knee, and secured by the end being tied with the tape.
+Nearly every one, officers and men, wore them through the campaign.
+For a long march there could be no doubt that these bandages--wound
+round the foot instead of stockings--are very preferable, as they
+obviate the liability to foot sores. Even with well-made boots all
+pedestrians may, at times, suffer from sore feet; but the liability
+is immensely increased when--as in the case of the British
+soldier--the boots are coarse, roughly sewn, and frequently ill
+fitted.
+
+
+
+Chapter 10: The Peiwar-Khotal.
+
+
+At ten o'clock at night, on the 1st of December, the troops
+detailed for the attack mustered in the camp. The assembly took
+place without sound of bugle, and even the necessary words of
+command were given in a low tone. Through the still night air the
+Afghans on the hills, little more than two miles away, would have
+heard the stir. It was a very dark night, although the stars shone
+clear.
+
+"Where can we be going?" William Gale asked the soldier next to
+him. "We are going right away from the pass, instead of towards
+it."
+
+"So we are!" the soldier replied. "I am blest if I know what we are
+up to, and it's so precious dark that I can scarcely see the file
+before me. I hope we ain't going to fight in the dark, anyhow. What
+would be the good of being a marksman, when you cannot see the end
+of your own rifle, let alone the man you are firing at?"
+
+"Oh! We can't be going to attack in the dark," Will said. "I expect
+we have got a long march before us; and are going to work round,
+somehow, and take them in rear."
+
+"Well, I hope whoever is acting as guide can see better in the
+darkness than I can; else we are safe to lose our way, and may find
+ourselves anywhere, in the morning.
+
+"Confound it!" The exclamation was elicited by the speaker
+stumbling over a boulder, and nearly going on to his head.
+
+"Silence in the ranks, there!" an officer said, close by.
+
+Each regiment was followed by its ammunition mules, and hospital
+doolies--the latter being covered stretchers, or palkies, carried
+by natives. Besides these were dandies--or chairs--slung upon
+mules. This greatly added to the difficulty of a night march for,
+even in the daytime, the presence of baggage animals in a column,
+upon a narrow road, greatly hinders the troops and, at night, the
+delays occasioned by them are naturally very much greater.
+
+For the first three and a half miles the column marched away from
+the enemy upon the Khotal, and the surprise of the soldiers
+increased at every step they took. At the end of that time they
+arrived at the village of Peiwar. Here they turned to the left and,
+after crossing several ravines, and stony water courses, arrived on
+a cultivated terrace; and kept along this till they reached a very
+stiff nullah, twenty feet deep.
+
+The night was bitterly cold, the bank of the nullah was extremely
+slippery, and the boulders in the water course below coated with
+ice. The difficulty of getting the loaded animals across, in the
+darkness, was therefore very great. The passage of the various
+water courses caused great delays; and it was difficult to keep the
+column together, in the dark. At each passage, the rear was
+immensely delayed while the leading troops were passing; and these
+again had to be halted, while those behind them struggled over the
+difficulties. The men suffered much from cold, as the pace was so
+slow that they could not warm themselves; and the mounted officers
+specially suffered, in their hands and feet.
+
+At midnight the ravine leading up to the Spingawi Pass was reached;
+but so dark was it that the 2nd Punjaubees, separated by a few
+yards from the regiment in front of them, marched straight on
+instead of turning up it; and the 22nd Pioneers, and the four
+artillery guns carried on elephants--being behind them--naturally
+went astray, also. Brigadier General Thelwall, who commanded the
+column, was at the head of his brigade; and was, for some time,
+unaware of the absence of two of his regiments but, after halting
+and finding that they did not come up, sent back a mounted officer
+who, after a two-mile ride, came up with the missing troops, and
+guided them back to the point where they had left the route.
+
+From the foot of the ravine to the top of the pass is six miles in
+distance and, dark as it was in the open, it was still more so in
+the ravine, shadowed by the steep hills on either side. As the
+ascent continued the road became worse; the boulders being larger,
+and the holes and dried-up pools deeper. The darkness, and the
+prevailing white color of the stones, prevented the difference of
+level being observed; and many of the men had heavy falls, as the
+steep sides of these pools were often from two to four feet deep.
+
+After marching for a mile and a half up the ravine, the report of a
+rifle was heard in the ranks of the 29th Punjaubees--who were
+leading the column--followed instantly by another discharge.
+Colonel Gordon--commanding the regiment--halted; and he and the
+general tried, in vain, to discover who had fired. No one could, or
+would, identify them; and this seemed clearly to prove that the
+rifles had been fired as a signal to the enemy, for they had not
+been loaded before the column started. The Punjaubee regiments
+contained many hill tribesmen--men closely connected, by ties of
+blood and religion, with the enemy whom they were marching to
+attack.
+
+A non-commissioned officer and several of the men, who were just
+about the spot where the guns had been fired, were placed under
+arrest and sent back. It was afterwards found that two of their
+rifles had been discharged; and the men who fired, and their
+non-commissioned officer were tried by court martial for treachery,
+and were hung. After these men had been sent back, the 5th
+Ghoorkas, the company of Rangers, and two companies of the 72nd
+passed the 23rd Punjaubees, and took their places at the head of
+the column. In the course of the march a good many other men of the
+23rd left the column, in the dark, and made their way back to camp.
+
+It turned out, afterwards, that the Afghan sentries at the top of
+the pass heard the reports, and woke up the commander of the post;
+who, hearing no further cause of alarm, took no action in the
+matter. Had the traitors waited until the column was within a mile
+of the top of the pass, the Afghans would assuredly have taken the
+alarm but, firing at a distance of four and a half miles, they
+failed in the desired effect.
+
+The advance was resumed, up the bed of the stream, for another mile
+and a half. About three in the morning the main water course was
+quitted, the road now entering a ravine to the left; up which,
+three miles further on, was the summit of the pass. The column
+continued its weary way up the ravine, slowly stumbling along in
+the dark.
+
+One incident occurred, in this part of the road, showing the
+necessity, in night marching, for the regiments to keep close to
+each other. In one place a fir-covered island lay in the middle of
+the ravine, the torrent's bed lying on either side of it. When the
+two companies of the 72nd Highlanders--who had been following close
+to that of the Rangers--came to the spot, they were surprised to
+find that the troops in front had suddenly vanished. No explanation
+could be given as to the cause of this disappearance, so the
+company were halted until the mystery was solved.
+
+The leading regiment had taken the passage to the right of the
+island, while the 72nd had gone to the left; the separation of the
+roads being unnoticed, in the dark. Had the roads diverged, instead
+of reuniting, much inconvenience might have been caused by the
+delay in collecting the separated portions of the force.
+
+At last the foot of the Khotal was reached, where the track left
+the ravine and turned up the spur. The two guides--natives of the
+country, who had led the head of the column to this point--refused
+to go any further and, as the column was now at the point where the
+fighting might begin, they were allowed to depart.
+
+It was about six o'clock when the Ghoorkas began to climb the spur.
+The morning had broken; but it was still dark, and the path was
+almost invisible in the shadow of the trees. The Ghoorkas--their
+rifles loaded now--made their way quietly up the hill. Presently
+the challenge of the sentry was heard, followed by two shots.
+
+It was a relief to the men, after ten hours of weary stumbling
+along in the cold and darkness, to know that they were, at length,
+face to face with their foe. Cold and fatigue were at once
+forgotten and, with eyes strained through the darkness, and rifles
+ready for use, every man pressed forward. Fifty yards up the hill,
+behind the sentry who had fired, was the first stockade of the
+enemy; formed by several large trees, which had been felled so as
+to completely block up the road, presenting an obstacle of about
+eight feet high to the attacking force.
+
+The Afghan pickets lining the stockade poured a volley into the
+Ghoorkas who, led by Major Fitzhugh and Captain Cook, made a rush
+at the place. For a few minutes there was a fierce fight at the
+trees but, as fresh assailants momentarily poured up, the
+obstruction was scaled; and the Afghans retired on a second
+stockade, eighty yards back. Here another stand was made but, the
+spur being a little wider, the Ghoorkas were able to work round
+and, taking the defense in flank, soon drove the Afghans back.
+Beyond this point the ground was clear of trees; and the road ran,
+in short zigzags, up the steep hill to the breastwork which lined
+the edge of the top zigzag. A mountain gun, at this point, swept
+the approach to the position; while the hill at its back was now
+covered with Afghans, who opened a heavy fire upon the troops as,
+in the dim morning light, they issued from the trees.
+
+By the time that the Ghoorkas and the Rangers had cleared the
+second stockade, the wing of the 72nd Highlanders--ascending by the
+right flank--had made their way up to the front; and the whole now
+advanced together. As quickly as possible they pushed up the hill,
+under the heavy fire of the enemy. The latter fought well, and a
+number of them were killed before retiring. At the defense erected
+at the top of the zigzag, so obstinately did the Afghans in front
+hold their ground that their comrades, behind, were enabled to
+remove their mountain gun.
+
+To the right of the enemy's position was a knoll, and the 72nd at
+once took possession of this; and two mountain guns were brought up
+to their assistance. The Afghans were seen, in great numbers, in
+the broken ground ahead. The Ghoorkas and the little body of
+Rangers pushed on against them. Presently the enemy gathered, and
+made a rush down upon them; and a desperate hand-to-hand fight took
+place, for a few minutes. The men were scattered among the trees,
+and each fought for himself.
+
+William Gale had just reloaded his rifle when he saw Captain
+Herbert--who commanded his company--fall to the ground, and three
+Afghans spring forward to finish him. With a bound, Will reached
+the side of the officer. Two of the Afghans had already discharged
+their pieces. The third leveled and fired. So close was he that the
+flash almost burnt the soldier's face, and he felt a sharp pain, as
+if a hot iron had passed across his cheek. In an instant, he shot
+his assailant dead; and then, with bayonet, stood at bay as the
+other two Afghans rushed upon him.
+
+Illustration: Captain Herbert saved.
+
+They had drawn their tulwars, and slashed fiercely at him; but he
+kept them off with his bayonet until a Ghoorka, running up, cut
+down one of them with his kookerie--a heavy, sword-like knife which
+the Ghoorkas carry, and which they always employ in preference to
+the bayonet, in fighting at close quarters. The remaining Afghan at
+once took to flight. The 29th Punjaubees had now come into action;
+and the Afghans, disheartened at the loss of their position, fell
+back and withdrew into the woods which cover the plateau.
+
+At half-past seven o'clock the whole force--except the elephant
+guns--had reached the plateau; and General Roberts was able to
+flash the news, of the successful capture of the enemy's first
+position, to Brigadier General Cobbe, who was in command of the
+force which was to operate direct against the Peiwar-Khotal. A rest
+was given the troops after their long march and, at half-past nine,
+they again fell in for the attack upon the pine-covered slopes in
+the direction of the Peiwar-Khotal. How strong were the enemy who
+might be lurking there, they knew not. But it was certain that he
+would fight obstinately and, in so dense a forest, much of the
+advantage gained by drill and discipline is lost.
+
+A change was made in the order of the advance. The troops who had
+before led the advance, and had done the fighting, were now placed
+in the rear; and the 23rd Pioneers led the way, followed by the 2nd
+and 29th Punjaubees. The column crossed the plateau without
+opposition, and began the ascent towards the enemy's position in
+the woods. Considerable caution was needed, as no one had any
+knowledge of the country, and all were ignorant of the position and
+numbers of the enemy; who might, for aught they knew, be massing in
+great numbers for an attack upon the front, or one of the flanks.
+
+The line of skirmishers entered the pine wood near the rocky
+hillside, and a rolling fire of musketry soon told that they were
+engaged, from end to end of the line. It was slow work; for fallen
+trees, rocks, and bushes everywhere hampered the advance. Still the
+skirmishing line--reinforced from behind--pushed forward steadily
+and, presently, cleared the Afghans off the hillside.
+
+When the troops reached the top, they found a valley in front of
+them and, from the woods on the opposite side, so heavy a musketry
+fire was kept up that it was evident the Afghans intended to make a
+desperate stand here. The valley--or rather ravine--was a narrow
+one: fifty yards wide, at its foot; and scarce three times as much,
+from brow to brow. The enemy--hidden among the trees--could not be
+made out, except by their continual fire. They did not content
+themselves, however, with the mere defense of their side of the
+hill but, from time to time, large numbers charged down, and tried
+to force their way up that held by the British. Each time, however,
+when they attempted this, the Punjaubees drove them back with
+slaughter.
+
+It was clear that the Afghans were in great numbers, for their line
+extended for a mile and a half along the hillside. Major Anderson
+of the 23rd Pioneers, after repulsing one of these attacks, led
+four companies to the assault of the Afghan position, and drove the
+enemy back for some little distance; but Major Anderson fell, and
+the party retired. Colonel Curry--who commanded the regiment--again
+led the men forward and, for a time, a hand-to-hand fight took
+place. For two hours the rifle contest continued, without
+cessation. The storm of bullets was tremendous, but no very great
+execution was done, on either side, both parties lying behind the
+shelter of trees.
+
+So far, no advantage had been gained by the British; and General
+Roberts felt that, with the force under his command, it would be
+rash to attempt to carry so strong a position, held by a greatly
+superior force.
+
+In the meantime, the attack upon the Peiwar-Khotal from the valley
+had commenced. Before daylight Brigadier General Cobbe, with the
+5th Punjaub Infantry and the 8th Regiment, left camp; his object
+being to cooperate with the flank attack. The 8th Regiment moved
+directly towards the pass, while the 5th Punjaubees climbed one of
+the principal spurs between the Peiwar and Spingawi Khotals.
+
+The ascent was extremely difficult, and it took the troops six
+hours to reach the summit. During the last portion of the ascent,
+they came under the fire of the enemy. When near the summit, Major
+Macqueen of the 5th Punjaubees saw, through an opening in the pine
+wood, the Afghan camp, with their baggage animals; which were
+placed, for shelter, in the glade behind the Peiwar-Khotal. Two
+mountain guns were at once brought up, and a fire opened upon the
+Afghan camp. In a few minutes the tents caught fire, the animals
+stampeded in all directions; and the enemy in front, seized with a
+panic, began rapidly to retreat.
+
+The Afghan troops facing General Roberts' column, when they found
+their comrades on their right retreating, began to draw off, and
+the fire sensibly diminished. The movement was accelerated by the
+four elephant guns--which had, at length, come up--opening fire
+into the pine-wood forest. As the fire slackened, a reconnaissance
+of the hill was made by General Roberts and his staff; but the
+result showed that the mountain was so covered with pines, and
+brushwood, that it formed an almost impenetrable barrier to the
+advance of troops--for the growth was so thick that it was
+impossible to say in which direction any movement should be made.
+The experience gained, in the last six hours of hard fighting, had
+shown how difficult it was to keep command over troops scattered
+along a front of half a mile long, in the forest, where nothing
+could be seen beyond a radius of a few yards.
+
+The general, therefore, determined to desist from the attempt to
+force his way direct to the top of the Peiwar-Khotal; and to march
+to his left and so, by menacing the Afghan line of retreat, to
+hasten the movement towards the rear which had evidently begun. The
+men were, therefore, brought back to the plateau to the east of the
+ravine. Here they were halted for a time, and the contents of their
+haversacks furnished them with a meal.
+
+At two o'clock they again drew up on the Spingawi plateau. The 2nd
+Punjaub Infantry being left on the hill, to oppose the Afghans,
+should they again advance in that direction; the rest of the column
+entered the defile leading into the Hurriab valley, far in the rear
+of the Peiwar-Khotal. As soon as the enemy--who were still opposing
+the 2nd Punjaub Infantry--saw the head of the column enter the
+defile, they were seized with a panic lest their retreat should be
+cut off; and began to retreat with the greatest haste, as they had
+to make their way across two mountain ridges, before they could
+pass the spot towards which our troops were moving. The advance of
+the column, however, was necessarily slow; as the woods and side
+valleys had to be carefully examined, lest a flank attack should be
+made upon them.
+
+In two hours the head of the column emerged from the forest on to
+the open slopes above the highest cultivated point in the Hurriab
+valley. It was now four o'clock. The short December day was drawing
+to a close. No enemy were in sight, for their line of retreat was
+hidden in the bed of the stream, a couple of miles further on; and
+no one knew where they were to be found. The troops were much
+exhausted with the want of rest, and with their heavy work--for
+they had now been marching, and fighting, for eighteen hours--and
+they were glad to receive the order to bivouac; although they had
+no tents, or food, and the cold--as might be expected on a winter
+day, at an elevation of over 9000 feet above the sea--began to be
+very severe.
+
+A number of the nearest trees were felled by the pioneers, and huge
+fires were soon alight. There was still some uneasiness, as no one
+knew where the force under General Cobbe was, or whether the attack
+on the Peiwar-Khotal had been successful or not.
+
+While the 5th Punjaub Infantry had been mounting the spur, halfway
+between the Peiwar and the Spingawi Khotal, the 8th Regiment had
+moved directly upon the pass. The Afghans, who had expected an
+attack, had remained under arms until three in the morning when,
+hearing no sounds in our camp, they had been dismissed to rest.
+
+Three guns of the Royal Artillery, and two of the Royal Horse
+Artillery took up their post 800 yards in front of our camp; where
+their fire, at the crest of the pass, would assist the advance of
+the 8th. These, after two hours' march, found themselves at seven
+in the morning on the last spur, which is separated from the
+Peiwar-Khotal by a deep ravine. When it became daylight, a few
+minutes later, the enemy caught sight of our artillery in the
+valley, and at once opened fire. Although they had six field pieces
+at the top of the hill, only three had been placed in position to
+command the valley and the ascent; and the mountain battery, which
+had arrived the afternoon before, was not brought to the front.
+
+The three field pieces, and the mountain gun on the spur kept up a
+continuous fire on our battery, of five guns. These were, however,
+almost beyond their range, and but little damage was done. On our
+side, the fire was chiefly directed against the mountain gun, at
+the end of the spur; and at any bodies of men who showed
+themselves. The artillery duel went on for four hours and, in the
+meantime, the infantry were engaged sharply with the Afghans. These
+had taken up their position in the woods, on the other side of the
+ravine; and kept up a continuous fire upon the 8th. The distance,
+however, was too great for much execution on either side,
+especially as both parties were sheltered in the woods.
+
+About ten o'clock the Afghans were seen gathering in strength, as
+if to come down across the road leading up to the Khotal, to attack
+the 8th in the rear. A squadron of the 18th Bengal Cavalry charged
+up the valley, and the enemy retired up the hill again and, seeing
+that they could not cross the road, without the chance of being cut
+up by the cavalry, they did not try to repeat the experiment.
+
+At eleven o'clock Brigadier General Cobbe was wounded in the leg,
+and Colonel Barry-Drew succeeded him in the command; receiving the
+orders which had been given to General Cobbe--that the Khotal was
+not to be attacked, till there was some evidence that the flank
+attack had shaken the enemy's defense, in front.
+
+At twelve o'clock the guns, with the 2nd Punjaub Infantry, alarmed
+the Afghans by their fire upon the camp and, although the Afghan
+guns in front kept up their fire, the musketry fire decreased
+considerably. Seeing this, Colonel Drew ordered the artillery to be
+brought up nearer. When--after advancing 300 yards--they came to a
+ravine crossing the road, the Afghans--who had come down the hill
+to meet them--opened a heavy fire and, the road being narrow, only
+the leading gun could come into action. However, the two companies
+of the 8th--which were acting as an escort to the guns--advanced in
+skirmishing order, and drove the Afghans up the hill.
+
+The panic among the Afghans on the plateau having now spread to the
+troops at the Khotal, their fire entirely ceased; and the 8th
+Regiment descended the defile, and began to climb the path to the
+Khotal. Not a hostile shot was fired and, at half-past two, they
+reached the enemy's camp, which they found deserted.
+
+
+
+Chapter 11: A Prisoner.
+
+
+The panic which had seized the Afghans, when they found their
+retreat menaced, had been thorough and complete and, when the 8th
+Regiment entered the camp, they found that the tents were standing.
+Food had been left, ready cooked, and every possession had been
+abandoned. In the artillery camp, the gunners had left their
+silver-mounted brass helmets and caps, as well as their guns and
+carriages. A body of friendly Turis had accompanied the column,
+making a demonstration on its flank; and these, arriving upon the
+spot, plundered the Afghan camp of everything of the smallest
+value.
+
+No one knew what had become of the main body, under General
+Roberts. The Bengal Cavalry scouted for some distance in advance,
+but found no signs of the enemy. Strong pickets were set, in case
+the Afghans should rally and return. The tents were brought up from
+the camp below, fires were lit, and the 8th encamped for the night.
+
+In the morning, communication was established between the two camps
+and, it having been ascertained that the enemy had fled, in the
+greatest disorder, towards the Shatur-Gardan Pass leading down to
+Cabul, there was no prospect of further fighting. The Afghans had
+abandoned all their guns, and even thrown away a great quantity of
+muskets, in their rapid retreats. Great stores of flour and other
+provisions were discovered, in the various villages, and were
+divided among the troops.
+
+The winter was now setting in, and the Shatur-Gardan Pass might,
+any moment, be closed by deep snow. There was, therefore, no
+prospect of a renewal of hostilities before the spring.
+Preparations were made for putting a regiment on the top of the
+Khotal. The rest of the force were to winter at Khuram. General
+Roberts, with an escort of cavalry, rode to the Shatur-Gardan Pass,
+and assured himself that the whole of the Afghan army had fled
+beyond this point.
+
+The troops were, for some time, kept hard at work lowering the
+captured guns and ammunition down to the valley. A portion of the
+troops advanced as far as Ali-Kheyl, the principal town of the
+plateau. The Jajis--the inhabitants of the country--had hitherto
+been extremely hostile but, cowed by the defeat of the Afghans,
+they submitted without resistance.
+
+On the 12th, all the preparations for the return were complete. It
+was known that there was another pass from Ali-Kheyl into the
+Khuram valley, by the south. This had never been explored by any
+European; but General Roberts determined to return by it, with a
+portion of his force, as the pass might be found valuable in future
+operations. The force detailed for the march through the Sappir
+defile was composed of the 8th Ghoorkas, a wing of the 72nd
+Highlanders, a company of the Norfolk Rangers, the 23rd Punjaub
+Pioneers, and a mountain battery.
+
+The country through which the march was to be made was inhabited by
+the Mongals, a turbulent robber tribe. The column marched at nine
+in the morning and, after their down march, arrived at the village
+of Sappir at midday. The road lay down the Hurriab river, till the
+Khuram river was reached; and then along the right bank, passing
+through the village of Kermana; after which it turned up a narrow
+road, for two miles, till an open plateau was reached, at the
+farther end of which stood the village of Sappir. It was reported,
+here, that the Mongals intended to defend a defile and hill pass,
+two miles farther on. The 23rd Pioneers were therefore pushed on,
+to occupy the pass and bivouac there. The remainder of the troops
+camped in the village.
+
+No signs of the enemy were seen, either by the 23rd Pioneers or in
+the vicinity of the camp. The troops were to march at three in the
+morning, and the tents were struck an hour after midnight. The
+track up the pass was excessively steep, and very difficult for the
+camels. The cold was bitter and, in places where water had crossed
+the road, there were slippery surfaces of ice--which hindered the
+camels considerably--and it was past eight o'clock before the rear
+guard arrived at the top of the pass. From a commanding position,
+overlooking the defile and surrounding waste of rugged and barren
+mountains, not an enemy could be seen; and it was hoped that the
+report of the intended attack was a false one.
+
+The troops now began to descend the defile, which was known as the
+Manjiar Pass. Troublesome as the ascent had been, the descent was
+infinitely more so; and it was with difficulty that the camels
+could be made to go down the deep and slippery roads. The gorge was
+five miles in length. The track, for the first part, ran through a
+deep ravine of perpendicular walls; which narrowed in places to a
+few yards, overhanging the path until they seemed to meet, and form
+a tunnel, through which it ran. Had an attack been made on the
+column, as it struggled with its difficulties through this portion
+of the pass, the result would have been disastrous; for it would
+have been impossible to place troops on the heights, to cover the
+advance. Here and there side ravines broke into the road, in any of
+which ambushes might have been laid.
+
+It was not, however, until the difficult part of the road had been
+passed, and a comparatively open valley reached, that any of the
+natives were seen. Then a few men were observed on the heights but,
+as they were supposed to be shepherds, no notice was taken of them.
+Believing that all danger of attack was now over, the general
+ordered all the troops--with the exception of the baggage guard,
+which was composed of the 3rd Ghoorkas, and a few of the 72nd
+Highlanders and Norfolk Rangers--to march forward to the camp;
+which was to be pitched at a village called Keraiah, in the open
+valley.
+
+This, as the result proved, was a very rash move. Before the head
+of the column had extricated itself from the ravine, numbers of the
+country people were seen collecting, in small detached parties. By
+degrees they closed in, and were soon within fifty yards of the
+convoy. Captain Goad--in charge of the baggage--was close to a
+small guard of 72nd Highlanders when, suddenly, a volley was fired
+by the Mongals.
+
+Captain Goad fell, his thigh bone broken by a bullet. Sergeant
+Green, with three privates of the 72nd, picked him up and, having
+placed him under cover of a rock, turned to defend themselves. They
+were but four men against a large number; but they stood steady
+and, firing with careful aim, and picking off their man each time,
+they kept the enemy at bay until help arrived.
+
+Simultaneously, all along the line of the baggage column, the
+Mongals attacked. From the heights on both sides a fire was kept
+up, while the more daring swept down in parties upon the rear guard
+of Ghoorkas, commanded by Captain Powell. The baggage guard all
+behaved with great steadiness; defending the path on both sides,
+while the baggage animals continued their way along it.
+
+William Gale was on duty with the party; and was, like the rest,
+busy with his rifle. A sergeant next to him was hit in the leg; and
+Will--laying down his rifle--stopped one of the camels, and
+assisted the wounded man to mount it. The attack of the Mongals
+became more furious, as they saw their anticipated prey escaping
+them, in spite of all their efforts; but their attempts to close
+were in vain, and the convoy made its way down to the village; with
+the loss of one killed, and two officers, and eight men wounded.
+Captain Powell and Captain Goad both died, from the effects of
+their injuries. The enemy's loss must have been considerable, as
+the fire of the troop was steady and accurate, and the distance
+small.
+
+After a halt, for a day or two, the column marched to Khuram, where
+it encamped. Captain Herbert had reported to the colonel the manner
+in which Private Gale had defended him, when wounded and attacked
+by three Afghans; the incident, too, had been observed by many of
+his comrades and, as a reward, the young soldier was promoted to
+the rank of corporal; and the colonel told him that, had not
+similar acts of bravery been performed in the hand-to-hand action,
+on the Spingawi-Khotal, he would have been mentioned for the
+Victoria Cross.
+
+The mountain tops were now deep in snow; but in the valley the
+temperature was very agreeable, and the troops enjoyed their rest
+much. This was not, however, to be of long duration. From the lower
+end of the Khuram valley runs off another valley, known as the
+"Khost." This was an entirely unknown country to the Europeans, but
+it was said to be extremely hostile. Parties had come down and
+carried off cattle and, at any time, a formidable raid might have
+taken place, and our line of communication been entirely cut.
+
+The country was ruled by an Afghan governor, who sent in to say
+that he was willing to hand it over to us. There was, therefore, no
+expectation that there would be any resistance; and the expedition
+was designed rather to overawe the country, and to obtain
+information as to its extent and capabilities, than with any idea
+of permanent occupation. The column consisted of a squadron of the
+10th Hussars, the 5th Bengal Cavalry, the 21st and 28th Punjaub
+Infantry, two mountain batteries, a wing of the 72nd Highlanders,
+and two companies of the Norfolk Rangers. This force marched from
+Hazir-pir, and halted for the night at Jaji-Midan, at the head of
+the valley leading to the Darwiza Pass, through which the track
+runs into the Khost valley.
+
+At eight o'clock next morning, the troops moved forward. The ground
+was difficult, for the road ran between terraced fields on the side
+of the ravine, and obliged men and animals to pass in single file.
+It was not, therefore, until twelve o'clock that the rear guard
+moved out of the camp. Beyond this point, the road up the pass was
+not difficult. From the summit, a wide view was obtained. At the
+end of the valley--six miles distant--the plain of the Khost
+country was seen. It was seen that--owing to the slow progress the
+troops were making--the baggage train, consisting of 1000 camels,
+would not be able to reach the proposed camping ground, at the
+lower end of the valley, before dark. The general, therefore,
+ordered it to halt at the top of the pass, where the ground was
+open. The 21st Punjaubees, and a mountain battery, were to stay
+there for its protection; and bring it on, next day. The mules,
+with the regimental baggage, went on with the troops.
+
+The column met with no opposition. It halted near the village of
+Bakh, half a mile from the foot of the hills; where the valley
+widened into a plain, six miles long and four broad. The force
+encamped here on the 4th, to allow the convoy to come up. The
+following morning the column marched to the other end of the
+valley; and the next day the Afghan governor of Matun--the chief
+place of the Khost--rode in to welcome the general.
+
+On the 6th of January the force marched to Matun. They found that
+this fort was a square-walled enclosure, 100 yards each side, with
+circular corner bastions. There was a central square enclosure,
+with round towers at its angles. As the fort was approached, its
+garrison--which consisted of 100 local militia--were formed up, in
+two lines, at a mosque outside the fort. The general with his staff
+rode in, and a long interview took place between him and the
+governor. The troops encamped outside.
+
+In the evening information came in, from the villages in the plain,
+that large numbers of the Mongals--who inhabited the hills--were
+meditating an attack. Strong pickets were posted, and the night
+passed quietly. In the morning large numbers of tribesmen flocked
+down into the villages, and gradually surrounded the camp.
+
+At one o'clock the troops fell in. The cavalry were sent out
+against the enemy in the northwest direction, followed by the 28th
+Punjaubees and Number 2 mounted battery. The Mongals at once fell
+back to the hills.
+
+The squadron of the 10th Hussars were dismounted, and ordered to
+skirmish up a small knoll to the west. From this they drove the
+enemy, who gathered again on a spur opposite. Here they were
+charged by the 5th Punjaub Cavalry, and fell back higher up the
+ridge. The mountain guns and infantry now arrived, and speedily
+drove them over the crest.
+
+General Roberts, with his staff, rode out to watch the skirmish;
+and soon after he had left the enemy, who occupied the village to
+the northeast, showed in force. Two of the mountain guns opened
+upon them.
+
+On the south they now approached, under the cover of the old Afghan
+cavalry lines, to within half a mile before being perceived; and
+also occupied a walled village there. The other two guns in camp
+shelled the village, and soon drove the enemy out.
+
+When the general returned to camp, at half-past two, he found the
+attack driven off in all directions; and ordered the 21st Punjaubees,
+the 72nd Highlanders, and the Norfolk Rangers to follow up the enemy
+to the east and southeast, with the mountain guns; and to burn the
+villages which had sheltered the enemy. The first village was found
+deserted. At another, a quarter of a mile behind, the enemy made a
+stand; but were shelled out, and the plain beyond the Matun river was
+soon covered with fugitives. Major Stewart--with forty men of the 5th
+Punjaub Cavalry, who accompanied the column--charged 400 of them, and
+cut down many; until checked by the heavy fire of matchlock men from
+the high bank.
+
+No more fighting took place. The combination of tribes which had
+attacked the camp were estimated at 6000 men. Eighty prisoners were
+taken. These, two nights afterwards, took advantage of a night
+alarm to attempt to escape, and attacked the guard. The attempt,
+however, was frustrated; but only after several of the prisoners
+had been shot down.
+
+Some days passed, quietly. Reconnaissances were made up the valley.
+While waiting here, the news of the capture of Candahar, by General
+Stewart, arrived. Parties of engineers surveyed the country, and
+all passed off quietly.
+
+On the 25th, a portion of the force marched back to Hazir-pir On
+the 26th of January the general determined to withdraw this force
+altogether; as no advantage was gained by its retention, and the
+garrison would be constantly exposed to the attacks of the natives,
+who were already threatening it. The fort was handed over to Sultan
+Jan, a man of good family, who was appointed to govern the Khost,
+temporarily. He had under him the guard of the former governor, and
+some fresh natives; being, in all, 300 men. The headmen of the
+villages were called together, and these promised to obey his rule.
+
+Some of the chiefs of the Mongals, and other neighboring tribes,
+came in. Sheep were given to them, and they were told that, so long
+as they desisted from interference in the valley, no steps would be
+taken against them. The troops, however, had only made one day's
+march when a messenger arrived from Sultan Jan; saying that,
+immediately the troops had marched, the Mongals had come down to
+attack the fort. A strong party were therefore marched back at
+once. After destroying the stores, and setting fire to the fort,
+they drew off the governor and marched back to camp; the Mongals,
+although in great force, not venturing to offer any resistance.
+
+On the return of the force to the Khuram valley, a wing of the
+Norfolk Rangers was sent up to reinforce the troops stationed on
+the top of the Peiwar-Khotal; as the Jajis and Mongals had been
+gathering in large numbers, and threatening an attack on that post.
+
+William Gale was, with his company, stationed at Ali-Kheyl. The
+enemy abstained from any open attack, but they often harassed the
+sentries. One night, Will was corporal in charge of a picket of
+eight men, posted at a hut half a mile from the village. The object
+of the picket was to prevent any sudden attack being made upon the
+company; who were in a small village, a quarter of a mile in the
+rear, where a large quantity of grain was stored. Two men were
+posted as sentries, some hundred yards in advance of the hut.
+
+Will had visited the sentry to the right and, finding all was well,
+here, moved across to the left.
+
+"Is everything quiet?" he asked the sentry.
+
+"I don't know, corporal. Two or three times I have thought that I
+heard noises, and twice I have challenged."
+
+"What sort of noise?"
+
+"Once it seemed to be a crack, like a dried stick when some one
+treads on it. The other time it was as if a stone had been
+dislodged."
+
+"I will wait with you," Will said. "Two pairs of ears are better
+than one."
+
+Again there was a slight sound heard.
+
+"I don't like to fire," Will said. "The alarm would spread, and the
+whole camp get under arms. There is something moving, I am
+convinced; but it may be only a stray bullock. I will go forward,
+and see if I can make it out; and do you stand ready to fire, if I
+am attacked.
+
+"After doing so, fall back on the picket, at once. If the enemy are
+in force, hold the hut to the last. In ten minutes you will have
+help from the village, behind."
+
+Holding his rifle advanced, in readiness to fire, William Gale made
+his way forward, cautiously, towards the spot whence the noise
+seemed to proceed. When he was some forty yards in advance of the
+sentry, a number of figures rose suddenly from some bushes, and
+fired. Will fired, and saw the man at whom he aimed go down but, at
+the same instant, three or four guns were discharged; and he fell
+to the ground, shot through the leg. There was a rush of men
+towards him. A tulwar was waved, and fell, with a crushing blow, on
+his shoulder; and he became insensible.
+
+When he recovered consciousness he was being carried along, a man
+holding his arms and another his legs. The pain was excruciating,
+and he fainted again; after hearing, during his brief period of
+consciousness, a sharp fusilade of musketry, which told him that
+his comrades were defending the hut against the enemy.
+
+When again he came to his senses, it was daylight. He was lying in
+a small room, and an old woman was applying bandages to the sword
+cut on his shoulder. Although he did not know it, he was ten miles
+from the spot where the attack had been made.
+
+Among those who had taken part in it was the head of a small Jaji
+village, lying behind the hills. This chief was a crafty old
+savage, who had been desirous of remaining neutral in the strife.
+The determination of his people to join in the attack, by the
+tribes, had forced him to consent to their so doing. Before
+starting he had, however, made them swear that any wounded men who
+fell into their hands should not--in accordance with the Afghan
+custom--be instantly despatched; but should be brought back to the
+village.
+
+His intention was to have some hostages. If the English repulsed
+the attack and, in the spring, again advanced; he would be able to
+prove his goodwill to the cause, by handing the soldiers whom he
+had protected over to them. Upon the other hand, should the British
+fall back and the Afghans advance in the spring, he could hand the
+prisoners over to them, or send them down to Cabul, as a proof that
+his people had fought against the British. He had himself
+accompanied his men and, seeing after Will had fallen that he was
+still living, had at once ordered two of his men to carry him off
+to the village.
+
+The attack upon the guard house proved unsuccessful. The six
+soldiers defended themselves until the company from the village,
+behind, came up to the rescue. Several other attacks, at various
+points, took place. But the British were on the alert; and the
+hillsmen, finding that their enemies were not to be taken by
+surprise, scattered again to the village.
+
+The ball had fortunately passed through William Gale's leg, without
+either breaking a bone or cutting an artery; but the wound in the
+shoulder was more serious, and the effect of the strain upon it, in
+carrying him, brought on violent inflammation. Fever set in with
+delirium and, for weeks, the lad lay between life and death.
+
+The old woman who nursed him was, like most of her country people,
+skilled in the treatment of wounds. The bandages were kept bathed
+with water, snow was constantly applied to his head, and a
+decoction of herbs given him to drink. His good constitution was in
+his favor and, at last, he recovered his senses; to find himself
+convalescent, but as weak as an infant.
+
+In April the snow melted; and the chief, having by this time found
+that the English were not likely to advance beyond Ali-Kheyl,
+thought that it would best benefit his interest to send his
+prisoner down to Cabul. The Ameer was reported to be about to
+conclude peace with the British; and the chief thought that he was
+more likely to receive a reward, from him, for the care he had
+bestowed upon the prisoner, than from the English. Moreover, it
+would have been difficult to send him into the English camp,
+through the hostile villages; while no unfavorable comment would be
+incited, by his sending his prisoner down to Cabul.
+
+Will Gale was far too weak to perform the journey on foot. He was,
+therefore, placed on a camel. The chief himself, and four of his
+headmen, accompanied him as an escort and, a week after the pass
+was open, they started up the valley to the Shatur-Gardan; and
+thence descended into the Logan Valley, below, on the way to Cabul.
+
+
+
+Chapter 12: The Advance Up The Khyber.
+
+
+Nothing has yet been said of the doings of the other columns: that
+under General Browne advancing, by the Khyber Pass, upon
+Jellalabad; that under General Stewart, by the Bolan Pass, upon
+Candahar.
+
+General Browne's force had been gathered at the frontier line, at
+the mouth of the pass, awaiting the reply of the Ameer to the
+British ultimatum. None having been received, up to the night of
+the 20th of November, the advance took place in the morning; at the
+same hour at which General Roberts advanced from Thull in the
+Khurum valley.
+
+The principal defense of the Khyber Pass was the fort Ali-Musjid.
+This fort stands on a most commanding position, on a rock jutting
+out from the hillside far into the valley, which its guns
+commanded. It was flanked by batteries erected on the hillsides,
+and was a most formidable position to capture. It was situated
+about six miles up the valley.
+
+The force under General Browne was divided into four brigades. The
+first--under General Macpherson--consisted of the 4th battalion of
+the Rifle Brigade, the 20th Bengal Infantry, the 4th Ghoorkas, and
+a mountain battery. These were ordered to take a mountain road
+and--led by a native guide--to make a long circuit, and so to come
+down into the pass at a village lying a mile or two beyond
+Ali-Musjid.
+
+The second brigade--under Colonel Tytler--consisting of the 1st
+battalion of the 17th Foot, the infantry of the Guides, the 1st
+Sikhs, and a mountain battery, were also to take to the hills and,
+working along on their crests, to come down upon the batteries
+which the Afghans had erected on the hillside opposite to
+Ali-Musjid.
+
+The third brigade, consisting of the 81st Regiment, the 14th Sikhs,
+and the 24th Native Infantry; and the fourth brigade, composed of
+the 51st Regiment, 6th Native Infantry, and the 45th Sikhs, were to
+advance straight up the valley. With them was a mountain battery, a
+battery of Horse Artillery, one of Royal Artillery, and a battery
+of 40-pounders, drawn by elephants.
+
+These brigades marched forward until they reached some rising
+ground in the valley, whence they could see Ali-Musjid, at a
+distance of a mile and a half, in front of them. The enemy at once
+opened fire. The gunners in the fort had been practising for some
+weeks, and had got the range with great accuracy; and their shot
+and shell fell thick along the slope. The column was therefore
+marched back behind its crest, and there halted; and the men were
+allowed to fall out and eat their dinners, as it was desired that
+the flanking columns of Macpherson and Tytler--which had very much
+further to go--should reach the positions assigned to them before
+the attack began.
+
+The artillery, however, took up their position on the crest, and
+opened fire on the fort. The effect of the light guns was but
+slight, but the 40-pounders produced considerable effect on the
+face of the fort.
+
+After a halt for some time, the troops were ordered to advance. The
+45th Sikhs were first thrown out upon the hillside and, working
+their way along on the right of the valley, opened a heavy musketry
+fire against the Afghans in the batteries there. Presently the 51st
+and 6th Native Infantry joined them; while the 81st, the 24th, and
+14th Sikhs worked along on the left.
+
+The scene was one of the most picturesque ever witnessed in
+warfare. From the fortress, standing on the perpendicular rock in
+the center of the valley, the flashes of the great guns came fast
+and steadily; while the edges of the rock, and fort, were fringed
+with tiny puffs of musketry. From the rising ground in the valley,
+the smoke of the British guns rose up in the still air as, steadily
+and fast, they replied to the fire of the fort. Both sides of the
+steep hill slopes were lined with British infantry--the quick flash
+of the rifles spurting out from every rock and bush; while
+continuous lines of light smoke rose from the Afghan entrenchments
+which faced them.
+
+Gradually the British skirmishers advanced, until they were close
+to the Afghan entrenchments on the hillsides abreast of the fort.
+So far, there was no sign that Macpherson's brigade had reached the
+post assigned to it, high up on the hill; or that Tytler had worked
+round to the village in the enemy's rear. Some attacks which were
+made upon the Afghans were repulsed, with loss. Major Birch and
+Lieutenant Fitzgerald were killed, and Captain Maclean wounded; and
+between thirty and forty of the rank and file were killed, or
+wounded. As the fort and its defenses could not have been carried
+by direct attack, without immense loss of life; it was determined
+to cease operations until morning, in order to give the flanking
+columns time to reach the positions assigned to them. A wing of a
+regiment, from each brigade, was ordered to remain on the hillside
+facing the Afghan entrenchments. The rest of the troops fell back a
+short distance, and lay down as they were, for the night.
+
+In the meantime, the brigades of Macpherson and Tytler had
+encountered enormous difficulties on the line of march. The roads
+they had taken were mere tracks, and there were many places where
+it was almost impossible to get the mountain guns along. From
+daybreak until late at night the troops labored, unceasingly. They
+knew, by the dull roar echoed and re-echoed among the mountains,
+that their comrades below were engaged; and the thought that a
+failure might ensue, owing to their absence from the contest,
+nerved them to continued exertions.
+
+Late at night, however, Macpherson with his brigade arrived on the
+top of the hill facing Ali-Musjid; and Tytler, with his column,
+came down into the Khyber valley in rear of the fort. But, though
+unopposed, their march had not been unnoticed and, late in the
+evening, the news reached the Afghans that the British were
+marching down into the valley behind them. A wild panic instantly
+seized them. Clothes, ammunition, guns, everything that could
+impede their flight were thrown away; and the garrison of
+Ali-Musjid, and the Afghans in the hillside entrenchments fled, a
+herd of frightened fugitives, up the valley. Hasty as was their
+retreat, they were not in time. Tytler, with his column, debouched
+into the valley before they had passed the spot where the mountain
+path descended into it; and large numbers were taken prisoners.
+
+As at the Peiwar-Khotal, the Afghans proved themselves capable of
+defending a strong position, valiantly; but were converted into a
+mob of panic-stricken fugitives, by their line of retreat being
+threatened. A European army, under like circumstances, would have
+fallen back in good order. Their force was amply sufficient to have
+swept aside the little column which barred their retreat, and they
+would have occupied a fresh position farther to the rear, and
+renewed the conflict. Not so the Afghans. The capture of Ali-Musjid
+brought with it the entire demoralization of the Afghan army which,
+a few hours before, had been fully confident in its power to
+repulse any attack which might be made upon it.
+
+The British continued their advance, passed through the Khyber
+Pass, and entered the broad valley near whose head stands the town
+of Jellalabad. Beyond a few shots, fired at them by tribesmen high
+up on the mountain side, they experienced no opposition, whatever
+and, a week after the fight in the Khyber, entered Jellalabad and
+encamped around it.
+
+Further than this it was not intended to go, for the present.
+Winter was now close at hand. Between Jellalabad and Cabul were a
+series of most difficult passes. An army advancing up them would
+have immense difficulty to encounter, and might find itself cut off
+from India by the snows. In the Jellalabad valley the weather is
+mild, large stores of provisions were obtainable, and here it was
+determined to remain, through the winter; and to recommence the
+campaign, in the spring, with the advantage of the Khyber Pass--one
+of the keys of Afghanistan--being in our hands.
+
+But a day or two after reaching Jellalabad--having defeated and
+dispersed one of the two Afghan armies--the news arrived of the
+capture of the Peiwar-Khotal--the second key of Afghanistan--and
+the utter rout of the army defending it. Thus, in little more than
+a week after the commencement of the campaign Sheer-Ali, the Ameer,
+saw the entire overthrow of the army which he had, for so many
+years, been occupied in organizing and training. The positions
+which he had deemed impregnable had both been taken, after a single
+day's fighting; and his capital lay virtually at the mercy of his
+conquerors. In one short week, his hopes and plans had been
+scattered to the winds.
+
+Sheer-Ali was not wholly to be blamed. He had for many years
+received an annual present of money and arms, from the British
+government; but upon the other hand, he saw Russia marching with
+giant steps towards his northern frontier and, contrasting the
+energy and enterprise of the great northern power, with the
+inactivity which he may have supposed to prevail among the men who
+governed England, he became more and more anxious; and asked the
+English definitely to state whether he could rely upon them for
+assistance, should he be attacked by the Russians.
+
+He received a reply from the Duke of Argyle--the British minister
+for India--of a doubtful nature, couched in terms which seem to
+have aroused his resentment. From this moment, there can be no
+doubt that the Ameer's course was decided upon. He was between the
+hammer and the anvil and, as he could obtain no guarantee of
+assistance from England, he determined to throw himself into the
+arms of Russia.
+
+Letters were exchanged between him and General Kaufmann--the
+Russian viceroy in Turkestan--and the latter gave him the warmest
+promises of support, if he would ally himself with Russia. Although
+he had, for years, declined to accept a British resident at Cabul,
+or to allow Englishmen to enter the country; he now, believing in
+the power and willingness of Russia to help, received the visit of
+a Russian general and staff, at Cabul.
+
+Unfortunately for the Ameer, the government of England had now
+changed hands; and the ministry at once sent to Sheer-Ali, to
+demand that he should receive a British resident. It was late in
+the year, and the Ameer--acting, no doubt, on the advice of his
+Russian friends--sought to gain time by evasive answers. The
+British government--who saw through the ruse--ordered the envoy to
+advance, with a strong escort. This obliged the Ameer to come to a
+final decision; and the die was cast by the escort being stopped,
+by force, on its arrival at Ali-Musjid.
+
+There is no doubt that the Ameer, and his friends, calculated that
+it was already too late in the season for the English to gather a
+sufficient force, on the frontier, to force the passes held by the
+Afghan army before the snows. The promptness of action of the
+English government, the valor of their troops, and the unusually
+late setting in of the winter combined to overthrow the Ameer's
+plans. Had the campaign been delayed till the spring, there can be
+little doubt that the British, in their advance, would have found
+themselves opposed--if not by a Russian army--at least by an army
+led and officered by Russians, with Russian engineers and
+artillerymen. The promptness of their advance, and the capture of
+the passes and the dispersion of the Afghan armies, within a week
+of the opening of the campaign, altogether altered this position.
+
+Sheer-Ali found himself a king without an army. The plains of Cabul
+were thronged with the panic-stricken fugitives from the Khyber and
+Peiwar; and Sheer-Ali started at night from his capital with his
+Russian friends, and made for the north; sending letter after
+letter ahead of him to General Kaufmann, imploring the promised aid
+of Russia. The rapid course of events, however, had entirely
+disconcerted the Russian plans.
+
+In the spring, a Russian army might have advanced and cooperated
+with that of the Ameer; but the winter had set in, the distance was
+immense, and the Russians unprepared for instant action. The
+appeals of the unfortunate prince were responded to with vague
+generalities. He was no longer a powerful ally, but a broken
+instrument and, heartbroken with disappointment and failure, the
+unfortunate Sheer-Ali was seized by fever and died, in an obscure
+village, almost alone and wholly uncared for.
+
+His son Yakoob Khan--who had, in his youth, proved himself a brave
+and able soldier; but who, having incurred his father's
+displeasure, had been for years confined as a prisoner at
+Herat--was now liberated, and took his place as his father's
+successor. He saw at once that, with a broken and disorganized
+army, he could not hope to resist the advance of the three British
+armies which, coming from Jellalabad, from the heights of the
+Shatur-Gardan, and from Candahar, would simultaneously advance upon
+his capital, as soon as the snows melted. He therefore opened
+negotiations and, early in May, himself descended from Cabul and
+had an interview with General Browne, at Gundamuk; when the
+preliminaries of peace were arranged, and signed.
+
+The terms insisted upon by the British were not onerous. Yakoob was
+recognized as the Ameer of Afghanistan, the annual subsidy paid to
+his father was to be continued. The Khyber Pass and the Khurum
+valley, as far as the Peiwar-Khotal, were to remain in the hands of
+the British; and a British minister was to be stationed at Cabul.
+When peace had been signed, the greater portion of the British army
+retired to India; and the Khurum column, leaving two or three
+regiments in that valley, also fell back.
+
+While the first and second divisions had been gaining victories in
+the Khyber and Khurum valleys, the column under General Stewart had
+met with difficulties of another kind. Between the Indus, and the
+foot of the range of mountains through which the Bolan Pass leads
+to the lofty plateau land above, a great waste of sand stretches.
+In the wet season, this tract of country is overflowed by the
+Indus. In the dry season it is a parched and bare desert, with its
+wells few and far apart. There were great difficulties met with in
+crossing this inhospitable plain, and the losses among the baggage
+animals were great; but the labors up to this point were as
+nothing, to those which had to be undergone on the way up the Bolan
+Pass.
+
+This pass--whose ascent occupies three days--is in fact the mere
+bed of a stream, covered deeply with boulders and stones of all
+sizes, in which the baggage and artillery horses sank fetlock deep.
+The difficulties encountered were enormous, and vast numbers of
+camels, horses, and bullocks died by the way. Even with a double
+complement of horses, it was almost impossible to drag the guns up
+the deep, shingly pass; and great delays were experienced, before
+the force intended for operations against Candahar were assembled,
+at Quettah. So far, the advance had taken place through British
+territory, as Quettah has long been occupied by us.
+
+When the advance began, it was rapid. No opposition was experienced
+by the way, until the column arrived within a few hours' march of
+Candahar; and then the enemy's attack was feeble, and easily
+repulsed. On the 9th of January, General Stewart entered the city.
+
+Candahar, though not the capital, is the chief town of Afghanistan.
+It stands in a slightly undulating plain; and was, at one time, a
+city of great importance and wealth. Its position is the most
+important in Afghanistan. It bars the road to an enemy advancing
+from the north, through Herat; and threatens the flank and rear of
+one advancing against India, through Cabul. The country around is
+extremely fertile and, were irrigation properly used, and a railway
+constructed to India, Candahar and the surrounding country would
+again become one of the gardens of the world.
+
+The authorities of the city made their submission, as the column
+approached it, and the army settled down to quiet occupation;
+broken only by isolated attacks, upon individual soldiers, by
+fanatical Ghazis. When peace was concluded, one of the conditions
+distinctly insisted upon by the British general, and agreed to by
+the Ameer, was that Candahar should remain in our possession. The
+alleged advantage thus gained, and the territory thus acquired,
+were afterwards abandoned by the British government succeeding that
+which had so vigorously carried out the war.
+
+The occupation of Candahar by the British had been insisted on, at
+first, on the ground that, if Russia should make an advance against
+India, the British nation would have ample cause to rue the cession
+of Candahar; for it was declared that with this city strongly
+fortified, and surrounded by outlying works, 10,000 British troops
+there could arrest the progress of an invading army, however large,
+until England had had full time to put forth all her strength, and
+to assemble an army amply sufficient to secure the safety of the
+most valuable of our possessions--the empire of India.
+
+It was said that, whatever allies Russia might have prepared for
+herself, by intrigues among the princes of India, these would not
+think of moving, so long as they knew that the fortress of Candahar
+remained as a British bulwark against an invading force. It was
+represented that, so long as this place held out, England would be
+able to devote her whole force towards repelling the foreign
+invader--instead of being obliged, simultaneously, to oppose him
+and to put down a formidable rising in India, itself.
+
+It was, however, not the universal opinion that the best policy of
+England was to occupy this territory by an armed force; and
+subsequent events, with the change of government in England, led to
+a different determination.
+
+
+
+Chapter 13: The Massacre At Cabul.
+
+
+At each village through which William Gale and his escort passed,
+the inhabitants turned out, and hooted and yelled at the prisoner;
+and it was with the greatest difficulty that the chief protected
+him from personal violence. William himself was scarce conscious of
+what was passing. The swinging action of the camel added to his
+great weakness, and he would not have been able to keep his seat on
+its back, had not his captors fastened him with ropes to the
+saddle. Although the snow had only just melted on the Shatur-Gardan
+Pass, in the valleys below the heat of the sun was already great
+and, often as it poured down upon him, he lapsed into a state of
+semi-consciousness; and drowsily fancied that he was again in his
+canoe, tossing on the tiny waves, in the shelter of the reef.
+
+On the sixth day after the start, a shout from his guard aroused
+him, as they emerged from a steep ascent amongst some hills. Before
+him an undulating ground, dotted with villages, stretched for three
+or four miles. At the foot of some steep hills, to the left of a
+wide valley, was a large walled town which he knew to be Cabul. On
+the hillside above it was a strong building: half fort, half
+palace. This was the Bala-Hissar, the abode of the Ameer, and the
+fortress of Cabul. In addition to the king's residence it contained
+barracks, store houses, magazines, and many residences. Towards
+this the cavalcade made its way.
+
+They halted two miles from the town, and the chief sent his son
+forward to the Ameer, to inform him that he had brought in an
+English prisoner; and to request that an escort might be sent out,
+lest he should be killed by the people on approaching the town. An
+hour after the man had left, a troop of cavalry sallied out from
+the gate of the Bala-Hissar, and rode rapidly to the spot where the
+party had halted. Surrounding the camel on which William Gale was
+mounted, they conducted it to the fortress.
+
+Illustration: William Gale in the hands of the Afghans.
+
+When he was lifted down from his camel, Will was unable to stand.
+Fever had set in again, and he was conveyed to an apartment in a
+house near the royal residence. The Ameer was already negotiating
+with the British, and orders were consequently given that the
+prisoner should receive every attention. The king's own doctor was
+ordered to attend him, and two attendants were told off to take
+charge of him. The old chief received a recompense, for the care
+which he had taken of the prisoner, which fully answered to his
+expectations; and he returned home well satisfied with the success
+of his policy.
+
+For weeks, Will lay between life and death; and he was a mere
+skeleton when, two months after his arrival, he was able for the
+first time to sit up at the window, and look across the valley.
+Very gradually, he recovered strength. He was well supplied with
+food, and especially enjoyed the delicious fruits for which Cabul
+is celebrated.
+
+His attendants were a old man and his son, the latter a lad of some
+fifteen years of age. The father did his duty, because ordered to
+do so; but his scowling face often showed the hatred which he felt
+of the Kaffir. The lad, however, took kindly to his patient. He it
+was who for hours together would, while Will was at his worst, sit
+by his bedside, constantly changing the wet cloths wrapped round
+his head, and sometimes squeezing a few drops of the refreshing
+juice of some fruit between his parched lips; and as his patient
+turned the corner and became slowly convalescent, his pleasure over
+the life he had saved, by his care, was very great.
+
+Like most soldiers in the expeditionary force, Will had picked up a
+few words of Afghan; and had greatly increased his stock, during
+the time he lay in the hut in the mountains. Alone now all day with
+the boy, with nothing to do but to look out on the town below, and
+the wide valley beyond, he made rapid progress; and was, by the
+time he was strong enough to walk alone across the room, able to
+hold some sort of conversation with his friend--for so he had come
+to regard his devoted attendant.
+
+One morning the boy came into the room in a state of great
+excitement.
+
+"English officers are coming," he said, "with soldiers."
+
+"But I thought it was peace," Will exclaimed, delighted. "You told
+me peace had been signed, at Gundamuk, two months ago."
+
+"Yes, it is peace," the boy said. "The officers are coming in
+friendship, to be here with the Ameer."
+
+Will was greatly moved at the news. When he had heard, six weeks
+before, that peace was signed, he had begun to hope that, some day
+or other, he should again be able to return to India; but the news,
+that some of his countrymen were close at hand, almost overcame
+him.
+
+The next day, which was the 24th of July--although Will had lost
+all account of time--he saw vast numbers of people out on the
+plain; and presently, far away, he beheld a large body of horsemen.
+These, the lad told him, were the Ameer and his bodyguard,
+accompanied by the English officers. Cannon were fired in salute,
+and the garrison of the Bala-Hissar stood to their arms and,
+presently, Will saw a cavalcade riding up from the gate of the
+fortress. First came some Afghan cavalry; then rode a tall and
+stately man, whom the boy told him was the Ameer. But Will had no
+eyes for him. All his thoughts were centered on the white officer
+who rode beside him: Major Sir Lewis Cavagnari, the English envoy.
+Behind, among the chiefs of the Ameer's suite, rode two or three
+other English officers; and then came a detachment of some
+twenty-five cavalry, and fifty infantry of the Guides, a frontier
+force consisting of picked men.
+
+As they passed near his window, Will stood up with his hand to his
+forehead, in salute. Major Cavagnari looked up in surprise, and
+spoke to the Ameer. The latter said a few words in reply, and then
+the cavalcade rode on to the palace. Ten minutes later two of the
+Ameer's attendants entered, and told Will to follow them.
+
+He had that morning, for the first time since his arrival in Cabul,
+put on his uniform. He was still very weak but, leaning one hand
+upon his attendant's shoulder, he followed the messengers. He was
+conducted to a large room in the palace, where the Ameer and his
+adviser, and the British officers were sitting.
+
+"Well, my lad," Major Cavagnari said, kindly, "I hear you have had
+a bad time of it. The Ameer tells me that you were taken prisoner
+near Ali-Kheyl, that you were badly wounded, and that after the
+snow melted you were brought down here. He says he gave orders that
+everything should be done for you, but that you have been very ill,
+ever since."
+
+"I have been treated very kindly, sir," Will said, "and I am now
+getting round. I owe my life chiefly to the care and attention of
+the lad, here, who has watched over me like a brother."
+
+Will's words were translated to the Ameer, who expressed his
+satisfaction, and ordered a purse of money to be given to the boy,
+in testimony of his approval of the care he had taken of his
+patient. As Major Cavagnari saw that the young soldier was almost
+too weak to stand, he at once told him to retire to his room,
+adding kindly:
+
+"I will ask the Ameer to assign you quarters in the same house with
+us. We will soon bring you round, and make you strong and well
+again."
+
+The same evening Will was carried over--for the fatigue he had
+undergone had been almost too much for him--to the large house
+assigned to Major Cavagnari, his officers and escort. It was built
+of wood, surrounded by a courtyard and wall. A room was assigned to
+Will, on the same floor as that occupied by the officers. The
+Afghan lad had received orders to accompany his patient, and remain
+with him as long as he stayed in Cabul.
+
+Will's progress towards recovery was now rapid. He had no longer
+any cause for anxiety. He was carefully attended to by Doctor
+Kelly, the surgeon of the Guides, who had accompanied the mission
+as medical officer. The escort was commanded by Lieutenant
+Hamilton; and Sir Lewis Cavagnari was accompanied by Mr. William
+Jenkyns, of the Indian Civil Service, as his secretary. The care of
+Doctor Kelly, and the influence of quinine and tonics quickly added
+to Will's strength; but his best medicine was the sound of English
+voices, and the kindness which was shown to him. In a fortnight he
+was able to get about, as usual; and the doctor said that, in
+another month, he would be as strong as ever.
+
+For two or three weeks after Major Cavagnari's arrival in Cabul,
+all went well; and it appeared as if the forebodings of those who
+had predicted trouble and danger to the little body who had gone
+up, as it were, into the lion's den, were likely to be falsified.
+That the mission was not without danger the authorities, and Major
+Cavagnari himself, were well aware; but it was important that the
+provision in the treaty of Gundamuk, by which England secured the
+right of maintaining a resident at Cabul, should be put into
+operation. Besides, the Ameer had himself given the invitation to
+Major Cavagnari, and had pressed the point warmly, giving the most
+solemn promises of protection.
+
+At any rate, for the first two weeks the soldiers of the escort
+moved freely in the city, without molestation or insult; and it
+appeared as if the population of Cabul were content with the terms
+of peace which, indeed, imposed no burdens whatever upon them, and
+was supposed to have inflicted no humiliation on their national
+pride.
+
+On the 5th of August, several regiments marched in from Herat.
+These troops--which were considered the flower of the Afghan
+army--had, in consequence of the distance of Herat from the seat of
+war, taken no part whatever in the struggle. Upon the very day
+after their arrival they scattered through the town, and were loud
+in their expression of hostility to the terms of peace. Had they
+been there, they said, the Kaffirs would have been easily defeated.
+Why should peace have been made at the very first reverse, and
+before the best fighting men had come to the front?
+
+That evening Will Gale's young attendant came to him in his room,
+looking very serious.
+
+"What is the matter, Yossouf?"
+
+The lad shook his head.
+
+"Trouble is coming," he said. "The Heratee men are stirring up the
+people, and the Budmashes are threatening that they will kill the
+English."
+
+"But the Ameer has promised his protection," Will said. "He has
+sworn a solemn oath to stand by them."
+
+"Yakoob Khan is weak," the boy said. "He was a great warrior, once;
+but he has been in prison for many years and he is no longer firm
+and strong. Some of the men round him are bad advisers. Yakoob Khan
+is no better than a reed to lean upon."
+
+The next day there were riots in the town. The Heratee men taunted
+the people of Cabul with cowardice, and the excitement spread in
+the city. The soldiers of the escort could no longer stroll quietly
+through the bazaars; but were hooted at, and abused, although of
+the same religion and race as the people around them--for the Guide
+regiments were recruited from Pathans, and other border tribes.
+
+Day after day the position became more threatening. The men of the
+escort were ordered no longer to go down into the town, where their
+presence was the occasion of tumults. A native officer of one of
+our cavalry regiments, who was spending his furlough at a village
+near Cabul, came into the Bala-Hissar and told Major Cavagnari that
+he feared, from rumors that reached him, that the Heratee regiments
+would break into mutiny, and attack the embassy.
+
+The officer, who was a man of immense courage and coolness, replied
+quietly:
+
+"If they do, they can but kill the three or four of us here, and
+our deaths will be revenged."
+
+He, however, made representations to the Ameer as to the
+threatening behavior of the Heratee troops; but Yakoob assured him
+that he could rely thoroughly upon his protection, and that--even
+should the Heratee troops break out in mutiny--he would at once
+suppress the movement, with the Cabul regiments.
+
+Yossouf became daily more anxious. Going into the town, to buy
+fruits and other necessaries, he heard more of what was going on
+than could the members of the embassy.
+
+"Things are very bad," he said, over and over again. "It would be
+better for you all to go away. Why does your officer stop here, to
+be killed?"
+
+"It is his duty to stay at his post," Will said. "He has been sent
+here by the commander-in-chief. He is like a soldier on outpost
+duty. He cannot desert his post, because he sees danger
+approaching; but I wish, with all my heart, that an order would
+come for his recall; not only because of the danger, but because I
+am longing to be back again with my regiment and, although I am
+strong enough to ride down to the Punjaub, now, I cannot go except
+with Sir Lewis and his escort. Although it is peace, a single
+Englishman could not travel down to Jellalabad, through the
+passes."
+
+Will had, from the first week after the arrival of the mission,
+fallen into the position of an orderly-room sergeant. His duties
+were little more than nominal, but he acted as assistant to Mr.
+Jenkyns, and made copies and duplicates of reports and other
+documents which were, from time to time, sent down to Jellalabad.
+Being the only Englishman there, with the exception of the four
+officers, these greatly relaxed the usual distance prevailing
+between an officer and a corporal; and treated him as a civilian
+clerk when in office, and with a pleasant cordiality at other
+times. Except, indeed, that he messed alone, and kept in his own
+room of an evening, he might have been one of the party.
+
+Each day, he reported to Sir Lewis the rumors which Yossouf had
+gathered in the town. In his reports to headquarters, Major
+Cavagnari stated that trouble had arisen from the conduct of the
+Heratee troops; but he scarcely made enough of the real danger
+which threatened the little party. Had he done so, the embassy
+would probably have been recalled.
+
+"What have you got there, Yossouf?" Will asked one day, when his
+follower returned with a larger bundle than usual.
+
+"I have brought the uniform of an Afghan soldier," the boy replied,
+"which I have purchased from the bazaar. It is for you. I am sure
+that soon you will be attacked. The English are brave, but there
+are only four of them. Their soldiers will fight, but what can they
+do against an army? When the time comes, you must dress yourself in
+these clothes, and I will try to conceal you."
+
+"But I cannot do that, Yossouf," Will said. "It is very good of you
+to try and aid me to escape; but I am a soldier, and must share the
+fortunes of my officers, whatever they may be. If they fight, I
+shall fight. If they are killed, I must be killed, too. I cannot
+run away and hide myself, when the danger comes."
+
+The lad hung his head.
+
+"Then Yossouf will die, too," he said quietly. "He will not leave
+his white friend."
+
+"No, no, Yossouf," Will said, warmly; "you have nothing to do with
+the business. Why should you involve yourself in our fate? You can
+do me no good by sacrificing your life."
+
+Yossouf shook his head.
+
+"If," he said presently, "the time comes, and you see that it is of
+no use any longer to fight, and that all is lost, would you try to
+escape then?"
+
+"Yes," Will said, "certainly I would. When all hope of further
+resistance is gone, and fighting is useless, my duty would be at an
+end; and if I could manage to escape, then, I should be justified
+in trying to save my life."
+
+Yossouf looked relieved.
+
+"Very well." he said, "then, at the last, I will try and save you."
+
+"Still, Yossouf," Will said, "we must hope that it is not coming to
+that. The Ameer has sworn to protect us, and he can do so. The
+Bala-Hissar is strong, and he can easily hold it, with one or two
+of his Cabul regiments, against the Heratee men. He has three or
+four of these regiments here. He cannot be so false to his oath as
+to allow his guests to be massacred."
+
+Yossouf made a gesture which expressed his utter disbelief in the
+Ameer, and then again went about his duties.
+
+On the 2nd of September, on his return from the town, he reported
+that there was great excitement among the people; and that he
+believed that the night would not pass off, without trouble. Major
+Cavagnari, to whom Will reported the news, sent in a message to the
+Ameer--whose palace was within two or three hundred yards--and
+begged him to take measures to secure the Bala-Hissar against any
+attack by the Heratees.
+
+The members of the escort, available for the defense of the
+residency, were but about fifty men. Most of the cavalry were away.
+Some were down the pass with despatches. The rest were stationed a
+short distance off in the plain, as forage was difficult to obtain
+in the fort.
+
+The Ameer returned a curt message to Major Cavagnari, saying that
+there was no cause for uneasiness. The latter, however, doubled the
+sentries at the gate of the little enclosure.
+
+Just as the officers were about to retire to rest, Yossouf--who
+had, a short time, before gone out again, telling Will that he
+would bring back news of what was going on, ran in.
+
+"The Heratees are coming," he said. "The gates of the fort have
+been left open. The Cabul men are all in their barracks. They are
+pouring in at the gates. Do you not hear them?"
+
+William Gale ran to the window, and could hear a loud and confused
+noise of yelling and shouting. He ran in to the envoy's room, and
+warned him that the Heratees were at hand. Without the loss of a
+moment's time, Lieutenant Hamilton got his men under arms; and
+posted them at the upper windows of the house, where their fire
+would command the approaches to the gate.
+
+Quickly as this was done, the Afghans were close at hand by the
+time that each man was at his post; and instantly opened a
+scattering fire at the residency, shouting to the soldiers to come
+out and join them, and to bring out the Kaffir officers to be
+killed. The Pathans were, however, true to their salt and, in
+reply, opened a steady fire upon the mass of the enemy. With wild
+yells the Afghans rushed at the gate but, so steadily and rapidly
+did the defenders shoot, from the upper windows and loopholes cut
+in the gate, that the assailants were forced to fall back.
+
+"That's right, my lads," Major Cavagnari said cheerfully to his
+men; "we can hold the place for some time, and the Ameer will bring
+the Cabul regiments down in no time, and sweep away these rascals."
+
+The Afghans, now some thousands strong--assisted by all the Budmashes,
+and turbulent portion of the population of Cabul--surrounded the house
+on all sides, and kept up a heavy and incessant fire; which was coolly
+and steadily returned by the Guides. After an hour's fighting, there
+was a sudden roar above the rattle of musketry; followed by another,
+and another.  Simultaneously came the crash of shells. One burst in
+the house, the other tore through the gate. Still there was no sign of
+the Cabul regiments.
+
+Eight or ten guns were brought to play on the little garrison. The
+gate was broken down, and nearly half the force of the house were
+already killed, or wounded, by the musketry and shell fire. Still
+they continued the defense Over and over again, the Afghans swarmed
+up close to the gate; only to fall back again, before the steady
+fire of the Snider rifles of the Guides. Major Cavagnari went from
+room to room, encouraging the men; while the other officers and
+Will Gale, taking rifles which had fallen from the hands of men no
+longer able to use them, set an example of cool and steady firing
+to their men.
+
+For four hours the unequal contest continued; then a cry arose,
+from the men, that the house was on fire. It was but too true. A
+shell had exploded in the lower part of the house, and had ignited
+the woodwork; and the fire had already obtained so firm a hold that
+it was impossible to extinguish it. A few of the men continued
+their fire from the windows, to the last; while the rest carried
+their wounded comrades out into the courtyard. As the flames shot
+out from the lower windows, the yells of the Afghans rose higher
+and higher; and a fearful storm of lead and iron swept down upon
+the little band, who were now plainly visible in the light of the
+flames. Even now the enemy did not dare, although numbering
+hundreds to one, to come too close upon them, though they flocked
+up close to the gate.
+
+"Now, lads!" Major Cavagnari exclaimed, "let us rush out, and die
+fighting hand to hand; better that than to be shot down
+defenseless, here."
+
+Thus saying he led the way, and charged out upon the crowded foe.
+There were but Lieutenant Hamilton and eight men to follow him. All
+the rest had fallen. Doctor Kelly had been shot in the house, while
+dressing the wound of one of the soldiers. Mr. Jenkyns had fallen
+outside.
+
+Will Gale had twice been wounded, but was still on his feet and,
+grasping his musket, he rushed forward with his comrades. A figure
+sprang out just as he reached the gate and, with a sudden rush,
+carried him along for some paces. Then he stumbled over a fragment
+of the wall, and fell just at the corner of the gate--which had
+swung inward, when burst open by the enemy's shell. Confused and
+bewildered, he struggled to regain his feet.
+
+"Keep quiet, master!" Yossouf's voice said, in his ear. "It is your
+only chance of safety."
+
+So saying, he dragged Will into the narrow space between the gate
+and the wall; then, as he rose to his feet, he wrapped round him a
+loose Afghan cloak, and pressed a black sheepskin cap far down over
+his face.
+
+In a minute there was the sound of a fierce struggle, without. The
+shots of the revolvers of the two English officers rang out, in
+quick succession, mingled with the loud report of the Afghan
+muskets. The savage yells rose, high and triumphant. The last of
+the gallant band, who had for hours defended the embassy, had
+fallen. Then there was a rush through the gate, as the Afghans
+swarmed into the courtyard, till the space around the burning house
+was well-nigh full.
+
+Unperceived, Will Gale and Yossouf stepped from behind the gate and
+joined the throng and, at once, made their way into the stables,
+where several of the Budmashes were already engaged in their work
+of plunder. Yossouf caught up three or four horse rugs, and made
+them into a loose bundle; and signed to Will to do the same. The
+young soldier did so, and lifted them on his shoulder, so as to
+partly hide his face. Then he followed Yossouf into the courtyard
+again.
+
+Already there was a stream of men with saddles, rugs, muskets, and
+other plunder making their way out, while others were still
+thronging in. Joining the former, Will and his guide were soon
+outside the enclosure At any other time, his disguise would have
+been noticed, at once; but in the crowd his legs were hidden, and
+all were too intent upon plunder, and too excited at their success,
+to notice him.
+
+Once outside the wall, he was comparatively safe. The light thrown
+over the courtyard, by the blazing house, made the darkness beyond
+all the more complete. Keeping carefully in shadow, Yossouf led him
+along to a clump of bushes, in a garden a hundred yards from the
+house. Stooping here, he pulled out a bundle.
+
+"Here," he said, "is the uniform. Put it on, quickly!"
+
+It was but the work of a minute for Will to attire himself in the
+uniform of the Afghan soldier. He had still retained the musket,
+which he had in his hand when Yossouf had leaped upon him; and as
+he now went on with his guide he had no fear, whatever, of being
+detected. He still carried the bundle of rugs on his shoulder.
+
+As they walked round towards the lower gate of the Bala-Hissar,
+they met numbers of villagers and townspeople thronging in. These
+had waited to hear the issue of the attack before leaving their
+homes but, now that the arrival of the plunderers from the
+residency, and the cessation of the fire, told of the successful
+termination of the assault, they flocked up to join in the
+rejoicings over the annihilation of the Kaffirs.
+
+
+
+Chapter 14: The Advance Upon Cabul.
+
+
+Throughout the long hours of the night of the 2nd of September,
+while the roll of musketry and the roar of cannon had gone on,
+without a moment's pause, just outside the walls of his palace,
+Yakoob Khan had made no movement, whatever, to protect his guests
+or fulfil his own solemn promises. Silent and sullen, he had sat in
+his council chamber.
+
+The disgrace of a broken promise is not one which weighs heavily
+upon an Afghan's mind, and it is not probable that the thought of
+his tarnished honor troubled him, in the slightest degree; but he
+knew that the massacre which was being perpetrated at his door
+would be avenged, and that the English troops, which had so easily
+beaten the army which his father had spent so many years in
+preparing, would be set in movement against Cabul the moment the
+news reached India. He cannot but have dreaded the consequences.
+But he apparently feared, even more, to incur the hostility of the
+Heratee regiment, by interfering to save their victims.
+
+Again and again during the night, his wisest councilors besought
+him to call upon the loyal Cabullee regiments to act against the
+Heratees, but in vain. It is doubtful whether Yakoob was previously
+informed of the intended massacre, but there is strong reason to
+believe that he was so. The proofs, however, were not clear and
+definite. His conduct cost him his throne, and condemned him to
+remain to the end of his life a dishonored pensioner, and
+semi-prisoner, in India.
+
+Many eager questions were asked of Will and his companion, as they
+made their way down to the gate of the Bala-Hissar. Yossouf took
+upon himself to answer them, and they passed through the gate
+without the slightest suspicion.
+
+"Which way now?"
+
+"I think it will be safest to go into the city. We might lie hid
+for a few days in some deserted hut but, sooner or later, our
+presence there would excite comment. It will be best, I think, to
+go into the city. In the quarters of the Parsee merchants there are
+assuredly some who would give you shelter. Domajee--who was the
+contractor for the supply of the mission--would, I should think, be
+best to go to. There is little danger, for none will suspect your
+presence there. His servants are all Hindoos."
+
+"That is the best place, Yossouf. I have been down several times to
+Domajee, and he is certainly devoted to the English. We can but try
+him."
+
+The first dawn of morning was breaking, when Will and his faithful
+friend arrived at the door of the Parsee trader, in the Hindoo
+quarter of Cabul. The doors were fastened and barred, for it was
+impossible to say whether the attack upon the mission--which had
+been heard going on, all night--might not be followed by a fanatic
+outbreak against the Hindoo and Parsee traders, in the Hindoo
+quarter. Therefore, there was little sleep that night.
+
+Yossouf knocked gently at the door.
+
+"Who is there?" a voice at once inquired, from within.
+
+"I come on urgent business with Domajee," Yossouf replied. "Open
+quickly, there are but two of us here."
+
+There was a slight pause, and then the door was opened; and closed,
+immediately the two visitors had entered. A light was burning in
+the large anteroom, as they entered it; and several Hindoos--who
+had been lying, wrapped up in cloths, on the floor--rose to their
+feet to inspect the newcomers. A moment later the trader, himself,
+came down the stairs from an apartment above.
+
+"What is it?" he asked.
+
+He did not pause for an answer. The light from the lamp he carried
+fell upon Will's face, now white as a sheet from loss of blood.
+With the one word, "Follow," the Parsee turned on his heel, and led
+the way upstairs.
+
+"Has the mission been captured?" he asked, as they entered an empty
+room.
+
+"Yes," Will replied, "and I believe that I am the only survivor."
+
+The fatigue of climbing the stairs completed the work caused by
+prolonged excitement and loss of blood and, as he spoke, he
+tottered; and would have fallen had not Yossouf seized him and,
+with the assistance of the Parsee, laid him on a couch. In a few
+words, Yossouf informed the trader of what had happened; and
+satisfied him that no suspicion could arise, of the presence of one
+of the British in his house. As the residency had been burnt down,
+and the bodies of those who had fallen within it consumed, no one
+would suspect that one of the five Englishmen there had effected
+his escape; and it would be supposed that Will's body, like that of
+Doctor Kelly, had been consumed in the flames.
+
+The Parsee was sure that Cabul would soon be reoccupied by the
+British and--putting aside his loyalty to them--he felt that his
+concealment of an English survivor of the massacre would be greatly
+to his advantage, and would secure for him the custom of the
+English, upon their arrival at the town.
+
+He first descended the stairs; and warned his Hindoo followers, on
+no account, whatever, to breathe a word of the entry of strangers
+there. Then he again returned to the room, where Yossouf was
+sprinkling water on Will's face, and was endeavoring to recover him
+to consciousness.
+
+"There is blood on the couch," the trader said. "He is wounded, and
+is suffering from its loss. See! The sleeve of his coat is soaked
+with blood, but I see no mark on the cloth."
+
+"No," Yossouf replied; "he has put on that uniform since the
+fight."
+
+"Go downstairs," the trader said; "my wife and daughter will see to
+him."
+
+As soon as Yossouf left the room, Domajee's wife and daughter
+entered, with many exclamations of surprise and alarm. They were at
+once silenced by the trader, who bid them cut off the wounded man's
+uniform, and stanch his wounds.
+
+Will had been hit in two places. One ball had passed through the
+left arm, fortunately without injuring the bone. The other had
+struck him in the side, had run round his ribs and gone out behind,
+inflicting an ugly-looking but not serious wound--its course being
+marked by a blue line on the flesh, behind the two holes of entry
+and exit.
+
+The wounds were washed and bound up, some cordial was poured
+between his lips and, ere long, he opened his eyes and looked
+round, in bewilderment.
+
+"You are safe, and among friends," the Parsee said. "Drink a little
+more of the cordial, and then go off quietly to sleep. You need
+have no fear of being discovered, and your friends will be here,
+ere long."
+
+Four of the Hindoo servants now, at the order of the trader, came
+upstairs and, lifting the couch, carried Will to a cool and airy
+chamber, in the upper story of the house. Here a soft bed of rugs
+and mattresses was prepared, and Will was soon in a quiet sleep,
+with Yossouf watching by his side.
+
+It was but twenty-four hours after the massacre that a well-mounted
+native, from Cabul, brought the news over the Shatur-Gardan Pass
+into the Khurum valley. Thence it was telegraphed to Simla and, in
+a few hours, all India rang with it. Not an instant was lost in
+making preparations for avenging the murder of the British mission.
+On the same day, orders were sent to Brigadier General Massy--at
+that time commanding the field force in the Khurum valley--to move
+the 23rd Punjaub Pioneers, the 5th Ghoorkas, and a mountain battery
+to the crest of the Shatur-Gardan Pass, and to entrench themselves
+there.
+
+A day or two later, the 72nd Highlanders and the 5th Punjaub
+Infantry ascended the Peiwar-Khotal, to Ali-Kheyl, to secure the
+road between the Khotal and the pass. The 72nd then moved forward,
+and joined the 23rd Pioneers and 5th Ghoorkas on the Shatur-Gardan;
+and on the 13th General Baker arrived there, and took the command,
+but some time was needed before the advance could commence.
+
+As is usual with the British, the great transport train--which had,
+with such pains, been collected and organized for the war--had been
+dispersed, immediately peace was signed; and the whole work had now
+to be recommenced. Vast numbers of animals had been used up, during
+the campaign; and there was the greatest difficulty in obtaining
+the minimum number which was required before the troops could move.
+At last, General Roberts managed to collect, in the Punjaub, 2000
+mules and 700 camels and bullocks. The tribes in the Khurum valley,
+too--who had been kindly treated, and were well satisfied with the
+change of masters--furnished many animals for the transport of
+stores, as far as the Shatur-Gardan.
+
+The news had thrown the Gilgis, and other tribes among the
+mountains beyond the Peiwar-Khotal, into a state of ferment; and
+several determined attacks were made, by them, upon convoys on
+their way up to the head of the pass. These, however, were always
+successfully repulsed by the baggage guards, with considerable loss
+to the assailants and, on the 26th September--three weeks from the
+date of the massacre--General Roberts joined the troops at
+Ali-Kheyl, and moved forward to the Shatur-Gardan.
+
+During this time two or three letters had been received from the
+Ameer, who wrote to General Roberts deprecating any advance of the
+British troops, and saying that he was trying to restore order, to
+put down the mutinous Heratee troops, and to punish them for their
+conduct. As, however, the details which had been received of the
+massacre showed that the Ameer had behaved in a most suspicious--if
+not in a most treacherous--manner, at the time of the massacre; and
+that if he possessed any authority, whatever, over the troops, he
+had not attempted to exercise it, no attention was paid to his
+letters.
+
+The advanced party of the invading force moved down from the
+Shatur-Gardan Pass. It consisted of the 12th and 14th Bengal
+Cavalry, two guns of the Royal Horse Artillery, two companies of
+the 72nd Highlanders, and the 5th Punjaub Native Infantry. The road
+was found to be extremely steep and difficult, and much labor was
+necessary before it could be made practicable for guns and wheeled
+carriages. No enemy was encountered, and the little force encamped
+at night in the Logan valley; over which the cavalry skirmished,
+far ahead, but found no foes awaiting them.
+
+On the following day they made another march forward, the brigades
+of Generals Baker and Macpherson from the pass into the valley. The
+advance force halted at Zerghun-Shah and, soon after they had done
+so, some of the cavalry rode in, with the surprising news that the
+Ameer was close at hand.
+
+Half an hour later Yakoob Khan, attended by some of his principal
+nobles, rode into camp. He was received with the honor due to his
+rank but, personally, General Roberts greeted him with great
+coldness. The Ameer stated that he came into camp because he could
+not control the soldiery of Cabul; and that, therefore, he had left
+the place and come in, to show his friendship for the English.
+Whatever may have been the motives for his coming, they were never
+fully explained. Circumstances which afterwards occurred strongly
+confirmed the suspicion that he meditated treachery.
+
+He was treated honorably; but the guard of honor which was assigned
+to him was, in fact, a guard over him and, from that time, he was
+virtually a prisoner. General Roberts declined, altogether, to
+discuss with him the events of the massacre of Cabul; saying that
+this was a matter which could not now be entered into, but would be
+fully investigated on the arrival at the Afghan capital.
+
+The following day, the brigades of Generals Baker and Macpherson
+joined the advance at Zerghun-Shah. The amount of transport
+available was only sufficient for half the baggage of the army; and
+it was necessary, therefore, to move forward in two divisions--the
+one advancing a day's march, and then halting; while the animals
+went back to bring up the baggage of the second division, on the
+following day.
+
+A proclamation was now issued by the general, and sent forward
+among the people of the valley; saying that the object of the
+expedition was only to punish those concerned in the massacre at
+Cabul, and that all loyal subjects of the Ameer would be well
+treated.
+
+On the 3rd of October Macpherson's brigade, with the cavalry,
+reached Suffed-Sang. Here they halted, while the baggage animals
+went back to bring up General Baker's brigade. The attitude of the
+people of the valley had now become very threatening. Great numbers
+of hill tribesmen had come down; and on this day an attack was made
+upon the rear guard, but was beaten off with loss.
+
+That the natives were bitterly hostile was undoubted; but they
+were, for the most part, waiting to see the result of the
+approaching fight. The Heratee and Cabul regiments were confident
+that they would defeat the approaching column. They had a great
+advantage in numbers, had been drilled in European fashion, were
+armed with Enfields, and had an enormous park of artillery at their
+disposal. They were able to choose their own fighting ground, and
+had selected a spot which gave them an immense advantage. They
+were, therefore, confident of victory.
+
+Had the British troops been beaten, the inhabitants of the Logan
+valley were prepared to rise, to a man. The Ghilzais and other hill
+tribes would have swept down upon the line of retreat; and few, if
+any, of the British force would have returned to tell the tale.
+
+The next day Baker's division had the post of honor, and made a
+short march to Chaurasia. Beyond this village, the enemy had taken
+up their position. Three miles beyond the village the valley
+ends--a mass of hills shutting it in, with only a narrow defile
+leading, through them, to the plain of Cabul beyond. Upon both
+sides of the defile the enemy had placed guns in position, and
+lined the whole circle of the hills commanding the approach to it.
+
+Mountaineers from their birth, they believed that--although the
+British infantry might possess a superiority in the plain--they
+could be no match for them on the steep hillside; and they no doubt
+thought that no attempt would be made to storm so strong a
+position, but that the British column would march straight up the
+valley into the defile, where they would be helplessly slaughtered
+by the guns and matchlock men on the heights.
+
+Judging from their own tactics, they had reason for the belief that
+their position was an impregnable one. In their hill fights the
+Afghans never come to close quarters. Posted behind rocks and huge
+boulders, the opposing sides keep up a distant musketry
+duel--lasting, sometimes, for days--until one side or the other
+becomes disheartened with its losses, or has exhausted its
+ammunition. Then it falls back, and the other claims the victory.
+The idea that English soldiers would, under a heavy fire from their
+concealed force, steadily climb up the broken mountainside, and
+come to close quarters, probably never entered into their
+calculations.
+
+At daybreak on the 6th, a working party were sent forward to
+improve the road towards the defile. But they had scarcely started
+when the cavalry patrol in advance rode in, and announced that the
+enemy were in great strength on the hills, and had guns in position
+to command the road.
+
+General Roberts had now a choice of two courses--he could either
+attack the whole Afghan force, with the one division at hand; or he
+could wait until joined by Macpherson's brigade, next morning. The
+feat of carrying such a position in face of an immensely superior
+force, with only half of his little command, was a very serious one
+but, upon the other hand, every hour added to the number of hillmen
+who swarmed upon the flanks of the army, just beyond musket range.
+A delay of twenty-four hours would bring the whole fighting force
+of the tribesmen into the valley and, while attacking the enemy's
+position in the front, he would be liable to an assault upon his
+rear, by them.
+
+Confident in the valor of his soldiers, he chose the first
+alternative and, at eleven o'clock, his little force marched out
+from the camp to attack the Afghan army. By this time the enemy's
+position had been reconnoitered, and it was found to be too strong
+for a direct attack. It was therefore resolved to ascend the hills
+on both flanks, and so to drive their defenders back beyond the
+defile. This, in any case, would have been the best mode of
+assault; but against semi-savage enemies, flank attacks are
+peculiarly effective. Having prepared for an assault in one
+direction, they are disconcerted and disheartened by finding
+themselves attacked in a different manner; and the fear of a flank
+being turned, and the line of retreat thereby menaced, will
+generally suffice to cause a rapid retreat.
+
+General Baker, himself, took the command of the left attack. His
+force consisted of four guns of Number 2 Mountain Battery, two
+Gatling guns, the 7th company of Sappers and Miners, a wing of the
+72nd Highlanders, six companies of the 5th Ghoorkas, 200 men of the
+5th Punjaub Infantry, and 450 of the 23rd Pioneers. This was the
+main column of attack.
+
+The right column--under the command of Major White, of the 72nd
+Highlanders--consisted of a wing of that regiment, 100 men of the
+23rd Pioneers, three guns of the Royal Artillery, and two squadrons
+of cavalry. This attack was intended only as a feint, and to
+distract the attention of the Afghans from the main attack. A
+strong reserve was left in Chaurasia, to guard the baggage and to
+overawe the tribesmen.
+
+As General Baker's column reached the foot of the hills, the 23rd--who
+led the advance, thrown out in skirmishing line--began to climb the
+ascent. The enemy were armed with Sniders and Enfields, and their fire
+was rapid and continuous; fortunately it was by no means accurate, and
+our losses were small. The Afghans, in their hill fighting, are accustomed
+to fire very slowly and deliberately--taking steady aim, with their guns
+resting on the rocks--and, so fighting, they are excellent shots. It is
+probable, however, that the steady advance of our men towards them flurried
+and disconcerted them; and that they thought more of firing quickly, than
+of taking a correct aim.
+
+The 72nd, pressing up the hill, were assisted by the fire of the
+mountain guns and Gatlings, and by that of the Punjaubees in their
+rear. Gradually the upper slopes of the hills were gained; and the
+British troops, pressing forward, drove the Afghans back along the
+crest. Several times they made obstinate stands, holding their
+ground until the 72nd were close to them.
+
+These, however, would not be denied. The massacre of the mission at
+Cabul had infuriated the soldiers, and each man was animated with a
+stern determination to avenge our murdered countrymen. For an hour
+and a half the fight continued; and then the Afghans abandoned the
+ridge, and fled in confusion. They rallied upon some low hills, 600
+yards from the rear; but the mountain guns and Gatlings opened upon
+them and, the whole line advancing to the attack, the enemy fell
+back.
+
+Major White's column had been doing excellent service, on the
+right. Although the attack had been intended only as a feint, it
+was pushed forward so vigorously that it met with a success equal
+to that which had attended the main column, on the left. The enemy
+were driven off the hills on the right of the defile. Twenty guns
+were captured, and the direct road cleared of the enemy.
+
+Unfortunately, our cavalry was in the rear. The road through the
+pass was difficult and, before they could get through into the
+plain on the other side, the masses of Afghans had fallen back into
+the strong villages scattered over it; and could not be attacked by
+cavalry, alone. The enemy had from 9000 to 10,000 men upon the
+ridge, including thirteen regiments of regular troops. They left
+300 dead upon the field and, besides these, carried off large
+numbers of killed and wounded, during the night. Upon our side only
+20 were killed, and 67 wounded.
+
+Had General Roberts had his whole force with him, he could--after
+capturing the hills--have at once pushed forward, and have attacked
+the enemy on the plain; and the Afghans, disheartened and panic
+stricken, would have been completely crushed. With so small a force
+in hand, and the possibility of a serious attack by the tribes on
+his rear, General Roberts did not think it prudent to advance
+farther; and the regiments which had taken the principal part in
+the massacre of Cabul marched away, unmolested.
+
+Enormously superior as they still were in numbers, they had no
+thought of further resistance. The capture of positions which they
+deemed impregnable, by a force so inferior in number to their own,
+had utterly disheartened them; and the Heratee regiments which, but
+the day before, had been so proudly confident of their ability to
+exterminate the Kaffirs, were now utterly demoralized and panic
+stricken. In the night the whole of the Afghan troops scattered,
+and fled. Our cavalry--under General Massy--swept along the plain
+of Cabul and, skirting the town, kept on as far as the Ameer's
+great entrenched camp at Sherpur, three miles further along the
+valley. Here 75 guns were captured.
+
+In the morning, Macpherson arrived. General Roberts now advanced
+with his whole force of infantry, and found that he had no longer a
+foe before him. The Afghan army had disappeared.
+
+There was no longer any occasion for haste, and the column halted
+until all the baggage had been brought up through the difficult
+defile. The total defeat of the Afghan army had overawed the
+tribesmen, and these at once retired to their hills again. The
+villagers, however, were bitterly hostile; and seized every
+opportunity of firing at small bodies of troops, on cavalry
+patrols. This continued for some time; and General Roberts, at
+last, was obliged to punish it with severity and, in such cases,
+all found with arms in their hands were at once shot.
+
+On the 11th of October Sir Frederick Roberts and his staff, with a
+cavalry escort, rode into the Bala-Hissar and, the next morning,
+the British troops marched into the fort. The gates of Cabul stood
+open, and a column was marched through the town, and formal
+possession taken of it.
+
+During the first five weeks which elapsed, after the massacre of
+the mission, William Gale remained almost prostrate in the house of
+the friendly Parsee trader. He had barely recovered his strength,
+after his prolonged illness, when the attack was made; and the
+events of that night, and the great loss of blood which he had
+suffered, had reduced his strength to that of an infant. Under the
+care of the Parsee and his family, however, he slowly but steadily
+regained strength.
+
+For the first month, but little news reached him from without. Then
+a report came that the British had assembled, in considerable
+force, on the crest of the Shatur-Gardan; and were going to move on
+Cabul from that direction. Then, day by day, the tidings came in of
+the advance of the force. It was reported, generally, that the
+Ameer had gone out to meet them; with the intention of leaving
+them, when the decisive moment, arrived and taking command of the
+tribesmen, who would fall upon and annihilate them.
+
+On the 6th the town was unusually quiet, and Will heard that the
+Afghan army had moved out, to occupy the hills commanding the
+approach through the defile; and that, with the aid of the
+tribesmen, the British army was to be exterminated there.
+
+
+
+Chapter 15: The Fighting Round Cabul.
+
+
+All day long, on the 6th of October, William Gale sat at an open
+window in the upper story of the Parsee's house--facing west--and
+listened to the distant roar of the battle; while all Cabul was in
+a state of wild excitement, in the sure anticipation of victory.
+Will felt equally confident as to the result of the battle. He knew
+that--well led--a British force could be trusted to carry any
+position held by the Afghans; and he felt sure that, even should he
+fail to carry it by direct attack, the English general would,
+sooner or later, succeed in turning it by flank movements.
+
+About two o'clock in the afternoon, William noticed a change in the
+character of the sounds in the town. In the Hindoo quarter all had
+been quiet--for the inhabitants greatly feared that, in a burst of
+fanaticism following a victory achieved over the British, the
+Afghans might sack the Hindoo quarter, and murder its inhabitants.
+Yossouf, however, had been all the morning out in the town; and
+had, from time to time, brought in a report of the rumors current
+there.
+
+At first it was said that the British were being utterly routed,
+that they were being exterminated by the Afghan fire, that the hill
+tribes were sweeping down upon their rear, and that not a man would
+escape. Presently the reports became more contradictory. The firing
+was still heard, but it was no longer one continuous roll. Some
+said that the British were annihilated; others that, repulsed in
+their attack, they had fallen back to their camp but, soon after
+two o'clock, Yossouf rushed up to William's room with the news that
+the Afghans had been driven from the heights, and that the British
+were in possession of these, and of the defile through them.
+
+Yossouf had, throughout the morning, been swayed by conflicting
+emotions and wishes. At one moment he hoped that his countrymen
+might conquer; then the fear that, after victory, the Hindoo
+quarter might be sacked, and his English friend discovered and
+killed, overpowered his feeling of patriotism.
+
+It must be remembered that Afghanistan has, for centuries, been
+rather a geographical expression than a country. Its population is
+composed of a great number of tribes, without any common feelings
+or interest, and often engaged in desperate wars and conflicts with
+each other. The two leading tribes--the Ghilzais and Duranees--had
+long struggled for ascendency in the cultivated portion of the
+country. For a long period the Ghilzais had had the supremacy, but
+the Duranees were now lords of the country.
+
+The mountain tribes, for the most part, held themselves entirely
+independent; and although, in time, they gave a nominal allegiance
+to the Ameer of Cabul, yet--as had been shown in the Khurum
+valley--they hated their native masters, with an animosity far
+exceeding that which they felt towards the British. That throughout
+the war the tribesmen were ready, when they saw an opportunity to
+attack English convoys and small columns, is true; but they were
+animated by a love of plunder, rather than of country and, over a
+considerable area of Afghanistan--notably at Candahar--the people,
+in general, would have infinitely preferred the mild and just rule
+of the English, to the military tyranny of Cabul.
+
+Thus, Yossouf had grown up without understanding the meaning of the
+feeling which we call patriotism. He had, it is true, been taught
+to hate the unbelievers; but this feeling had disappeared, on his
+acquaintance with Will Gale, and he now ranked the safety and
+happiness of his friend far before any national consideration. How
+weak is the feeling of patriotism, among the Afghans, is shown by
+the fact that most of the British frontier troops consist of Afghan
+hillmen; who are always ready, when called upon, to fight
+desperately against their countrymen and co-religionists. Examples
+of treachery, such as that exhibited by the two Pathans who fired
+their guns, to warn their countrymen of the British advance up the
+Spingawi Pass, are almost unknown.
+
+It was, then, with a feeling of joy that Yossouf related, to his
+English friends, the news of the defeat of the Afghan army.
+Throughout the Hindoo quarter there was deep, but suppressed,
+gladness at the news of the British victory; and this increased
+when, as the night went on, it was known that the Afghan army was
+totally dispersed, that the troops remaining in Cabul had fled, and
+that the city was virtually open for the entrance of the English.
+
+When, on the 12th--with bands playing, and colors displayed--the
+British troops marched through Cabul, Will would fain have gone out
+and joined his countrymen. But the Parsee pointed out, to him, that
+this would draw the attention of the Afghans to the fact that he
+had been concealed by him; and that in case, at any time, the
+British should evacuate Cabul and return to India, he would be a
+marked man for the vengeance of the Afghans. Will therefore wrapped
+up in a long cloak and, accompanied by Yossouf and the Parsee, left
+the house after dark and, proceeding to the gate, walked out to the
+Bala-Hissar.
+
+Explaining who he was, Will was soon passed through the sentries
+which had been set, at nightfall; and was conducted to the quarters
+of the general. The latter was greatly surprised when he was told
+that an English soldier, who had been present at the attack upon
+the mission, wished to speak to him; and at once ordered Will to be
+brought before him. Great was his surprise when he learned, from
+the young soldier, that he had fought under him at the taking of
+Peiwar-Khotal and, having been made prisoner near Ali-Kheyl, had
+been brought to Cabul; and had joined the party of Sir Lewis
+Cavagnari, on its arrival at that city. Still more that, having
+been in the residency when the attack upon it was commenced by the
+Heratee soldiery, he had managed to escape from the massacre of
+that night.
+
+After having first heard a complete outline of Will's story, the
+general called in several of his staff--who had just finished
+dinner--and then requested Will to give a full and detailed
+description of his adventures. After he had concluded, Yossouf and
+the Parsee were called in, and the general warmly expressed his
+gratification at the kindness that they had shown to a wounded
+English soldier, at the risk of their lives. He ordered that a
+handsome present should be made to Yossouf, and told the Parsee to
+call again in the morning, when the quartermaster general would be
+told to arrange, with him, for the supply of such articles as the
+country afforded for the use of the troops.
+
+"Your regiment," he said to Will, "is, at present, at Jellalabad.
+Whether it will come up here I do not yet know but, in the
+meantime, you will be promoted to the rank of sergeant--which is
+the least we can do, after what you have gone through--and you will
+take your place with my staff orderly sergeants."
+
+He then sent for one of the sergeants and gave Will into his
+charge, telling him he would speak further with him, when he had
+arranged the pressing business which the occupation of Cabul
+entailed upon him.
+
+Yossouf remained with Will, being--at his urgent request--placed
+upon the roll as a native follower, of whom a considerable number
+accompany each regiment in India. His duties were but nominal for,
+when Will's story was well known, Yossouf became a most popular
+character among the sergeants of the staff. The money which he had
+received--in the first place from the Ameer, and now from General
+Roberts--would secure his future. In Afghanistan animals are cheap;
+and the owner of a small herd of oxen, sheep, or even goats is
+regarded by his neighbors as a wealthy man. Therefore Yossouf
+would, on the departure of the British, be able to settle down in a
+position of comparative affluence.
+
+Two days later General Roberts, being one evening disengaged, sent
+for William Gale. He had been much struck with the bearing and
+manner of the young soldier, and now requested him to give him a
+full history of his antecedents.
+
+"You have had a curious and eventful history," he said, when the
+young sergeant had finished, "and appear to have conducted yourself
+with great discretion, readiness, and courage. From what you tell
+me of your conversation with Colonel Shepherd, I have no doubt that
+he formed the same impression that I do, from your manner and
+appearance--that you are of a respectable, if not of good
+family--and I trust that you will some day discover a clue to your
+parents. It seems to me that, had the authorities of the place
+where you were left properly bestirred themselves, they ought to
+have been able to find out who you are.
+
+"However, that is not to the point, now. It is sufficient for me
+that, from your manner and address, you would not be out of place
+in any position. I shall, of course, report the fact of your having
+fought by Major Cavagnari's side, in the attack upon him here; and
+shall strongly recommend that a commission be granted you. I am
+sure that, from your conduct hitherto, you will never do discredit
+to any position in which you may find yourself.
+
+"Say nothing to your fellow sergeants of what I have told you. It
+is possible--although not probable--that my recommendation may not
+be acted upon and, at any rate, some months must elapse before an
+answer can be received."
+
+William Gale returned to his quarters in a state of extreme
+delight. The communication which General Roberts had made to him
+was altogether beyond his hopes. He had, indeed, from the very day
+that he enlisted, often hoped that, some time or other, he might
+win for himself a commission; and take his place in the rank to
+which he had, from his childhood, believed that he was, by birth,
+entitled. The words and manner of his colonel had encouraged this
+hope, but he had never dreamed that his promotion might be attained
+so soon. It was but a year since he had enlisted, and five was the
+very earliest at which he had even dreamed that a commission might
+possibly be gained.
+
+The next day he had been sent from the orderly room with a note to
+the colonel of the 67th, which was the regiment now in quarters in
+the Bala-Hissar; the rest of the force being encamped in the plain,
+below. As he was walking across the open, he was suddenly hurled to
+the ground with tremendous violence and, at the same moment, a roar
+as loud as that of thunder sounded in his ears. Bewildered and half
+stunned, he rose to his feet; while showers of stones, beams, and
+other debris fell around him.
+
+Illustration: One of the Gunpowder Magazines had Exploded.
+
+One of the gunpowder magazines had exploded. It had been known that
+very large quantities of powder were stored in various buildings at
+the Bala-Hissar and, at the moment of the explosion, a body of
+engineers, under Captain Shafto, were examining the buildings in
+which it was stored, and making preparation for the removal of the
+powder. Singularly enough, no soldiers of the 67th were killed but,
+of the Ghoorkas, who were on guard at the arsenal at the time,
+twelve were killed and seven wounded. Shafto was, unfortunately,
+killed.
+
+The 67th were at once called out, and set to work to extinguish the
+flames which had been kindled by the explosion--great damage being
+done. The southern wall of the arsenal had been blown down, and
+several buildings set on fire. Explosion followed explosion, and
+the work of extinguishing the flames was an extremely dangerous
+one.
+
+In the afternoon another magazine blew up. Fortunately, no troops
+were in its neighborhood at the time; but four Afghans were killed,
+and several soldiers hurt, at a distance of three or four hundred
+yards from the spot. Although it was never proved, it was strongly
+believed that these explosions were caused by the Afghans and--as
+large quantities of powder still remained in the Bala-Hissar--it
+was determined that, for the present, the place should be
+evacuated. The general therefore, with his staff and the regiment
+in garrison, left the place and joined the camp in the plain.
+
+The little force at Cabul was now isolated. Troops were slowly
+coming up the Khyber Pass to Jellalabad; where a division was to be
+formed, destined in the spring to join the force at Cabul, should
+it be necessary to carry on further operations.
+
+Between Cabul and the Shatur-Gardan the natives were in a restless
+and excited state. Two attacks, by 3000 men, had been made on the
+garrison holding the crest of the latter position--three hundred in
+number. These bravely sallied out, attacked the enemy in the open,
+and killed large numbers of them. Still, great numbers of the
+tribesmen were gathered round; and General Gough, with the 5th
+Punjaubee Cavalry, the 5th Punjaubee Infantry, and four guns, was
+therefore sent from Cabul to bring down, from the Shatur-Gardan,
+the garrison and all the stores accumulated there. The pass, which
+would shortly be closed by snow, was then to be deserted.
+
+Several executions now took place, at Cabul, of men who were proved
+to have shared in the attack on the embassy. Some of the leading
+men of the place, who had instigated the troops to the attack, were
+among those executed. Many of the villagers were also hung, for
+shooting at detached bodies of our troops. A proclamation had been
+issued by the general, on his first arrival, warning the people
+that any attempt against our authority would be severely punished;
+forbidding the carrying of weapons within the streets of Cabul, or
+within a distance of five miles of the city gates; and offering a
+reward for all arms belonging to the Afghan troops which should be
+given up, and for the surrender of any person, whether soldier or
+civilian, concerned in the attack on the embassy.
+
+The position of the British force, at Cabul, was that of a body
+holding only the ground they occupied, in the midst of a bitterly
+hostile country. The Ameer was powerless and, indeed, his goodwill
+was more than doubtful. He had, from his arrival in the camp, been
+regarded as a prisoner--although treated with courtesy--and after
+the battle of Chaurasia--feeling his own impotence, and being
+viewed with hostility by both parties--he resigned his position as
+Ameer, and asked to be sent to India, which was done. The
+abdication of the Ameer really took place on the day the troops
+entered Cabul, but it was not publicly known until the end of the
+month; as nothing could be done, on the subject, until his desire
+was communicated to the Indian authorities, and their views
+concerning it ascertained.
+
+From the moment of his arrival at Cabul, General Roberts had set to
+work to prepare for the winter. He would, for four or five months,
+be entirely cut off; and would have to rely upon himself, alone. He
+had before him the terrible catastrophe which had, on the same
+ground, befallen General Elphinstone's army; and knew that it was
+possible--and indeed probable--that, with the memory of that
+success before them, the Afghans would unite in another great
+effort to annihilate the little force shut up in the heart of their
+country.
+
+Fortunately he had, in the Ameer's barracks at Sherpur, a position
+which he was confident he could hold against any attacks that could
+be made upon him. These extensive barracks had been erected by
+Sheer-Ali for the use of his cavalry, but had never been used. They
+consisted of a large square, three sides of which were surrounded
+by a lofty wall--an isolated and rocky, steep hill rising at the
+back, and closing the fourth side. The buildings were amply large
+enough to contain the whole of General Roberts' force; and there
+was abundant room for the stores, baggage animals, and wagons.
+
+The only fault was, indeed, that the extent of wall to be defended
+was too long for the force at his disposal. Round two sides the
+outer wall was complete but, on the third, it had not been taken to
+its full height, nor had it been continued so as to join the hill
+behind it.
+
+Great efforts were made to bring in sufficient provisions and
+forage for the winter; and expeditions were made up the Logan,
+Maidan, and other valleys for the purpose. Winter was fast setting
+in. Snow had begun to fall upon the hills, and ice formed on the
+pools, every night. The natives of the valleys near were ready
+enough to sell their grain, straw, and fuel; but few supplies came
+in from a distance, as armed bands stopped all supplies on their
+way. However, a sufficient amount of food and fuel was obtained,
+and stored in Sherpur. Grain, too, was procured for the winter; and
+the only article of which the supply was insufficient was chopped
+straw, of which a very large quantity was required.
+
+The attitude of the natives grew daily more hostile. Their priests
+were preaching a revolt to the death, and recalling to the people
+how their fathers had annihilated a British force, thirty years
+before. Urged alike by fanaticism and a desire for plunder, the
+natives over the whole country were seething with excitement; and
+General Roberts saw that a crisis was approaching. The Afghans
+could assemble at least 100,000 men; and among these would be
+included all the troops of the Ameer's disbanded armies, armed with
+weapons equal to our own, and burning to revenge the defeats which
+had been inflicted upon them. To oppose them the English general
+had less than 6000 men.
+
+But though prepared for trouble, the storm, when it came, burst
+suddenly upon the English. The enemy were known to be collecting in
+great numbers, in the Maidan valley, and two columns were sent out
+to attack them. One was commanded by Macpherson, the other by
+Baker. Although they were to strike simultaneously at the enemy,
+their route of march lay up different valleys--with a lofty
+mountain range between them--so they could in no way cooperate with
+each other. After they had started, General Massy was directed to
+move out, with a small force of cavalry and a battery of horse
+artillery, and cooperate with General Macpherson.
+
+An hour after the cavalry had started General Roberts, himself,
+rode out. He was accompanied by his usual escort, and by two
+mounted orderly sergeants. One of these was William Gale. They had
+only proceeded a short distance when they heard, some distance
+ahead of them, the guns of the Royal Horse Artillery--with
+Massy--at work; and the general at once rode forward, at a gallop.
+
+General Macpherson had found Mahomed Jan--one of the principal
+leaders of the Afghans--with 10,000 men, near Chardeh. A fight
+ensued. The guns shelled the enemy, but the water courses prevented
+the cavalry with Macpherson acting; and Mahomed Jan, moving across
+the hills, placed himself between Macpherson and Cabul. Shortly
+afterwards General Massy--who had with him three troops of the 9th
+Lancers, and forty-four men of the 14th Bengal Lancers, with four
+guns under Major Smith-Wyndham--came in sight of a portion of
+Mahomed Jan's force. It was clear that these had, in some way,
+interposed themselves between the little force and Macpherson's
+column; and Massy supposed that they were a party of fugitives,
+flying before the force of Macpherson or Baker.
+
+As they came streaming down the hill, he got his guns into action.
+After a few shells had been fired, the enemy advanced in full
+force. Four thousand men were extended in the shape of a crescent,
+advancing in fairly good order; while behind was an irregular mob,
+of some six thousand men.
+
+The ground upon which General Massy found himself, at this time,
+was singularly unfitted for the action of artillery. It was cut up
+by deep water courses, and anything like rapidity of movement was
+impossible. It would have been prudent had Massy--when he saw how
+large was the force opposed to him--at once retired, until he came
+to ground where his guns could be rapidly maneuvered but, relying
+upon the effect of the shell, he remained in the position in which
+he had first discovered the enemy. The shell pitched rapidly into
+the thick of the Afghans, but no effect was produced in checking
+their advance. They did not waver for a moment, but came steadily
+on. The enemy's bullets were now dropping fast among the cavalry
+and guns. Thirty of the 9th Lancers were dismounted, and opened
+fire with their Martini carbines; but the enemy were too numerous
+to be checked by so small a body of men.
+
+At this moment, Sir Frederick Roberts arrived upon the spot. The
+position was serious and, to retire the guns in safety, it was
+absolutely necessary to check the advance of the enemy. General
+Roberts therefore ordered Massy to send his cavalry at the enemy.
+Colonel Cleland led a squadron of the 9th full at the advancing
+mass, the Bengal Lancers following; while Captain Gough, with his
+troop of the 9th, charged the enemy's left flank--but even the
+charge of Balaclava was scarcely more desperate than this. Two
+hundred and twenty men, however gallant, could not be expected to
+conquer 10,000.
+
+The three bodies of cavalry charged, at full speed, into the midst
+of the enemy's infantry; who received them with a terrible fire,
+which killed many horses and men. The impetus of the charge bore
+down the leading ranks of the Afghans, and the cavalry tore their
+way through the mass, until their progress was blocked by sheer
+weight of numbers. A desperate melee took place--the troopers
+fighting with their sabers, the Afghans with knives, and clubbed
+muskets. Many of the soldiers were struck from their horses. Some
+were dragged to their feet again, by their comrades; others were
+killed upon the ground.
+
+The chaplain of the force--the Reverend Mr. Adams--had accompanied
+the troopers in the charge and, seeing a man jammed under a fallen
+horse, he leaped from his saddle and extricated him; and brought
+him off, in spite of the attack of several Afghans. For this act of
+bravery he received the Victoria Cross, being the first chaplain in
+the army who had ever obtained that decoration.
+
+When the dust raised by the charging squadrons had subsided, it was
+seen that the enemy were still advancing. The Lancers had fallen
+back and, as the men galloped in, they rallied behind Captain
+Gough's troop; which had kept best together, and had formed up
+again between the guns and the enemy. Lieutenants Hersee and
+Ricardo, and sixteen of their men, had been left dead upon the
+ground. Colonel Cleland, Lieutenant Mackenzie, and seven of the
+troopers were wounded. A second charge was ordered; but this time
+it was not pushed home, as a wide water course checked the advance.
+
+Under cover of the first cavalry charge, Major Smith-Wyndham had
+ordered two of the guns to be taken off and, as he now fell back
+with the other two, one of them stuck in the water course. The
+greatest efforts were made, with the horses which still remained
+uninjured, to get the gun out; but the enemy were pressing close
+on. Lieutenant Hardy was killed, by a shot through the head, and
+the gun was abandoned. The other three guns were retired 400 or 500
+yards farther; but here they became hopelessly bogged in a channel,
+deeper than any that had hitherto been met with. They were spiked,
+and left in the water; and the drivers and gunners moved off with
+the cavalry, just as the enemy poured down upon them.
+
+Seeing the danger of the situation, and the large force of the
+enemy, General Roberts had, on his first arrival, sent off a
+trooper at full gallop to General Gough--who commanded at
+Sherpur--ordering him to send out two hundred men of the 72nd
+Highlanders, at the double, to hold the gorge leading direct from
+the scene of conflict to Cabul. There was but a very small garrison
+of British troops in the city and, had the enemy made their way
+there, the townspeople would have risen, and a serious disaster
+taken place.
+
+After leaving the guns behind them, the cavalry retired steadily
+towards the village at the head of the gorge; keeping up a hot
+fire, with their carbines, on the enemy who pressed upon them.
+
+"Ride back, Sergeant Gale," the general said, "and meet the 72nd.
+Hurry them up at full speed--every minute is precious."
+
+William Gale rode back at full speed. Until a fortnight before, he
+had never been on a horse; but the animal which he rode was well
+trained and steady and, hitherto, he had had no difficulty in
+keeping his seat, as he trotted along with the escort. It was a
+different thing, now; for the ground was rough, and the horse going
+at a full gallop, and he clung on to the pummel of the saddle, to
+steady himself. As he passed through the village, he saw the
+Highlanders coming along at a trot, half a mile further on; and was
+soon beside Colonel Brownlow, who commanded them.
+
+"The enemy are pressing the cavalry back, sir," he said as, with
+difficulty, he pulled up his horse. "The general desires you to use
+the greatest possible speed, as every moment is precious."
+
+Panting and out of breath as the Highlanders were, they responded
+to Colonel Brownlow's shout and, rushing forward almost at racing
+speed, reached the village while the Afghans were still 100 yards
+beyond it. They instantly opened such a fire upon the enemy that
+the latter ceased their advance, and soon fell back; and Cabul was,
+for the moment, safe.
+
+
+
+Chapter 16: The Fight In The Pass.
+
+
+The Afghan force, after half an hour's effort to carry the village
+held by the Highlanders, moved off to their left and, working along
+the hills, took post on the heights beyond Bala-Hissar. In the
+meantime General Macpherson, having dispersed a strong body of the
+enemy up the valley, marched back towards Cabul and, coming across
+the scene of the late action, brought in the bodies of the dead
+officers. The guns had already been carried off for, as the enemy
+advanced, Colonel Macgregor--collecting a handful of lancers and
+artillery men--worked round to their rear and--dispersing a small
+body of the enemy, who had lingered at a village near the
+guns--succeeded in extricating the cannon from the swamp, and
+carried them off to Sherpur.
+
+From the signal post established above Bala-Hissar, an order was
+flashed to General Baker--who was many miles away--to inform him of
+what had occurred, and to order him to march back, with all speed.
+Late that evening he arrived, with his column; and the British
+force was again united.
+
+The next day, 560 men of Macpherson's brigade--composed of portions
+of the 67th, the 72nd, the 3rd Sikhs, and 5th Ghoorkas--were sent
+out to attack the enemy; who had established themselves upon a
+lofty peak, south of Cabul. The Afghans occupied the crest in
+strength and, hidden behind the hill, had 5000 or 6000 men lying in
+wait, to attack the assailing party in the rear as they pressed
+upwards.
+
+The position was, however, too strong to be carried. After several
+hours of fighting, the little British force had driven the Afghans
+from the lower part of the hill; but were unable to mount towards
+the crest, for ammunition was running short, and the enemy were too
+strongly posted. General Roberts therefore ordered Macpherson to
+hold the ground which he had gained, until next morning, when more
+troops would be sent.
+
+At eight o'clock in the morning, accordingly, General Baker moved
+out from Sherpur, with a strong force, and attacked the enemy's
+position in flank; while Macpherson continued his advance in front.
+The Afghans fought desperately, and clung to their position until
+the British were close up; when a desperate hand-to-hand struggle
+took place, and the British became masters of the position.
+
+While the fighting had been going on, great masses of the enemy had
+come down from the end of the valley, and threatened the road
+between Sherpur and Cabul. The 9th Lancers made a magnificent
+charge among them, broke them, and drove them back. Several other
+brilliant charges were made, and the plain was kept clear of the
+enemy. Captain Butson, however--who commanded--was killed, and two
+other officers wounded.
+
+With each hour that passed the position grew more serious, as
+immense bodies of the enemy were seen, advancing from all sides.
+The city was now in open revolt, and the small garrison there with
+difficulty held their own.
+
+One more effort was made to drive the enemy off the hills. Early on
+the 15th General Baker, with 1200 infantry and eight guns, left the
+cantonment. After very severe fighting, the enemy were driven from
+their lowest positions but, as Baker advanced, a body of from
+15,000 to 20,000 of the enemy marched out across the plain, towards
+the position just captured. Steadily they advanced, and the shells
+which our mountain guns sent among them, and the volleys poured
+down from the face of the hill, did not suffice to check them in
+the slightest. Reassured by their own enormous numbers, and feeling
+that success was in their grasp, they pressed forward; and
+desperate fighting took place. A position held by the 5th Punjaub
+Infantry was carried by their attack, and two guns were lost; but
+the rest of the positions were maintained.
+
+Seeing that it was impossible to hold the Bala-Hissar and Cabul, in
+the face of the hordes opposed to him--which were estimated, by the
+general himself, as numbering 80,000 men; but which the Afghans,
+themselves, afterwards acknowledged were between 100,000 and
+120,000--General Roberts determined to concentrate his troops at
+Sherpur. Baker was ordered to maintain the position he held, at all
+costs, until the troops from the Bala-Hissar were withdrawn. This
+he did; and although, as he fell back, the Afghan hordes swarmed
+round him, he fought his way back to Sherpur and, by nightfall, all
+the British force were safely gathered in the cantonments there.
+
+Two days previously, General Roberts had telegraphed for the
+regiments most advanced in the passes, below, to come forward. They
+arrived on the morning of the 16th, and the general had no longer
+any anxiety as to his ability to hold the cantonments--for months,
+if necessary--against the attacks of the Afghans.
+
+Had these attacked on the morning following what was virtually a
+victory--whilst still flushed with triumph and excitement--it would
+have needed all the efforts of the English to hold their position,
+against so formidable an attack. The Afghans, however, contented
+themselves with occupying several walled villages near the
+cantonment, and keeping up an incessant fire upon it. Meanwhile,
+their main body indulged in wild excesses in Cabul--sacking the
+Hindoo quarter, and plundering all the shops, without much
+distinction of nationality.
+
+Thus, three days elapsed; the British making the most of the time
+afforded them, by strengthening the weak points of their defenses
+Lines of wagons were placed in the gap between the unfinished wall
+and the foot of the hill. Wires were stretched in all directions,
+and chevaux-de-frise erected beyond.
+
+On the 18th the enemy came down in force and, for some hours, a
+tremendous musketry fire was kept up at the position; but the fire
+of the musketry and guns, from the walls, was so hot that they did
+not venture upon an attack.
+
+The following day General Baker sallied out and attacked a
+fortified post, a few hundred yards from the wall. From this place
+the enemy had greatly annoyed the garrison. After some severe
+fighting the Afghans were driven out, and the place blown up.
+
+On the evening of the 22nd the general received news that the
+Afghans, having prepared a great number of ladders for the assault,
+intended to attack that night. There had been several similar
+warnings but, this time, the news proved correct. A signal fire was
+lit upon one of the heights at four in the morning and, at five
+o'clock, the plain was covered with the enemy. Quietly they crept
+up in the darkness, towards the walls; and at six o'clock a
+prodigious shouting was heard, and from the villages, orchards, and
+enclosed ground upon all sides, the enemy dashed forward to the
+assault.
+
+As they approached, they opened fire on all sides; pressing chiefly
+towards the weak point, near the foot of the hills. But, tremendous
+as was the roar of the Afghan fire, it was drowned by the roll of
+musketry which broke from the whole circuit of the walls; where the
+British troops, rifle in hand, had been lying for three hours,
+waiting the attack. So terrible was the storm of lead that swept
+the plain that the Afghans paused, in their advance. For two hours
+they remained around the walls--yelling, shouting, and firing
+heavily--but all the efforts of their leaders could not induce them
+to rise from the ground, and hazard a charge. Many dropped within
+eighty or ninety yards of the wall but, beyond that, the bravest
+dared not advance.
+
+When morning broke, the welcome news was brought down--from the
+outlook on the top of the hill--that far across the plain could be
+seen the tents of the force of General Gough; who was coming up
+through the passes, to the relief of the garrison. The news had
+reached the assailants, also. Considerable bodies of the enemy were
+observed moving out from Cabul, as if with the intention of
+attacking the relieving force.
+
+The assailants of the British position--finding their inability to
+produce the smallest impression--were now beginning to waver; and
+General Gough ordered the cavalry and horse artillery to go out, by
+the road which led through a gorge in a hill behind, and to sweep
+round and take them in the rear.
+
+This they did, with immense success. At the moment that they fell
+upon the enemy, the British infantry sallied out from the
+cantonment and attacked them in front. A panic seized the Afghans.
+In a few minutes the whole plain was covered with flying fugitives;
+among whom our cavalry swept backward and forward, cutting them up
+in all directions; while the fire of our infantry, and of the guns
+on the walls, searched them through and through, whenever they
+attempted to gather in a knot, and make a stand.
+
+By nightfall, the whole of the Afghans had either fled to the
+hills, or were driven into Cabul. Upon the following day General
+Gough's force marched in but, before their arrival, it was found
+that the enemy had again evacuated the city; and the British were,
+as before, masters of the position. After the decisive defeat which
+had been inflicted upon them, and the dispersion of the great force
+which had gathered, confident of victory, there was little fear of
+any further attempt on the part of the enemy. They had brought
+their whole force into the field and, as this was defeated and
+dispersed, before the arrival of General Gough with his
+reinforcements, it was evident that success could not be hoped for
+against the united strength of the English.
+
+The time passed quietly, now. The Bala-Hissar and Cabul were
+reoccupied and, as the natives were cowed by the crushing defeat
+they had experienced, there was no longer any repetition of the
+insolent and defiant manner which they had, before, manifested.
+
+On the 3rd of January a message was brought to the orderly room
+that the general wished to see Sergeant Gale. Upon his presenting
+himself at the general's quarters, Sir Frederick Roberts--to his
+surprise--at once advanced, and shook him warmly by the hand.
+
+"Mr. Gale," he said, "I am very happy to inform you that the Horse
+Guards have acted upon my recommendation, seconded by that which
+was sent in by your colonel--who wrote at once, upon receiving a
+notification from me of the step I had taken, saying that you had
+distinguished yourself very highly, in the attack upon the
+Peiwar-Khotal, and that he was convinced that you would make, in
+all respects, an excellent officer. With my despatches that have
+just come in, I have received a notification that my request has
+been attended to; together with a copy of the Gazette, in which you
+are appointed to the 66th Regiment.
+
+"I have to congratulate you, sir. You are now an officer; and will,
+I am quite sure, do every credit to my recommendation."
+
+The young soldier was, for a moment, too moved at the tidings to
+speak coherently; but he murmured his thanks to the general for his
+kindness.
+
+"Do not say anything about that," the general said, heartily. "It
+is a pleasure, to me, to have been able to advance a promising
+young soldier.
+
+"I am only sorry that you are not gazetted to a regiment in my own
+division. The 66th are at Candahar; and unfortunately they will
+not, I understand, form part of a column with which General Stuart
+will advance, in the spring, up the valley through Ghuzni to this
+place. Had it been so, it would have been best for you to wait
+their arrival here but, as it is, you had better go down the pass
+to India, and work round and join your regiment. It is a long road,
+but it is always best for a young officer to be with his
+regiment--especially when in the field--and it is possible that
+they may have their share of fighting, round Candahar.
+
+"And now, there is one thing more. You will have to get an outfit,
+and there will be the expense of your travel, until you join your
+regiment. There will be no difficulty about an outfit. This you can
+procure easily, on the sale of some officer's effects.
+
+"By the by, poor young Thompson, who died yesterday, was about your
+size; and you had better bid a lump sum for the whole of his kit. I
+shall be happy to be your banker for that, and the needful sum for
+your traveling expenses. When you join your regiment you will, of
+course, be able to draw your pay, from the date on which you were
+gazetted."
+
+Will thanked the general very heartily for his offer, but said that
+he had 100 pounds standing at his account at the bank of Hindostan,
+which had been presented to him by the owners of the vessel in which
+he arrived there; and that this would be more than sufficient for all
+his needs, if the general would kindly authorize the staff paymaster
+to cash his drafts upon the bank.
+
+This request was at once granted. The paymaster of Lieutenant
+Thompson's regiment estimated that the effects of the young officer
+would sell, at auction, for about 20 pounds; and this sum William
+Gale gladly paid, thereby obtaining a complete outfit of regimental
+and civilian clothes, and under linen of all descriptions. Another
+30 pounds bought him a horse and saddlery while, for 5 pounds, he
+obtained a rough pony for the use of Yossouf--who steadily refused
+to leave him, although Will pointed out to him that, glad as he
+should be to have him with him, it would be far more to his
+advantage to remain among his people at Cabul, where he had means
+of settling comfortably.
+
+Upon the following day--having obtained his new uniform, which he
+found required no alteration to fit him fairly--William Gale dined
+with General Roberts; who had kindly invited him in order to
+introduce him, in his new position, to the officers of his staff He
+was obliged to remain three or four days longer at Sherpur, until a
+strong escort, with sick, was going down through the passes to
+Jellalabad. His baggage was stowed upon a camel and, after a kind
+adieu from General Roberts, and a very cordial one from the staff
+sergeants--among whom he had worked for three months--he started
+with the convoy for the lower valleys.
+
+The escort consisted of a hundred men of the infantry of the
+Guides. The way down the pass was difficult; but no snow had fallen
+for three weeks, and the roads were fairly beaten down by passing
+parties. Still, their progress was slow and, late on the afternoon
+of the second day after starting, they were still four miles from
+the fort of Jugdulluk; which was held by a British force, and where
+they were to halt for the night.
+
+The Guides were on the alert. A party of four men were 200 yards
+ahead of the little column, which was commanded by Captain Edwards.
+Presently a shot rang out from the front, followed by a scattered
+discharge. William Gale was, at the moment, riding by the side of
+Captain Edwards. He had already placed himself under that officer's
+orders, in case of any emergency.
+
+"Mr. Gale," Captain Edwards said, "will you ride forward at once,
+with six men, to the advanced party. When you get there, take such
+measures as you may think fit; and send me back word as to the
+strength and position of the enemy."
+
+With six of the Guides, Will at once rode forward; while Captain
+Edwards halted, until the little column was gathered closely
+together: the camels and dhoolies, with sick men, in the center;
+the soldiers, in readiness for action, around them.
+
+A soldier now ran up with a slip of paper, upon which Will had
+scribbled, in pencil:
+
+"The enemy are apparently in considerable force. The defile opens
+here. They are disposed among rocks and boulders, on either side."
+
+Will, on arriving at the advanced party, had found at once that the
+force of the enemy was too strong for him to attempt to move
+forward, at present. He had posted the men behind boulders by the
+wayside, ordering them to pick off any man that showed himself; and
+they were soon engaged in a sharp musketry skirmish with the enemy.
+One of their number had fallen at the first discharge; and Will,
+taking his rifle, used it with effect, until the head of the convoy
+arrived.
+
+It was now fast becoming dark, and the flashes of the enemy's fire,
+from behind the rocks, showed how numerous were the assailants.
+
+"There must be a couple of thousands of the scoundrels," Will said
+to Captain Edwards, as the latter came up to ascertain the state of
+affairs. "Hampered with the convoy, the position is an awkward one.
+It is fortunate they attacked where they did; for we can hold our
+own here while, if they had waited till we got fairly down into
+this comparatively open valley, and then attacked us on both
+flanks, it would have been very awkward.
+
+"We must try and clear them out. We cannot stop here all night. It
+is freezing very sharp, now; and the cold will be intense, in an
+hour or two."
+
+"I will take thirty men," Captain Edwards said, "and skirmish along
+among the rocks on the left. Do you take as many more, and move
+along the right of the path. The remaining forty shall stay here,
+under my sergeant, to guard the convoy from an attack in rear, in
+case any of the enemy should come down the defile behind us."
+
+The fight soon became exceedingly hot. Making their way along the
+rocks, on either side of the path, the Guides slowly drove the
+enemy before them. It was hard work, however, for the tribesmen
+fought steadily and, as those in front fell back upon those lower
+down the valley, their resistance became every moment more
+obstinate. Eight of Will's party had already fallen; but although,
+sword in hand, he was leading them, encouraging them with voice and
+gesture, not a bullet had as yet struck him.
+
+Presently Captain Edwards, having crossed the valley, stood by his
+side.
+
+"We are at a standstill," he said. "Nine of my men are killed or
+wounded, already; and the fellows are as thick as peas. I am afraid
+we shall never be able to force our way through.
+
+"There," he exclaimed, as a sound of firing was heard in the rear,
+"they have come down on the convoy from behind. We had better, I
+think, fall back a bit; and take post near the mouth of the defile.
+We must defend ourselves, as best we can, till morning."
+
+The movement was steadily executed, the wounded men being carried
+with them as they retired. The tribesmen advanced as they fell
+back--not venturing to press them, however; for the rear guard kept
+their faces towards them, and any who ventured to show themselves
+instantly paid the penalty of their rashness.
+
+For an hour the fight went on. It was night now, and dark as pitch
+in the deep valley in which the fight was going on; the position of
+the combatants being only indicated by the flickering flashes of
+the muskets. The Afghans were gradually creeping nearer, as the
+Guides could see, by the flashes.
+
+"If the fellows only make a determined rush at us," Captain Edwards
+said to Will, "it will go hard with us. Fortunately, they are as
+much in the dark as we are, and will find it difficult to gather
+for a rush."
+
+"I think we may hold out till morning but, by that time, news that
+we are blockaded here will spread throughout the hills, and we may
+have 10,000 of them down on us. I think, if you will give me leave,
+the best plan will be for me to try and make my way down to
+Jugdulluk, to bring up help from there."
+
+"You would never get through," Captain Edwards advised. "It is a
+brave offer, Gale, but could not be done."
+
+"I think it might be done," Will said. "It is as dark as pitch. I
+will take my lad with me, and will borrow a native cap and cloak
+from one of the bearers--there are some Afghans among them. I will
+take off my patrol jacket, and leave it behind me, and my boots. We
+will crawl along in the dark.
+
+"If--as is likely enough--we stumble against some of them, we will
+say we are wounded, and are making our way to the rear. They cannot
+see us in the dark, and my Afghan will pass muster; and Yossouf
+will certainly not be suspected. If I am discovered and killed, he
+will go forward and deliver the message."
+
+The plan seemed to offer every possibility of success; and Captain
+Edwards, seeing how serious the position was, consented to allow
+Will to attempt it.
+
+A few words to Yossouf sufficed to inform him of the task Will was
+about to undertake, and he at once agreed to share the danger. A
+rough sheepskin cap was obtained for Will from one of the camel
+men. His tunic was thrown off, and a posteen--or Afghan sheepskin
+coat--was put on, in its place. He took a long matchlock, which the
+camel man carried, slung over his shoulders; took off his boots,
+and thrust a pair of loose Afghan shoes into his belt. Yossouf
+needed no preparations, beyond borrowing a matchlock.
+
+Wringing Captain Edwards' hand, Will stooped on his hands and knees
+and, with Yossouf a pace or two ahead, began to crawl down the
+path. Before starting, the orders had been sent round to the
+soldiers to fire at the rocks on either side of the path, but on no
+account to fire down the road, itself. As he expected, Will found
+this clear of Afghans, for a considerable distance. A heavy fire
+had, previous to their starting, been directed down this path; to
+prevent the Afghans from gathering there in the darkness,
+preparatory to making a rush. They came across several dead bodies,
+but the enemy were all behind rocks, on one side or other of the
+road.
+
+When they had crawled a hundred yards, they were past the front
+line, from which the Afghans were keeping up a heavy fire; but Will
+knew that, from their numbers, they must extend far back down the
+valley and, indeed, from almost every rock the flashes of the
+matchlocks blazed out, as the lurking tribesmen fired in the
+direction of the mouth of the defile.
+
+They were nearly a quarter of a mile down when an Afghan--who had
+been crouching behind a rock, close to the path--advanced into the
+road to fire, when he stumbled against Yossouf.
+
+"What are you doing?" he exclaimed.
+
+"We are both wounded, by the Kaffirs," Yossouf answered; "and are
+making our way back, to bind up our wounds. I think my arm is
+broken; but I mean to come back again, to have a few more shots at
+the infidels."
+
+"Good!" the Afghan replied. "How goes it in front?"
+
+"Their fire is lessening," Yossouf said. "We must have killed many.
+We shall finish with them in the morning, if not before."
+
+The Afghan fired, and then retired behind his rock to load again;
+while Will and Yossouf continued their way.
+
+A few hundred yards farther, they rose to their feet. Will slipped
+on the Afghan shoes; and they then proceeded, at a rapid pace, down
+the pass. Several times they withdrew from the road, and hid beside
+it, as they met parties of tribesmen hurrying up to join in the
+attack but, in an hour after starting, they heard the welcome
+challenge of the sentry, at Jugdulluk.
+
+Saying who he was, Will was at once passed forward into the fort,
+and taken to the quarters of the officer in command.
+
+"I am Lieutenant Gale, of the 66th," Will said, "and was on my way
+down the pass with the convoy of wounded, and 100 men of the
+Guides, under Captain Edwards. They have been attacked at the lower
+end of the defile, some four miles above, by a very strong body of
+tribesmen. They are attacked front and rear.
+
+"I have made my way through to ask you if you can despatch a force
+to their rescue. Were the tribesmen attacked in their rear, now,
+they might be scattered easily enough; but they are assembling very
+fast and, in the morning, it will be a difficult matter to reach
+them."
+
+"We have fancied," the officer said, "for the last two hours that
+we heard distant firing; but we could not be sure, for any noise
+echoes so, in these mountains. I will set out at once with you,
+with as many men as I can spare."
+
+
+
+Chapter 17: At Candahar.
+
+
+The garrison of Jugdulluk consisted only of 220 Sikhs. The officer
+in command left seventy of these in charge of one of his
+subalterns, with the injunction to exercise the most extreme
+vigilance, in his absence. Then with 150 men, a subaltern, and Will
+Gale, he started up the path to effect the rescue of the
+beleaguered convoy.
+
+The road wound and turned frequently among the spurs of the lofty
+hills, which had cut off the sound of firing from the garrison; and
+only a faint and distant murmur was audible, when they started.
+After marching two miles, however, the rattle of the musketry
+became clear and distinct. Upon the way the officer in command
+learned, from Will, the exact position of things in front, and the
+situation of the Afghans.
+
+When within half a mile of the scene of action, fifty men were
+thrown out on either side of the road; while the other fifty
+advanced, very slowly, along the center The orders to the flankers
+were to search among the rocks, as they advanced, and to bayonet or
+shoot every Afghan they found among them.
+
+It was not long before they came upon the enemy. Then the rifles
+cracked out; and the wild shouts of the Afghans betokened their
+astonishment at being thus, unexpectedly, assailed in rear.
+Numerous as they were, they offered but a light resistance. Their
+one thought was to effect their escape; and they hurried rapidly
+away as the relief advanced, climbing the steep sides of the valley
+by paths only known to themselves; and then, from the hillside far
+above, opening a scattered fire, at random, down into the valley.
+
+In five minutes, all resistance had ceased. The flanking parties
+were ordered to shelter themselves behind the rocks, and to return
+the fire of the natives on the hillsides; to retain the position
+until the convoy passed through, and then to close behind it, as a
+rear guard. With the fifty men in the road, the officer then pushed
+forward; and was soon greeted by a shout of welcome from the
+defenders of the defile.
+
+There was not a minute to be lost; for the Afghans, when they
+recovered from their first scare, would renew the attack; and the
+party pressing down the defile on their rear--ignorant of what had
+taken place below--were still keeping up an incessant fire.
+Twenty-eight of the Guides were already killed, or wounded.
+
+Several of the sick men, in the dhoolies, volunteered to walk down
+to the fort, and to give up their places to those of the wounded
+men who were unable to walk and, in a few minutes, the convoy moved
+forward. The fifty men of tho relieving party placed themselves in
+their rear and, as the tribesmen who had been attacking them from
+behind rushed down through the defile, with exulting shouts--believing
+that they were now secure of their victims--the Sikhs opened so heavy
+a fire on them that they fell back up the defile, in disorder.
+
+As the convoy wound down the valley, the enemy again assembled on
+the hills and pursued them hotly. But the Sikhs and Guides kept up
+so steady a fire that they did not venture to approach to close
+quarters and, with a loss of eighteen more men, the convoy reached
+the shelter of the fort. Conscious of their inability to attack
+this position, the Afghans drew off.
+
+On returning to his friends, Will had resumed his uniform; and now,
+on reaching the fort, Captain Edwards expressed to him his warmest
+thanks for the hazardous adventure that he had undertaken.
+
+"I shall, of course," he concluded, "furnish a full report of the
+affair to the general; and I should think he would recommend you
+for the Victoria Cross. If any fellow ever deserved it, you do so;
+for it seemed, to me, almost certain death to venture through the
+pass. I never expected to see you again; and I was never more glad,
+in my life, than I was when the firing began down below in the
+valley, and knew that help was at hand for, had you failed, it
+would have been all up with us. I doubt if we should have seen the
+morning and, at any rate, few of us would have been left, by that
+time."
+
+The convoy reached Jellalabad without further adventure, and
+Captain Edwards reported to the general the events of the march. He
+was requested to give a full written report of the affair; and the
+general stated that, in forwarding it, he should certainly append a
+recommendation that Lieutenant Gale should receive the Victoria
+Cross, for his gallantry in venturing through the Afghans to fetch
+assistance for the convoy.
+
+Will himself, as soon as he reached Jellalabad, hurried away to the
+cantonment of the Norfolk Rangers; who were in a village, a mile
+distant from the town. He was not recognized, as he passed through
+the soldiers scattered about the village street; and was soon at
+the principal house, where the colonel had his quarters. On sending
+in his name, he was at once shown into the room where the colonel
+was at work.
+
+"I am indeed glad to see you," the latter said, rising and shaking
+him heartily by the hand; "and I congratulate you, most warmly, on
+your promotion. I promised to do what I could for you, when you
+joined; but I did not expect that it would be so soon."
+
+"I am indeed obliged to you, colonel, for your kindness," Will
+said; "and am conscious how much I owe to you."
+
+"Not at all, my boy, not at all. It was General Roberts, himself,
+who recommended you for your commission; and I was only too glad to
+back up his recommendation, to the best of my power. We all thought
+you were gone, when you were reported as missing at Ali-Kheyl, and
+we heard from the sentry that--having gone forward, to investigate
+the origin of a noise he had reported to you--you were suddenly
+fired upon; and that he saw no more of you, as he ran back to the
+picket. I was glad, indeed, when the report was received from poor
+Cavagnari that, upon his arrival at Cabul, he had found you there,
+just recovering from your wounds.
+
+"Then, of course, we gave you up again, when we heard of the
+massacre of the mission; and it seemed like a resurrection from the
+dead when I got a letter from Roberts, saying you were found again,
+and that he was recommending you for a commission.
+
+"I see by the Gazette you are appointed to the 66th, and we were
+expecting to see you on your way down. Had you any difficulty in
+getting through the passes?"
+
+"The convoy was attacked, sir, by the tribesmen, when near
+Jugdulluk; but the garrison came out to our rescue, and we got
+through safely. But we had thirty men killed or wounded."
+
+"A smart affair!" the colonel said. "And now, of course, you will
+take up your quarters with us, for a day or two, before you go on.
+The officers will all be glad to see you; and you will be able to
+tell us all about the attack on the mission, and the recent
+fighting. Roberts has been having some hot work, there.
+
+"We have been grumbling horribly at our bad luck. We thought, at
+the time, we were fortunate at being sent back to India, when peace
+was signed, instead of being kept in the Khurum valley. But the
+consequence has been that we have been out of it all. However, we
+must look upon you as our representative."
+
+Will hesitated about staying, but the colonel overruled his
+objection; saying that, as there would be no fighting until the
+spring, there could be no particular hurry for him to join his
+regiment. A spare room was placed at his disposal, in the colonel's
+quarters, and Will was soon made at home. The officers flocked in,
+upon hearing of his arrival; and all congratulated him, most
+warmly, upon his promotion. An hour later, a mounted orderly rode
+up to the colonel's quarters.
+
+"Is Lieutenant Gale here?" he asked.
+
+Will went forward.
+
+"A note from the general," the orderly said and, handing it to him,
+"also one for Colonel Shepherd."
+
+Illustration: Letters from the General.
+
+Will's note was simply an invitation to dine, that evening, with
+the general. The colonel's letter was as follows:
+
+"Colonel Shepherd,
+
+"As Lieutenant Gale was promoted from your regiment, I think it is
+likely that he has found his way to you. I have written to ask him
+to dinner; please spare him to me. I hope you will do me the
+pleasure of accompanying him. He has performed a most gallant
+action; and I have just had the pleasure of writing a dispatch,
+recommending him for the V.C."
+
+Will and the colonel at once wrote notes, accepting the invitation.
+When these had been sent out to the orderly the colonel read aloud,
+to the officers present, the note he had received from the general.
+
+"Now," he said, turning to Will, "what is that you have been doing?
+You told us the convoy had been attacked, and sharply pressed; but
+you said nothing of your share in the affair. What was it?"
+
+"It was simple enough, sir," Will answered, coloring hotly. "We
+were surrounded, just at the mouth of the defile. The enemy held
+the valley in front in great force, and another party were pressing
+on our rear. Things looked awkward; and so I volunteered, with my
+faithful Afghan boy, to get through the fellows in front, and make
+my way down to Jugdulluk--which was four miles away--to bring the
+garrison up on their rear.
+
+"It was simple enough and, in fact, there was less danger than in
+remaining with the convoy, to be popped at by the Afghans. The
+night was very dark and, down in the bottom, one could hardly see
+one's hand. The Afghans had been cleared pretty well off the road,
+by our fire; so there was no difficulty, whatever, in making our
+way down. We were, in fact, only questioned once; and my boy's
+statement, that we were wounded and were going to the rear, was
+accepted at once."
+
+"The fact that you succeeded," the colonel said, "does not detract
+from the pluck required to attempt such an adventure. To my mind,
+there is more courage required in venturing, alone, through the
+midst of the Afghans, at night, than there would be in charging any
+number of them, in hot blood, in the light. You have earned the
+V.C. well, Gale; and I am sure we all feel proud of you, though you
+do not belong to us, now."
+
+There was a chorus of approval from the officers around.
+
+"I don't belong to you now, sir, but," Will said, earnestly, "I
+shall always feel, whatever regiment I may be with, that the
+Norfolk Rangers are my corps. It is the kindness which was shown
+me, here, which has put me in the way of rising; and I shall never
+forget it."
+
+It was now time to dress for dinner; and Will, for the first time,
+arrayed himself in full-dress uniform. The buttons and facings he
+would, of course, get altered when he joined the regiment.
+
+The general received Gale with great kindness. He had a large party
+to dinner. Among them was Captain Edwards; and after the table was
+cleared the latter--at the general's request--gave a full account
+of the attack upon the convoy; and Will was then called upon to
+relate the part which he had taken in it, which he did very
+modestly and quietly.
+
+For two days longer he stopped at Jellalabad; and then, with a
+hearty farewell to the officers of the Rangers, he started down the
+pass. He again journeyed with a convoy for, although the tribes
+below Jellalabad were cowed into submission, many attacks were
+made, by the mountaineers, upon small parties going up or down the
+passes; and stringent orders had been issued that no officer should
+go down, except when accompanied by an escort.
+
+After a week's traveling Will arrived, with Yossouf, at Peshawur.
+Then he rode, by easy stages, until he reached the Indus where,
+taking his place on a steamer, he traveled down the river to
+Sukkur; where he disembarked, and started for the weary march,
+across the desert, to the foot of the Bolan.
+
+Along the road large numbers of coolies were at work, constructing
+a line of railway, which was now almost complete to the foot of the
+pass. It did not ascend this but, turning to the right, wound up
+the hills to the plateau. It was intended to be taken on to
+Candahar, and its completion would have been an immense boon, both
+to that city and to India; as it would have opened a great trade to
+the north, and have enabled the inhabitants of the fertile plain,
+around Candahar, to send their corn, fruit, and other products down
+to India. Unhappily, with the subsequent abandonment of Candahar
+the formation of the railway was stopped; and the whole allowed to
+go to ruin. The work has, however, been recently taken in hand
+again.
+
+Will and his follower ascended the Bolan; stopped a day or two at
+Quettah, to rest their horses; and then proceeded on through the
+fertile plains of Pisheen, and over the Kojak Pass, and thence on
+to Candahar. Here Will joined his new regiment, and was well
+received by its officers.
+
+In every regiment in the service, an officer risen from the ranks
+is invariably received with special courtesy, and kindness. Every
+endeavor is made to place him at his ease, in his new position.
+This is specially so when--as in Will's case--the promotion has
+been earned by distinguished services in the field.
+
+In most instances, officers promoted from the rank of sergeant are
+a good deal older than the young lieutenants among whom they find
+themselves. Being often married men, and having nothing but their
+pay to depend upon, they find themselves, therefore, unable to take
+much part in the pleasures and gaieties of the regiment. In India,
+however, as the rate of pay is much higher, an unmarried officer
+can live very comfortably on his pay; and as, in the field, the
+expenses are far less than when a regiment is in cantonments at a
+large station--where there is much gaiety--Will found that he was
+able to live very comfortably, on his pay, in the same style as
+that of his comrades.
+
+They, on their part, were pleased to find in Will a young fellow of
+the same age as the other junior lieutenants and, withal, a
+pleasant, gentlemanly young man. The fact, too, that he had seen so
+much service, had gone through stirring adventures, and had fought
+by the side of Cavagnari in the Bala-Hissar, made him quite a hero
+among them; and Will was soon thoroughly one of themselves.
+
+When it was known that the regiment was likely to remain at
+Candahar for some time, many luxuries had been brought up from
+India; together with means of passing away the time, such as the
+necessary appliances for cricket, racket, and other games. Among
+these, too, were several boxes of books; and Will--who had, at
+first, a little amused his comrades by his absolute ignorance of
+cricket, but who soon became a promising recruit at that
+game--steadily devoted three hours a day to reading, in order to
+improve his mind, and to obtain a knowledge of the various matters
+which were topics of conversation among his comrades. Above all he
+diligently studied the newspapers--great parcels of which arrived
+every week--in order to obtain some knowledge of the political
+state of affairs in England, the position of parties, and the
+various matters occupying public attention.
+
+He had, at first, found his ignorance of these matters a great
+drawback to him, in general conversation; but he discovered that
+newspapers, rather than books, are useful in enabling a man to mix
+with his fellows in social talk; and that the current events of the
+day form ninety-nine hundredths of the subjects of conversation.
+The fact that all his mess mates had been thoroughly posted in the
+history of Rome and Greece, that they could read these languages
+almost a well as English, that they had been coached in high
+mathematics, and had a knowledge of French and German, gave
+them--Will found--very little advantage in general conversation;
+and he was surprised to discover how entirely useless, from a
+practical point of view, is much of the instruction which must be
+mastered by young men, before obtaining a commission.
+
+Many times, when talking with the young officers with whom he was
+most intimate, he inquired of them what good they found the
+learning they had obtained, during their many years of schooling;
+and was surprised at the universal reply: "No good, whatever!" He
+found, however, that some of the more thoughtful of them admitted
+that they had gained increased powers of thought, and reasoning,
+from their training.
+
+"That is the good of education, Gale," Captain Fletcher--who
+commanded Will's company--said to him one day. "A certain time must
+be spent upon education, and the course of study is intended to
+strengthen and improve the mental powers. As far as soldiers are
+concerned, it would certainly be of more practical use if the time
+we spent at school on Greek, and mathematics, had been expended in
+acquiring three or four European and Indian languages. But you see,
+boys educated at the same school must all work together, and study
+the same books, whatever the profession for which they are intended
+is. Our practical--that is, our professional education--only begins
+when we go to Woolwich, or Sandhurst.
+
+"Perhaps, some day, a different system will be employed. There will
+be special schools for lads intended for various professions, and
+careers. Till that is done, we must all work upon a common basis;
+which has at least the advantage of forming the mind, for the after
+work of acquiring the special branches of knowledge required, by
+us, in the careers we may adopt.
+
+"If you ask my advice I should not, at your time of life, dream of
+setting to to learn the dead languages, or to study mathematics.
+Read the histories of Rome and Greece, and study that of your own
+country. Read books of travel and the biographies of great men, and
+keep yourself well posted--as you are doing--in current public
+events. You will then find yourself able to take part, on equal
+terms, in any conversation which may be going on. You will, indeed,
+be considered by strangers an exceptionally well-informed young
+fellow; and you may pass through life without any person having a
+suspicion that Latin, Greek, and mathematics--the cardinal points
+of an ordinary education--are wholly unknown to you."
+
+Will was cheered by the advice and, henceforth, directed his
+studies only in the direction which Captain Fletcher had indicated.
+
+At the beginning of April, a large diminution had taken place in
+the force stationed at Candahar; as General Sir Donald Stewart
+marched, with the greater portion of the force, for Cabul. The
+route led through a country which was the stronghold of the
+fanatical party--the important town of Ghuzni containing the most
+fanatical population in all Afghanistan. This had been the center
+whence the attacks on General Roberts had been organized, and it
+was deemed necessary to march a strong force through the country,
+to overawe the tribesmen, and break up their organization.
+
+The march was uneventful as far as Shahjui, the limit of the
+Candahar province. At this point the Taraki country begins. The
+Mollahs here had been actively preaching a holy war, and several
+thousand men were reported as having collected. The villages were
+found to be deserted, and everything betokened an active opposition
+to the advance.
+
+When the head of the column arrived at Ahmed-Khel, a body of the
+enemy--estimated at from 12,000 to 15,000--were seen clustered on a
+semicircle of hills, beyond the village. The baggage of the column
+stretched far along the road, and it was all important to prevent
+the enemy from falling upon this long line. General Stewart
+therefore determined to attack them.
+
+The two batteries of artillery opened fire upon the enemy; who at
+once, in reply, rushed down to the assault. The charge was led by
+some 3000 or 4000 Ghazis--as they were called--fanatics, who had
+sworn to give their lives in carrying out their object, of
+exterminating the hated infidel. Some of these men were armed with
+rifles and matchlocks; some with heavy swords, knives, and pistols;
+others, again, with pikes made of bayonets, or pieces of sharpened
+iron fastened upon long sticks. Some were on foot, and some on
+horseback.
+
+With wild yells, the mass rushed down upon our troops; and so
+sudden and unexpected was the attack, so swiftly did they cross the
+400 or 500 yards of intervening ground, that they came upon the
+British before preparation could be made for their reception. At
+the moment when they charged, some of the cavalry were moving
+across in front of the infantry; and these, before they could be
+got into a line for a charge, were surrounded by the enemy.
+
+In an instant they were lost to sight, in the cloud of dust and
+smoke. It was a hand-to-hand struggle and, in the confusion, a
+troop charged to the right, in rear of the main line of the
+infantry, and burst into the midst of the 19th Punjaub Infantry;
+who were in reserve, in rear of the position occupied by the
+general and his staff.
+
+In a moment, all was confusion. The ammunition mules were
+stampeded, riderless horses dashed hither and thither and, close
+behind the cavalry, the Ghazis--with a furious rush--dashed in
+among the broken infantry. Upon the left flank, too, the Ghazis
+swept round in the rear of our infantry line and, for a time, it
+seemed as if the whole British formation was broken up--in which
+case the numbers of their foes must have prevailed. Colonel Lister,
+V.C. however--who commanded the 3rd Ghoorkas--threw his men rapidly
+into company squares, and poured a tremendous fire into the
+fanatics.
+
+All along the line the attack raged; and so hurriedly had the
+battle commenced that many of the men had not even fixed bayonets.
+Desperate was the hand-to-hand fighting, and valor more conspicuous
+than that of the Ghazis was never shown. Furiously they threw
+themselves upon the line of their opponents; clutching their
+muskets and trying to wrench them from their hands, while they
+strove to cut down their holders. Many of them threw themselves
+upon the fixed bayonets, and died in the endeavor to cut down the
+soldiers with their swords; but the three regiments which formed
+the line--one British (the 59th), one Ghoorkas, and one
+Sikhs--alike held their own, and poured rolling volleys into the
+ranks of the enemy.
+
+Desperately the Ghazis strove to capture the guns; which were
+firing case and shrapnel into them, at a distance of thirty yards,
+mowing them down in hundreds. Not even would this terrible
+slaughter have checked them, had not the 2nd Punjaub Cavalry most
+gallantly charged them, again and again.
+
+The general, surrounded by his escort, was in the midst of the
+fight--the enemy having burst in between the guns and the 59th
+Foot--and officers and troopers had, alike, to fight for their
+lives; several of the escort being killed and wounded. At last,
+however, the Ghazis fell back from the terrible fire.
+
+The 1st Punjaub Cavalry, coming up from the rear, joined the 2nd in
+a hot pursuit; and our native allies the Hazaras, seeing the
+Afghans in retreat, also rushed out after them, and the rout of the
+enemy was complete. The fighting had lasted about an hour, and the
+enemy left over a thousand dead on the field, besides the bodies
+which had been carried off Their wounded, of course, were far more
+numerous. Ghuzni surrendered without opposition, when the column
+reached it; the fighting men having been engaged in the battle of
+Ahmed-Khel, and having had enough of hostilities.
+
+On the 23rd of April, a force under Brigadier General Palliser
+advanced against a large body of natives, who had assembled near
+the village of Ghalez--again led by the Ghazis. These rushed to the
+attack, with a courage and desperation equal to that shown by the
+fanatics in the previous battle. Our men however were, this time,
+prepared; and were able to inflict very heavy losses upon the
+enemy, without allowing them to get to close quarters.
+
+This was the end of the Afghan resistance. General Stewart moved on
+to Cabul without further fighting, and effected a junction there
+with the force under General Roberts.
+
+
+
+Chapter 18: On The Helmund.
+
+
+With the junction of the forces of Generals Stewart and Roberts,
+what may be called the second period of the Afghan war came to an
+end. All opposition had ceased, and it appeared probable that there
+would be no more fighting.
+
+Abdul-Rahman, a prince of the royal house who--after for some time
+fighting against Sheer Ali--had been defeated, and obliged to fly
+the country; had, for a long time, been a resident among the
+Russians. Upon the abdication of Yakoub he had crossed the
+frontier, and had entered at the north of Afghanistan; assuming the
+title of Ameer. He had been well received in that part of the
+country, and as no other competitor for the throne appeared to have
+chances equal to his, and as the British government were most
+anxious to withdraw their forces from the country, his authority
+was recognized by us. Negotiations were opened with him; and it was
+arranged that, as he approached Cabul, the British force would
+retire.
+
+The summer had passed not unpleasantly, at Candahar. The country
+was peaceful. Cricket matches were got up between the various
+regiments, and horse races established. Candahar was governed by a
+protege of the British, named Wali Shere Ali. He had organized a
+native army, to support his authority upon our withdrawal.
+
+The only circumstances which occurred to mar the pleasing time were
+isolated attacks, upon British officers and men, by Ghazis. These
+attacks were sometimes made in broad daylight, in the streets of
+Candahar, where the escape of those who perpetrated them was
+impossible. These fanatics regarding their own life with
+indifference, so that they could but kill one or more of the
+British, before being cut down.
+
+One day, as William Gale was walking in the principal street of
+Candahar, at a short distance behind Colonel Ripon--an Indian
+official of very long standing and experience, who had come up on a
+special mission to arrange, with the Wali, the details of the civil
+government of the province--he saw three Afghans, who were
+loitering in the road, draw their long tulwars and dash upon that
+officer.
+
+The first who reached him delivered a sweeping blow; which the
+colonel, taken by surprise, partly received on his uplifted
+arm--but was struck to the ground. Another of the Ghazis raised his
+sword; but before it could fall Will Gale--who saw at once that he
+was too far behind to interpose between the assailant and the
+victim--drew his revolver from his belt and, taking a hasty aim,
+fired. The shot was an accurate one; the bullet striking the Afghan
+on the forehead, just as he was about to strike. He fell forward on
+the colonel; receiving, as he did so, a tremendous blow which the
+third Ghazi was aiming at the prostrate man.
+
+Illustration: Will saves Colonel Ripon.
+
+Before the blow could be repeated, Will had bounded forward and,
+sword in one hand and revolver in the other, faced the two Afghans.
+Another shot freed him of one of his assailants; just as the other,
+rushing recklessly forward, aimed a blow at him--which he was not
+quick enough to parry. His right arm fell to his side but, in an
+instant, he threw himself upon his foe; and the two fell heavily to
+the ground, the Afghan striving desperately to shorten his sword,
+so as to use the point; while Will strove to liberate his left
+arm--which was under the man--and so use his revolver, which he
+still grasped.
+
+At this moment some soldiers of the 66th ran up; and one of them,
+with his bayonet--which, since these attacks began, were always
+carried at the belt--brought the conflict to a conclusion, by
+running it through and through the Ghazi's body.
+
+Will soon rose to his feet. Colonel Ripon had already freed himself
+from the body of the dead Ghazi, and had struggled to his feet; the
+blood streaming from his head and arm.
+
+"I have to thank you for my life, sir," he said, warmly. "Had your
+aid come but two seconds less promptly, they would have finished
+me.
+
+"But I fear you are severely wounded."
+
+"Oh, no!" Will answered. "It is only a flesh wound, from my
+shoulder to my elbow. Luckily, my sword partly caught the blow. I
+was aiming at the other fellow, and had not time to parry fairly. I
+shall be none the worse for it, in a week's time. My wound is less
+severe than yours, sir."
+
+"We are both bleeding pretty freely," the colonel said. "My
+quarters are close at hand and, as the principal medical officer
+lives in the same house, you cannot do better than come in with
+me."
+
+In a few minutes their wounds were bandaged, the doctor saying that
+no serious harm had been done, in either case; but that care and
+quiet, lest fever should supervene, would be necessary for a week
+or two. As the house was much more airy, and commodious, than that
+in which Will was quartered, the colonel begged him so strongly to
+move his quarters thither, until able to return to duty, that Will
+agreed to do so; and was soon installed, with Yossouf in
+attendance, in the colonel's quarters. He was greatly pleased with
+the old officer, whose manner was most kind and courteous; and who,
+from his long experience in India, was full of anecdotes and
+information concerning the country.
+
+Ten days after the struggle, the doctor told them that there was no
+longer any occasion for his services. Their wounds were healing
+favorably, and all fear of fever had passed. At the same time, it
+would still be some time before either could take their arms from
+their slings.
+
+The following day, in honor of his convalescence, Colonel Ripon
+invited several friends to dinner; among them General Burrows, and
+Colonel Galbraith of the 66th. All had, of course, heard the
+details of the attack on Colonel Ripon; and Will was congratulated,
+warmly, upon the promptness that he had showed.
+
+"Do you know, colonel," General Burrows said, as they were smoking
+their cigars after dinner, "there is a wonderful likeness between
+you and Lieutenant Gale. I should have taken you for father and
+son, anywhere."
+
+The other officers agreed with the remark.
+
+The likeness was certainly strong. Both were men of six feet in
+height. The colonel's hair and mustache were grizzled, and his face
+bronzed with the sun of many Indian summers. He was thin and spare
+of habit; but his shoulders were broad, and it was evident that, in
+his youth, he must have possessed much of the muscular strength
+which was apparent in Will's more rounded limbs. But it was in
+their eyes that there was the greatest similarity. Both were gray,
+and of nearly the same shade; both had a simple, straightforward,
+and kindly expression; both were shaded by straight, and rather
+heavy eyebrows.
+
+The men looked at each other.
+
+"I suppose he is like me," Colonel Ripon said; "still more like, I
+fancy, what I remember myself, at his age; but curiously enough he
+has--ever since I met him--been recalling some one else to my
+mind;" and a shade passed over his face.
+
+Seeing that Colonel Ripon was not disposed to talk further on the
+subject, a fresh topic of conversation was started. There was news
+that Ayoub Khan--the brother of Yakoob, who was governor at
+Herat--was marching south, at the head of a large force, with the
+intention of opposing Abdul-Rahman, and again reseating Yakoob on
+the throne. He had also preached a holy war against the British.
+
+"I fear that the trouble is serious," General Burrows said. "The
+troops Ayoub is bringing with him have not yet met us in the field.
+The population on the road is wild and fanatical, in the extreme;
+and will, no doubt, join him to a man. On the other hand, the
+troops of the Wali are not to be depended upon, and the brunt of
+the fighting is sure to fall upon us."
+
+Three days later, the order was issued by General Primrose that the
+66th Regiment, the Bombay Grenadiers, and Jacob's Rifles; together
+with the 3rd Scinde Horse and 3rd Bombay Cavalry, with a battery of
+artillery; were to move out with the Wali's army towards Girishk,
+on the river Helmund, which formed the boundary between the
+province of Candahar and that of Herat.
+
+After the long period of inactivity at Candahar, Will was delighted
+at the thought of taking part in an expedition, with his regiment;
+but when they reached the Helmund life was, for some time,
+exceedingly monotonous. The news of Ayoub's advance greatly excited
+the population--who had been further worked up by agents, widely
+distributed through the country; and by the exhortations of the
+Mollahs and Ghazis. Consequently, rambling at any distance from the
+camp was forbidden; and the shooting parties, which had been one of
+the great resources of their life at Candahar, were peremptorily
+put an end to.
+
+Colonel Ripon had accompanied the force, as the Wali's adviser.
+Both he and Will had recovered completely from their wounds. When
+the regiment first marched, indeed, the surgeon had strongly
+recommended Will to remain behind, until his wound had completely
+healed; but the young officer had so strongly begged to be allowed
+to accompany the regiment that the surgeon had consented. His
+colonel had, for a time, relieved him from all duty, and he rode in
+rear of the regiment; but within a fortnight of their arrival at
+the Helmund, he was able to lay aside his sling, and to take his
+turn of regular duty.
+
+The officers did all that they could to make existence tolerable,
+on the sandy shores of the Helmund. They got up foot races and
+athletic sports for the men, played cricket on the sands, and
+indulged in a bath--twice a day--in the river. Will often spent the
+evening in Colonel Ripon's tent. A warm friendship had arisen
+between the two officers, and each day seemed to bring them closer
+together.
+
+All this time, Ayoub's army was known to be approaching. It had
+been delayed by want of transport, and by the difficult nature of
+the country over which it had to pass. The guns, too--of which it
+was reported to have a large number--had greatly hampered it but,
+by the second week in July, it was near at hand.
+
+For some time, the Wali's troops had been showing signs of
+insubordination; and little doubt was entertained that they had
+been tampered with, by Ayoub's emissaries. The question of
+disarming them was several times discussed; but the Wali maintained
+his faith that they would remain true to their salt, and the
+British force was so small that it was deemed imprudent to take any
+step to diminish their strength, by dispensing with the services of
+a strong body of men who might, after all, be faithful at the
+critical moment. Moreover, it was doubtful whether they would
+submit to be disarmed, by a force so inferior to their own. Should
+the attempt to disarm them succeed, they must either be escorted
+back to Candahar, by a strong detachment of the British; or be
+permitted to disperse, in which case they would assuredly swell the
+advancing army of Ayoub.
+
+One day Will arranged to start, the next morning at daybreak, for a
+day's shooting with four other young officers--Hammond and
+Fortescue of Jacob's Rifles, and Plater and Lowther of the
+Grenadiers. The country round the camp had been already shot over,
+so they were to go some miles out. Will's colonel--in giving him
+leave off parade for the day--had asked him to endeavor to
+ascertain, at any village he might enter, the state of the feeling
+of the natives respecting Ayoub, and their disposition towards the
+British; points on which a deplorable ignorance existed, in the
+camp.
+
+The party started before daybreak, putting their wiry little
+tats--or native ponies--into a gallop, so as to reach the
+spot--eight miles distant--where they were to begin to shoot as
+early as possible; so as to get two or three hours' sport, before
+the heat of the day really set in. After an hour's ride, they
+overtook their servants; who had gone on ahead, with the guns and
+luncheon. The sun was but just above the horizon, and the morning
+air was cool and pleasant.
+
+Dismounting, they handed over the ponies to the servants and,
+taking the guns and ammunition, set out on foot. The servants were
+to go on, with the ponies and lunch, to a village in the hills,
+four miles distant; and to get tiffin ready, by eleven o'clock.
+
+The young officers set out on foot, keeping a short distance apart.
+Two of their servants accompanied them, to carry the game; the
+other three went with the two Syces, who looked after the ponies
+The ground was broken and stony, and altogether uncultivated,
+except in the neighborhood of the villages. They had better sport
+than they expected, for hares darted out in numbers from behind the
+rocks. Some of these were bowled over, while others escaped; and
+there was much bantering and laughter among the young men, none of
+whom were first-class shots.
+
+As the sun rose higher the game became more scarce and, by ten o'clock,
+the party turned their faces towards the village where they were to
+lunch; and which lay, they calculated, a mile or two away on their right.
+The sun was now blazing down upon them; and they were glad, indeed, when
+they came in sight of the village--which was not perceived until they
+were close to it, as it lay in a deep and rocky valley.
+
+Yossouf met them, as they entered the village.
+
+"Well, Yossouf, where have you laid the tiffin?"
+
+"I have spread it, sahib, on a level piece of ground, in the shade
+of the chief's house. He did not seem disposed to be civil and,
+indeed, I thought that it would be more pleasant out of doors, in
+the shade, than inside."
+
+"Much more pleasant, Yossouf; and these forts, as they call them,
+are generally stuffy places, with small windows. What is the
+feeling of the people here?"
+
+"They are looking forward to Ayoub's coming, sir, when they say a
+holy war will be preached, and every man will rise against the
+infidels. When they found I was a countryman, they talked freely
+enough before me; especially as I led them to believe that I had
+been taken prisoner, at Cabul, and forced to accompany you as a
+sort of slave.
+
+"I should recommend that, as soon as tiffin is over, you should
+start for the camp; for I don't think it is quite safe, here."
+
+"They would never think of attacking us, Yossouf, with our force
+within an easy day's march."
+
+"I don't know, sir," Yossouf said, doubtfully. "They say that the
+Wali's men are all with them; and that these, alone, are quite
+sufficient to eat up the three British regiments."
+
+"They will find out their mistake, if they try it. However,
+Yossouf, I will let the others know what you think."
+
+By this time, they had arrived at the spot where the lunch was laid
+out; and very tempting it looked, to hungry men. A great dish of
+curry--made with some fowls purchased in the village--was the
+principal dish; but there were some fish--which Yossouf had caught
+in the Helmund, on the previous day--a roast of young kid, and
+several dishes of fresh fruit. A large vessel of porous clay,
+containing the drinking water, stood close by; and the necks of
+some bottles of claret peeped, out from a tub full of water; while
+a pitcher of cold tea was ready, for those who preferred it. The
+young men set to with a vigorous appetite and, when the meal was
+over, pipes and cigars were lighted; and they prepared to enjoy a
+rest, until the heat of the day was past.
+
+Will now told them what Yossouf had said.
+
+"Oh, nonsense, Gale!" Hammond said. "Your boy is an Afghan, and
+these fellows are always dreaming about treachery.
+
+"They are scowling, sulky-looking brutes," he said, looking at a
+group of natives, who stood watching them, with lowering eyes, "and
+of course, they hate us as infidel dogs but, as to attacking us,
+it's all nonsense."
+
+"Well, you know, Hammond, these Ghazis do attack us, in all sorts
+of places--as I have found, to my cost--and these villages abound
+with these fanatics."
+
+"Oh, yes," Fortescue said, lazily, "of course they do; but we have
+got our revolvers handy, and our guns are within reach of our
+hands. We should make precious short work of any Ghazis who were to
+run amuck among us.
+
+"Well, I for one don't mean to move, till it gets a bit cooler. If
+these fellows want to attack us, they have got the chance, now; and
+there is no more reason they should do it, three hours hence, than
+when we are having our breakfast, quietly."
+
+
+
+Chapter 19: The Battle Of Maiwand.
+
+
+The servants were squatting in a circle near their masters, and
+enjoying their share of the breakfast. The two Syces were
+Beloochees, the others were men from the Deccan--the regiment
+having been stationed at Poona, before going up into Afghanistan.
+Of these, the Syces alone understood the Afghan language.
+
+After the men had finished their meal, Yossouf strolled away by
+himself into the village. When he returned, Will saw that he wished
+to speak to him so, rising carelessly from the ground, he walked to
+the ponies--which were tied up near--and called Yossouf, as if to
+give him some instructions respecting them.
+
+"Well, Yossouf, what is it? Have you learned anything?"
+
+"No, sir, nothing. But the people no longer speak to me freely.
+They must have guessed, when they saw me speaking to you, that I
+was warning you; but I don't think things are right. The children
+are all in the houses, instead of playing about in the street. A
+few of the women are standing at their doors, but most of them are
+inside, too."
+
+"But if the men are thinking of attacking us why shouldn't they do
+so, at once?"
+
+"There are not above twenty or thirty men here, sahib. They may not
+think they are strong enough. Perhaps they have sent to some of the
+villages, for help."
+
+"Likely enough, Yossouf; I did not think of that. Do you go up
+above the village, and have a good look round. I will try and
+persuade my friends to be moving."
+
+Yossouf moved off at once; and Will stood for a minute or two,
+thinking what was the best to do. The position was not pleasant.
+Yossouf's suspicions might be altogether unfounded; but Will had
+found him to be so uniformly right, on former occasions, that he
+did not like to neglect his advice, now. After a little further
+thought, he joined his companions.
+
+"Come," he said, "we had really better be moving. I believe we are
+in real danger."
+
+The earnestness with which he spoke roused the others, who were all
+lying at full length on the ground.
+
+"But as we said before, Gale," Fortescue urged, "why shouldn't they
+now attack us, if they wanted to? We have been here more than an
+hour."
+
+"Perhaps they may think we shall all take a nap, after our tiffin,"
+Will replied; "perhaps--as Yossouf thinks--they have sent off to
+some other villages, for assistance. He has gone up the hillside to
+look out. Anyhow, I can assure you, I think we had better be
+moving."
+
+"It is beastly hot," Hammond said, getting up and stretching
+himself; "but as you are so earnest about it, Gale, perhaps we had
+better make a move. As you say, you know no end more of these
+fellows than we do; and you certainly ain't a fellow to get into a
+funk about nothing.
+
+"Come on, boys, we had better do as Gale tells us."
+
+"That's right," Will said, cheerfully. "And look here, if we get
+away from here without any disturbance, and find it all right, we
+can halt again, at the first shady place we come to; and stop there
+for two or three hours, till it gets cool."
+
+"Wait a moment," he went on, as Hammond was about to order the
+ponies to be saddled. "Just let us settle what we had best do,
+should they attack us; which, if they mean it, they will do when
+they see we are moving off.
+
+"I have been thinking it over. We have all got bullets in our
+pockets, to drop into our guns over the shot, in case of necessity.
+But these smooth-bore fowling pieces are of no good, except at
+close quarters; while the Afghan matchlocks will carry straight, a
+long way. Therefore, if we had to make a running fight of it, we
+should get the worst of it; for these fellows could keep up with
+us, easily--besides, there are the servants. Therefore, if a shot
+is fired, my advice is that we should make a dash at the chief's
+house. Seize that, and hold it."
+
+"Yes, that would be a good plan," Fortescue said, for they were all
+sobered now, by Will's gravity; and convinced that there must be
+good grounds for his belief in danger.
+
+"Look here, Gale, we are all senior to you in the date of our
+commissions, but you have seen no end of service and adventure;
+therefore I vote that you shall be commanding officer, until we get
+back to camp."
+
+The others willingly agreed.
+
+"Very well," Will said, "I will do my best.
+
+"Hammond, will you tell your servant to get ready for a start, at
+once. Speak to him quietly and carelessly. Then, as the men move up
+more towards the ponies, tell them--in Hindustanee--to go about
+their work quietly but, in case of any trouble with the Afghans, to
+out with their swords, and join us in a rush at the chief's house."
+
+Hammond carried out his instructions. The two Beloochees were not
+taken by surprise; for they, as well as Yossouf, had been feeling
+uneasy at the disappearance of all women and children from the
+scene. The other men looked startled; but they were stout fellows
+and, as all the native servants, were armed with swords, to enable
+them to resist sudden attacks by the country people; and as they
+had unbounded faith in their masters, they went about the work of
+packing up the plates and dishes, and preparing for a start,
+quietly enough.
+
+As the Syces began to put the saddles on the tats, the Afghans
+spoke quickly and angrily together. Two or three minutes later,
+Yossouf arrived. He had evidently been running, for his breath came
+quick; but he now walked forward in a leisurely way.
+
+"Two large parties are coming, master; one down the valley, and the
+other across the hills. They have got flags with them, and I am
+sure they are going to attack us."
+
+Just at this moment an Afghan lad joined his seniors, and spoke
+rapidly to them. Will judged at once that he also had been placed
+on the watch. The chief of the village, accompanied by two or three
+of his men, now stepped forward.
+
+"Ask the sahibs," he said to Yossouf, "why they are in such a
+hurry--why they want to start in the heat of the day? They had
+better wait till it is cooler."
+
+Will did not wait for Yossouf's translation, but answered direct:
+
+"We have duties at the camp, and must return at once."
+
+The chief was surprised that one of the young officers should speak
+his tongue so fluently.
+
+"It looks as if you were not pleased with the hospitality of our
+village," he said, "that you should hurry away so quickly."
+
+"We are content with it--so far--but we must be off, now.
+
+"Bring up the ponies quickly," he said to Yossouf. "Never mind
+those things, there is not a moment to be lost."
+
+Yossouf and the servants brought up the ponies. The chief laid his
+hand on one of the bridles, and drew a pistol.
+
+"Kaffir dogs," he said, "you shall not leave us, at all."
+
+Will's hand was already on his revolver and, before the chief could
+level his pistol, he fired; and the Afghan fell dead.
+
+There was a shout of rage from the others, and their long
+matchlocks were leveled It was well the party were prepared, or all
+might have been shot down, at once; but the instant Will fired, his
+friends raised their double-barreled guns to their shoulders and
+let fly the contents among the Afghans who--thrown into confusion
+by the sudden and unexpected attack--fired wildly, several of them
+dropping, from the effects of the shot.
+
+"Now," Will shouted, "to the house, everyone of you!"
+
+There was a rush and, before the Afghans knew what had happened,
+the little party had burst through those standing at the door of
+the house, and had barred and bolted it within. There were but two
+men inside; and these, running upstairs, leaped from the windows. A
+wild screaming was heard from the women and children.
+
+"Yossouf, tell these women that we don't want to hurt them; but
+that they must be silent, and keep the children quiet, We have got
+enough to think about without this frightful row, inside. Then,
+when you have got them quiet, put them all in one room together,
+upstairs, and keep guard at the door. See that none of them leave
+the room; for they might steal down and open the door, to admit
+their friends, while we are busy.
+
+"What! Fortescue, are you hit?"
+
+"I am done for!" the young officer replied, faintly; "one of their
+bullets has gone through my body; but never mind me, now."
+
+As he spoke he tottered, and would have fallen; had not the others
+supported him, and gently laid him down on a heap of skins, which
+served as an Afghan bed. Then--leaving his servant to attend to
+him, for a minute--the others ran upstairs, to see what was going
+on, without.
+
+"Be careful!" Will exclaimed. "Don't show a head above the roof, or
+at a loophole, or you will get a bullet in your brain, to a
+certainty. Stand well back, so that they can't see you."
+
+Already a pattering fire of musketry had broken out, round the
+house; but not an Afghan was to be seen, every man having taken his
+position in shelter.
+
+"There is nothing to do, at present," Will said. "When the other
+parties arrive, they may make an attack; but I don't think they
+will do so, till night.
+
+"Hammond, you had better go down to Fortescue, at present. One of
+the Syces can take Yossouf's place on guard over the women, and he
+can help you. The lad is a good nurse, but I fear there is nothing
+to be done for the poor fellow."
+
+A few minutes later a wild outburst of shouts and yells, and a
+great firing of guns, announced that the other parties had arrived;
+and the cracking fire of the matchlocks around the fort became
+incessant. The defenders did not attempt to return it. It would
+only have been throwing away lives, uselessly, to approach any of
+the loopholes. In a quarter of an hour, Hammond rejoined his
+companions.
+
+"He is gone, poor fellow!" he said. "He never spoke again. The
+bullet went close to the heart. I think he has bled to death,
+internally.
+
+"I have handed his revolver to one of the Syces, and his gun to the
+other. Your man, Yossouf, has a revolver."
+
+"What on earth are we to do now, Gale?" Plater asked. "You have
+been right thus far and, if it hadn't been for you putting us up to
+make a rush here, we should have been done for, long ago. But we
+are not much better off; for here we are, cooped up, and the
+betting is a hundred to one against our being rescued, in time. No
+one will know where to look for us and, though we may beat them off
+two or three times, in the end it is likely to go hard with us."
+
+"Couldn't we send a messenger, with the news of the fix we are in?"
+Lowther asked; "though I don't see how any one is to get through."
+
+"That's what I have been thinking about, ever since I first planned
+coming here," Will said; "but I am sure no one could get through.
+The Afghans know the importance of it and, when it gets dark, they
+will be so thick round the place that a mouse couldn't make its way
+through them, unobserved."
+
+The situation was gloomy enough; but there was no lack of good
+spirits among the young officers, the danger causing their blood to
+course rapidly through their veins. Will sat on the floor, apart
+from the others. They had made him their commanding officer, and
+the responsibility of thinking for them devolved upon his
+shoulders.
+
+Suddenly a thought struck him, and he leaped to his feet, with a
+shout.
+
+"I've got it!"
+
+"You will get it, if you don't mind," Hammond said, dryly; as a
+bullet passed through one of the loopholes, and struck the wall an
+inch or two from Will's head. "But what is it?"
+
+"When it gets quite dusk we will call a parley, and tell them we
+don't want to keep the women here. They are only in our way, and
+eat up the food; so we will open the door, and let them go."
+
+"But what will you do that for, Gale? You were saying, a short time
+ago, that the women could be kept as hostages."
+
+"So they might, Hammond; but it will be more useful to us to let
+them go. There are seven women here. Six of them shall go out; and
+with them, in the clothes of the seventh, Yossouf."
+
+"Capital! Capital!" the others exclaimed. "Don't you think they
+will notice him?"
+
+"No," Will said, "we won't do it till dusk, and some of these women
+are as tall as he is. They will hurry them away as quickly as
+possible, so as to recommence the attack and, wrapped up as these
+Afghan women are, no one could see the difference. Once fairly
+away, we can trust Yossouf for finding an opportunity of slipping
+away, and bringing us help."
+
+Will now laid the plan before Yossouf, who at once agreed to
+attempt it. The day passed slowly, the fire of the enemy being kept
+up, without intermission.
+
+"Now," Will said at last, "it is getting dark enough, let us put
+the plan into operation. In the first place the women must be
+separated, and taken into separate rooms; the one Yossouf has fixed
+upon, as nearest his height, into a room by herself. Then Yossouf
+must tell the old mother of the chief that they are to be released;
+and that she must show herself on the roof, and make them stop
+firing, till they have gone out. While she is doing that, he can
+slip down and dress himself in the robes of the woman. She must be
+gagged, to prevent her screaming, or making a row, as her
+companions go out."
+
+Greatly surprised was the old woman, at being told that she was to
+be released. These Kaffirs must be mad, she thought, to give up
+their hostages. However, she at once proceeded to carry the orders
+into effect.
+
+Before raising her head above the roof, she uttered a loud
+quavering cry--the cry of welcome of the Afghan women. The firing
+without instantly ceased. Again raising the cry, she stepped out on
+to the roof; and shouted that the English did not want to keep the
+women, and that the door would be open for them to come
+out--providing the Afghans promised that no attempt to enter should
+be made, and that none should move from their present places, until
+the women had fairly left.
+
+There was a shout of surprise and satisfaction; and one of the
+chiefs rose to his feet, and gave the promise in the name of his
+companions.
+
+"How many are there of you?" he asked.
+
+"Seven," the woman answered.
+
+"Are the children to come?"
+
+"We may take away the babies, but the three boys are to remain
+behind."
+
+Five minutes later the door of the fort opened, and seven figures
+came out. Not a shot was heard, until they had passed down the
+street of the village, and had entered a house at the further end;
+then the rapid fire commenced again. Twice, during the evening, did
+the Afghans attempt to storm the little fort, but were each time
+repulsed, with loss; the fire of the five double-barreled
+guns--loaded with shot and bullets--and of the revolvers proving
+too much for them.
+
+The second attack was made about eleven. A quarter of an hour
+later, wild shouts were heard outside. There was an instant
+cessation of the enemy's fire; and then, in the silence, the deep
+thundering sound of galloping horses was heard.
+
+"Hurrah!" Will shouted, "here they are."
+
+A minute later, the Third Bombay Cavalry dashed up to the fort. The
+door was thrown open, and the little garrison ran out.
+
+"All safe?" the officer in command asked.
+
+"All safe, except Fortescue--who was killed at the first attack."
+
+"So we heard, from your boy," the officer said. "He has ridden back
+with us, as guide.
+
+"Now, lads, dismount and clear the village. Shoot every man you
+find, turn the women out of the houses, and then set them on fire.
+Don't waste any time over it, for the rascals are swarming round
+the place.
+
+"Captain Lawson, you take your troop and dismount it as
+skirmishers, round the place; and keep them off, till we have done
+here.
+
+"Here, you four men who brought the powder kegs, carry them inside
+this fort. We are going to blow it up, to give them a lesson."
+
+Ten minutes later, the cavalry were again in their saddles. Spare
+horses had been brought for the four officers; and the servants
+mounted the tats, which would be able to keep up with the cavalry.
+The flames were already bursting out brightly from the houses.
+
+The yells of the Afghans rose high, and their bullets flew thickly
+over the village; but they kept at a respectful distance. The
+officer in command gave the word, and the party set off at a trot.
+Before they had left the village a deep roar was heard, and they
+knew that the Afghan fort was destroyed. Two hours later they
+arrived safely in camp; where the four rescued officers were warmly
+congratulated, on their narrow escape, by their friends.
+
+On the 14th of July, the conspiracy among the Wali's troops came to
+a head. They openly mutinied; and marched out, with their cannon
+and arms, from the camp. This was situated at a short distance from
+that of the British, and Colonel Ripon was the first to gallop in
+with the news.
+
+Unfortunately, the British commander was not a man endowed with
+promptness of decision; and no steps were taken, until the
+mutineers had proceeded a considerable distance. Then the cavalry
+and artillery were despatched, in pursuit. Had the order been given
+at once, there can be no doubt that the Wali's force would have
+been completely cut up; and those who escaped would have arrived a
+mere horde of fugitives, for the most part without arms, at Ayoub's
+camp.
+
+Late as was the pursuit it was not ineffectual. Six British guns
+opened fire upon the Wali's artillery--which was in rear of the
+retreating column--with such effect that the gunners were seized
+with a panic and, cutting the traces, fled for their lives. A good
+many were cut down by the British cavalry, and the six guns
+deserted by them were brought into camp.
+
+Colonel Burrows' little force now stood alone; for he had with him
+but 1500 infantry, 500 cavalry, and six of his own guns, besides
+those taken from the mutineers--a force altogether disproportioned
+to that with which Ayoub was advancing; swelled, as it was, by the
+accession of the Wali's army. A message was sent to General
+Primrose at Candahar, asking for reinforcements; but that officer,
+although he had a considerable force at his disposal, declined to
+despatch any reinforcements, whatever.
+
+News now arrived that Ayoub, instead of marching direct upon
+Girishk, had crossed the Helmund higher up; and was moving across
+the country, by a line parallel with the road from Candahar to
+Girishk. By this movement he would have the option of placing
+himself either between Colonel Burrows' force and Candahar; of
+marching direct upon the latter city; or of keeping to the north,
+and coming down upon the road between Candahar and Shahpur, and
+then marching direct for Cabul. Under these circumstances General
+Burrows determined to fall back, at once, to a spot where he might
+oppose Ayoub's advancing force. Accordingly, the brigade marched
+from the Helmund to a village called Khusk-I-Nakhud, and there
+encamped. General Nuttal, with the cavalry, made reconnaissances in
+the direction of the enemy.
+
+The people of the country held altogether aloof, and no accurate
+information was obtained as to the strength of Ayoub's army; which
+was believed, by General Burrows, to be very much smaller than it
+really was. Early in the morning of the 26th, it was known that
+Ayoub was marching upon Maiwand--a village farther to the
+north--and at half-past six, the troops moved out to intercept him.
+
+It was at this time believed that it was only the enemy's cavalry
+with whom we should have to deal. Upon arriving near Maiwand,
+however, news was brought in, by spies, that the whole of the enemy
+were at hand. The force was at once halted, in a position
+singularly ill-adapted for a fighting ground. Deep ravines ran both
+to the right, and to the left, of the ground occupied by the
+British. By these, the enemy could advance under shelter, until
+within a short distance. On either side were ranges of hills,
+completely commanding the position.
+
+It is difficult to imagine a more unsuitable position than that
+which General Burrows prepared to hold, with a mere handful of
+troops, against an enormously superior force. What was the total
+strength of Ayoub's army was never exactly known--as it was swollen
+by enormous numbers of Ghazis, and tribesmen from the villages.
+These were, in fact, far more formidable opponents than the regular
+Afghan troops; as their tremendous rushes, and indifference to the
+loss inflicted upon them, were trying in the extreme for even the
+best-trained troops to withstand.
+
+The morning was thick, and but little could be seen of Ayoub's
+army. His cavalry, indeed, were found to be moving about in large
+masses; but these fell back, at our advance. Lieutenant
+Maclean--with two horse artillery guns, and a small cavalry
+escort--galloped out on the extreme left, and opened fire on the
+Afghan cavalry. His infantry at once appeared in force, swarming
+down towards the guns; and these were withdrawn, to a position
+nearer to our line.
+
+The British infantry were formed in the following order: the 66th
+were on the right, the Bombay Grenadiers in the center, and Jacob's
+Rifles on the left. Two guns were placed in position to support the
+66th, on the right. The remaining four British guns, and the six
+smooth-bore guns--captured from the Wali's mutineers--were placed
+between the Grenadiers and Jacob's Rifles. The 3rd Scinde Horse and
+3rd Bombay Light Cavalry were formed in the rear of the line.
+
+As the enemy advanced, our guns opened a heavy fire upon them; but
+it was fully an hour before their artillery replied. Then thirty
+guns were unmasked, and opened fire upon the British line. Under
+cover of this heavy fire, swarms of the enemy's irregulars advanced
+towards our position. When within 600 or 700 yards of the 66th, the
+British opened with their Martini rifles; and the shower of lead,
+at such an unexpected distance, checked the advance of the enemy.
+
+For some time the artillery duel continued; but the enemy's guns
+were then moved on to the hills, on either side of the British
+position, and a terrible crossfire was opened from both flanks. At
+about two o'clock, the smooth-bore guns began to get short of
+ammunition. Only sixty rounds had been captured with them and,
+there being no reserve of ammunition fitting them, they ceased
+fire.
+
+The position now became most serious. From the ravines on either
+side the Ghazis swarmed up, in vast numbers. The artillery
+thundered from the heights upon our troops. Some of their batteries
+were brought up to within very short distances; and great numbers
+of the enemy, keeping along the ravines sheltered from our fire,
+came up in the rear and seized the villages there.
+
+The companies of Jacob's Rifles on the left; after resisting, for
+some time, the furious attacks of the Ghazis, began to waver. The
+enemy's cavalry swept down in heavy masses; while our cavalry--for
+some reason which has never been explained--remained inactive. The
+general has stated that he ordered them to charge, but that they
+would not do so; the cavalry affirm that they never received
+orders. Anyhow, at this critical moment the 3rd Scinde Horse and
+the 3rd Bombay Cavalry remained inactive.
+
+The confusion amid Jacob's Rifles rapidly grew, in spite of the
+efforts of the officers to rally them. The Ghazis swept down upon
+them; and the Rifles broke in confusion, and rushed among the
+Bombay Grenadiers who--hitherto fighting steadily--also fell into
+confusion, as the Rifles and Ghazis burst into their ranks.
+
+"This is hot work," Will Gale said to his captain, when the enemy's
+guns, on the heights on either side, began to play on the line of
+the 66th with their flank fire.
+
+"It is, indeed," the officer answered, "and the fire of the enemy,
+from the edge of that ravine, is very trying. I wish to heaven the
+general would move us farther back. He has made a hideous mistake
+in fighting on such ground as this."
+
+"It would be difficult to withdraw, now," Will said. "It would
+shake the confidence of the men. I think, myself, that we ought to
+advance, and drive the enemy before us, till we take up some really
+defensible position; but I doubt if the Afghans would wait for
+that. In all our history, a British charge against an Indian enemy
+has always been successful, no matter how great the odds."
+
+"It is a bad lookout," the captain said, as a shell burst close by
+him, killing and wounding five or six men. "It is quite evident
+that if we stay where we are we must, in time, be annihilated. Our
+fellows will stand, no doubt; they are English soldiers, and well
+officered. But how can one expect the two Indian regiments--with
+only three or four white officers, each--to remain steady, under
+such a fire as this, and with these desperate charges of Ghazis
+upon them?"
+
+Very steadily the 66th held their ground, in spite of a flanking
+fire of artillery and musketry. Every time the enemy gathered at
+the edge of the ravine, for a rush, the heavy fire of the company
+on the flank--which was wheeled back at a right angle to the line,
+so as to face them--drove them back to shelter again. The regiment
+had suffered very heavily. Still, the officers felt that they could
+endure, till nightfall.
+
+Of victory, there was now no idea; for to conquer, men must act
+and, here, they were only called upon to suffer. Presently a wild
+tumult was heard to the left; and then the men of the scattered
+native regiments burst, in a tumultuous mass, into the ranks of the
+66th.
+
+"Steady, men, steady!" shouted the officers.
+
+But it was of no avail. All was in hopeless confusion. The
+artillery fired, until the Ghazis were within a few yards of them;
+then they hastily limbered up, and fell back. But the Ghazis were
+too close at hand, and two of the guns were lost.
+
+Even now, had the cavalry charged upon the Afghans, time would have
+been given to the broken infantry to form again into a solid mass,
+and to draw off from the field in good order. But the cavalry
+remained inactive. Both these regiments had a record of good
+service in the field; but their conduct, on this occasion, was
+little short of disgraceful.
+
+Among the infantry all order was lost and, mixed up in a confused
+mass, hemmed in on all sides by the enemy, they fell back--each man
+fighting for himself--upon the village behind. Here, in the walled
+enclosures, the 66th and the Grenadiers rallied, and fought nobly.
+Each house was used as a fortress, and only carried after a
+desperate struggle. Here Colonel Galbraith, and nine other officers
+of the 66th were killed; and the greater portion of the regiment
+shared their fate.
+
+Some bodies of the troops--entirely cut off from the rest, in their
+retreat--stood their ground in the open, and fought desperately to
+the end; surrounding themselves, ere they died, with a ring of
+slaughtered enemies. So desperate was the defense in some cases
+that--outnumbering them fifty to one--the enemy never dared to come
+to close quarters with the gallant band; which kept up a rain of
+fire on them, till the last man had fallen. So long and stoutly was
+the village defended, that the great majority of the broken
+fugitives had time to pass out behind.
+
+General Burrows--who had done his best to stem the rout--drew off
+the shattered remains; and fell back with them, in fair order.
+
+Will Gale's company was in the right flank of the regiment and,
+therefore, farthest from the point where the line was broken by the
+rush of the native troops. Seeing what was taking place, the
+captain formed his men into company square; and fell back to the
+village, in fair order. The company then threw itself into a house,
+with a walled garden, to the right of the village; and its steady
+fire, in no slight degree, helped to keep back the Afghans, and
+cover the retreat. This they did, until General Burrows himself
+rode up, and ordered them to fall in.
+
+"Your company has done good service, sir," he said to Captain
+Fletcher; "and it is for you, now, to cover the retreat."
+
+Slowly and in good order the company fell back and, joining the
+troops who still retained their formation, retired slowly; facing
+about, and pouring volley after volley into the Afghans, as they
+came out through the village. For two miles, the enemy pressed
+closely upon them; but their loss had already been immense, and all
+desired to join in the plundering of the British camp. Therefore
+the pursuit slackened and, three miles from the village, the rear
+guard were ordered to the main body, at quick march.
+
+
+
+Chapter 20: Candahar.
+
+
+"Thank God that is over," Captain Fletcher said, as he lifted his
+cap and wiped the perspiration from his forehead; "but the regiment
+is almost annihilated."
+
+"I fear the worst is yet to come," Will said. "We are fifty miles
+from Candahar; and when we came out we had to carry water with us,
+for there was none to be found, on the way. We have a fearful march
+before us.
+
+"What on earth has become of the cavalry? They have done nothing to
+cover the retreat."
+
+"They have ridden on ahead," the captain said, bitterly, "without
+having drawn a sword in this day's fight; and will ride into
+Candahar tomorrow morning, without losing a man, save the few who
+were knocked over by the artillery."
+
+Presently an officer rode up.
+
+"Ah! Gale," he exclaimed, "thank God you are safe. I rode back to
+see."
+
+And Colonel Ripon shook hands warmly with the young officer.
+
+"I am glad to see that you are safe, sir," Will answered. "This has
+been a terrible day."
+
+"It has, indeed," the colonel said, mournfully, "terrible! There
+has been nothing like it, since the retreat from Cabul in 1848. And
+how many of these poor fellows will reach Candahar, God only knows!
+The water bottles wore emptied, hours ago. The men are already
+exhausted with the long day's work, and parched with thirst; and we
+have fifty miles' tramp before us. Have you any wounded men here
+with you?"
+
+"Several, sir, some of them badly hurt."
+
+"Put one of the worst on my horse," Colonel Ripon said,
+dismounting; "and push on briskly, lads. There are some carts
+ahead. We will turn out the stores, and put the wounded in.
+
+"You had better let the men throw away their knapsacks, and all
+useless encumbrances," he said to Captain Fletcher. "You will have
+to march--and perhaps fight--all night; and must husband your
+strength."
+
+Steadily, the rear guard followed the broken column. It consisted
+of men of the 60th and Grenadiers, mingled together; and well did
+they carry out their arduous duties. A portion were thrown out on
+each flat, while the rest kept to the road. This was strewn with
+arms and accouterments of all kinds. The men's hearts were wrung to
+the core, by the sight of the number of wounded who had dropped by
+the roadside; and who implored them, as they passed, not to leave
+them to be murdered by the enemy. Many of them were lifted and
+placed in carts--everything else being turned out, to make way for
+them--but many had to be left behind; for it would be impossible to
+carry them, on such a march.
+
+Slowly the long night passed. All along the line ahead, a scattered
+fire of musketry could be heard; as the villagers shot down the
+fugitives who, in hopes of finding water, straggled from the road.
+Sometimes sharp volleys rang out, as the troops stood at bay, and
+drove back the natives, when they pressed upon them. Several times
+the rear guard were hotly engaged as the Afghans--furious at seeing
+their prey slipping from their fingers--mustered and fell upon
+them; but each time they were repulsed, and the column held on its
+way.
+
+Will was in command of a mixed band, of some forty men, which moved
+to the right of the road. Colonel Ripon kept by his side, but few
+words were spoken, through the long night. The men were half mad
+with thirst and, had there been water near, nothing could have
+restrained them from rushing to it; but they knew that none could
+be obtained, until they reached Candahar. Many, in utter despair at
+the distance before them, threw themselves down on the ground to
+die. But the others kept on--stumbling and staggering as they
+marched, stupid and half blind--rallying only when the order came
+to turn, and repulse the enemy.
+
+Two or three times in the night the rear guard halted, for a few
+minutes; and the men threw themselves down on the sand, where they
+picked the scattered herbage within their reach, and chewed it to
+quench their burning thirst.
+
+Daylight was a welcome relief. They knew indeed that, with the
+rising of the sun, their torments would grow still greater; but the
+change from the long dreary darkness cheered them; and they could
+now see, from the nature of the country, that they were within
+fifteen miles of Candahar. They marched on for two more hours, and
+then the officer in command of the little body saw that they could
+do no more.
+
+He therefore led them to a village on rising ground, a short distance
+from the road, and halted them there. The exhausted men threw themselves
+down in the shade of the houses. They had the long day yet to pass, and
+their thirst seemed unendurable; still, the halt was welcome, for there
+was not a man but felt that his strength was at an end, and that it
+would have been an impossibility to reach the city.
+
+Captain Fletcher picked out a few of the least exhausted men, and
+placed them in the outskirts of the village to call the rest to
+arms in case the Afghans--numbers of whom were hovering
+round--should venture upon an attack. For the first hour after
+reaching the village, not a man moved from the spot where he had
+thrown himself down. The officers had searched the houses, and
+found some jars of water. These they carried round, and doled out a
+few mouthfuls to each man. Small though the amount was, the relief
+afforded was immense and, as soon as their first exhaustion had
+subsided, the men scattered through the gardens; plucking the vine
+leaves and chewing them and, fortunately, discovering a few gourds,
+which were cut up into small fragments, and divided.
+
+The day wore on; and at one o'clock there was a shout of joy, for a
+body of cavalry were seen approaching, at a rapid trot, from the
+town. Soon they rode up, and proved to be a regiment which had been
+despatched, from the town, for the relief of the stragglers. At
+daybreak the cavalry, riding in many miles ahead of the infantry,
+brought the news to the city of the defeat; and something very like
+a panic at first ensued. It was some time before anything was done
+to succor the exhausted fugitives, who were pressing forward to the
+city. But at last a force was sent out with wagons, and bullocks
+with water-skins; and thus hundreds of lives, which would otherwise
+have been sacrificed, were saved. The cavalry had come out with
+full water bottles, and relief was soon afforded to the worn-out
+rear guard, who at once fell into rank, and resumed their march
+towards Candahar; the cavalry, who had brought a few light carts
+with them, pursuing their journey for some distance further, to
+succor and collect those who had fallen on the road.
+
+The sun was just setting as the rear guard of General Burrows'
+brigade reached Candahar; after having marched, since the previous
+morning, sixty miles without food, and with only a few mouthfuls of
+water; and having fought for nearly twenty-four hours of that time.
+
+Every preparation was made, in the city, for the expected attack.
+The defenses were strengthened; the lower portion of the
+populace--who would be likely to declare against them--were turned
+out of the town; and provisions were collected from the country
+round. Fortunately, ample time was afforded them for these
+preparations. Ayoub's army had been, to a great extent, demoralized
+by the tremendous losses which it had sustained, in the defeat of
+this handful of British troops; and some days elapsed before it
+moved forward from Maiwand. Then, by easy marches, it approached
+Candahar; and took up its position in the plain, to the north of
+the city.
+
+Just as the rear guard of General Burrows' force were starting from
+their halting place, for their last march into the city, Will Gale
+was delighted at seeing Yossouf approaching. He had not seen him
+since the regiment marched out from Khusk-I-Nakhud. The young
+Afghan had remained, with the other followers, in the village
+behind Maiwand during the battle when, while the resistance of the
+British was still continuing, the Afghans had worked round by the
+ravines and entered the village.
+
+Yossouf had been obliged to join in the retreat, which was at once
+commenced by the baggage train. Full of anxiety for the fate of his
+master, he had hurried forward at his best speed to Candahar;
+reaching the city only an hour or two after the arrival of the
+cavalry. In spite of the distance he had already performed, he did
+not delay for an instant; but set out again with some provisions,
+and a bottle of wine, and one of water hidden away in his dress. He
+had resolved to push forward, at all hazards, until he had either
+joined his master--whether on his retreat, or as a prisoner in
+Ayoub's army--or had discovered his body on the field of battle,
+and given him burial.
+
+Passing through the throng of fugitives, and questioning any of the
+men of the 66th he met, he made his way forward. He had learned
+that Will's company had withdrawn, in a body, from the battlefield
+to the village but, further than this, none of the fugitives could
+tell him; and his delight was exuberant, when he saw Will marching
+along with his company. The little supply which he had brought was
+at once served out, among the men who most needed it; and Will--who
+had been in a state of great uneasiness concerning the safety of
+his faithful follower--was greatly cheered by finding him alive,
+and unhurt.
+
+The news of the defeat of Maiwand produced an immense sensation, in
+India; and measures were at once taken for the relief of Candahar.
+A strong division was ordered to march from Cabul, through Ghuzni;
+while General Phayre, who commanded the force at Quettah, was also
+ordered to advance to the assistance of the garrison.
+
+General Phayre, however--although comparatively close to
+Candahar--was unable to advance, for some time. The same miserable
+economy which had dispersed the transport train, after the
+signature of the Treaty of Gundamuk; and had so delayed the advance
+of General Roberts towards Cabul, after the massacre of the
+mission, again paralyzed the action of the British troops--the
+whole of the transport train, collected at so much cost and
+difficulty, having been dismissed to their homes, as soon as the
+negotiations with Abdul-Rahman held out a prospect of peace. Many
+weeks elapsed before a sufficient number of baggage animals could
+be collected to enable General Phayre to advance, with his
+relieving column.
+
+In Candahar, things passed quietly. The enemy, from time to time,
+fired shot and shell into the city from distant positions but,
+believing that no relief could reach the garrison before the
+supplies of food were exhausted, and that it must therefore yield
+to hunger, Ayoub's army contented themselves by watching the city
+from a distance; and by keeping a cordon of troops round its walls,
+to prevent the country people from bringing in provisions.
+
+Detached bodies, indeed, often crept up near the walls; and kept up
+a musketry fire at any troops showing themselves, there. But no
+attempts were made to batter down the walls, or to make anything
+like a resolute assault. Ayoub's army had, indeed, greatly lost
+heart. If 1500 British soldiers, attacked under circumstances of
+the greatest disadvantage, had killed 6000 or 7000 of their
+assailants; what might not be the slaughter which a greatly
+superior force would inflict, when sheltered behind stone walls?
+
+From one village, situate half a mile from the eastern gate of the
+city, so constant and harassing a fire was maintained, by the
+enemy, that General Primrose resolved to make a sortie, to capture
+it. The affair was, however, badly planned, and resulted in
+failure. The Afghans--sheltered in the strongly-built houses--kept
+up so severe a fire upon the assailants that these were obliged to
+fall back, with a considerable loss. After that, no further sorties
+were attempted; and the city remained in quiet, until the relieving
+columns were close at hand.
+
+The force selected to march from Cabul to the relief of Candahar,
+under the command of General Roberts, consisted of the 92nd
+Highlanders, 23rd Pioneers, 24th and 25th Punjaub Infantry; the
+2nd, 4th, and 5th Ghoorkas; the 72nd Highlanders, 2nd battalion of
+the 60th, the Norfolk Rangers; the 2rd, 3rd, and 15th Sikhs. There
+were three batteries of artillery, and four cavalry regiments: the
+9th Lancers, the 3rd Bengal Cavalry, the 3rd Punjaub Cavalry, and
+the Central India Horse. This gave a total of about 10,000 fighting
+men. There were, in addition, 8000 followers to feed, 7000 horses,
+and some 8000 transport and artillery mules, and ponies.
+
+The Ameer did his best to assist the force; which was, indeed,
+going to fight his battle, as well as their own. The question was
+whether so large a force would be able to subsist on the road and,
+in order to assist them to do so, he sent orders to all the tribes
+along the line of march to aid the column, in every way. In
+consequence, no difficulties were met with; and scarce a shot was
+fired on the way down.
+
+In seven days after starting Ghuzni was reached, and in fifteen
+Khelat-I-Ghilzai--where Colonel Tanner, with a small garrison, had
+been besieged by the local tribes since the advance of Ayoub.
+Khelat-I-Ghilzai stood near the lower end of the valley down which
+the column was advancing, and was but three days' march from
+Candahar. From the day of their leaving Cabul, to their arrival at
+Khelat-I-Ghilzai, the troops had marched a distance of fifteen
+miles a day--not an extraordinary distance for a single regiment to
+perform, but a wonderful feat for a force containing some 18,000
+persons and 9000 baggage animals, marching through mountains and
+valleys.
+
+As the relieving force approached Candahar, Ayoub drew off his
+troops from around the city; and took up a strong position on some
+hills, a few miles to the north. On the 27th of August Roberts'
+cavalry were near enough to establish heliographic communication
+with the town and, on the 31st, the column entered Candahar.
+
+During the siege, the duties of the garrison had been heavy. A
+strong force was always held ready to get under arms, instantly, in
+case of an attack by the enemy. The number of sentries on the
+walls, magazines, and lower important points was large. The town
+had to be kept in order, and the inhabitants strictly watched.
+House-to-house requisitions were made for provisions; and the
+greatest economy was used in the distribution of these, as the
+garrison had no means of knowing how long a time might elapse
+before any could arrive.
+
+The death of ten officers of the 66th--all of senior standing to
+himself--had placed Will Gale at the top of the list of lieutenants
+and, as several officers were disabled by wounds, he was now
+performing captain's duty, and was in charge of a company. There
+were, indeed, but three companies now in the 66th Regiment; so
+great having been the loss, that the whole of the survivors now
+made up but this number.
+
+Among the other duties of the troops was that of protecting the
+many houses which had been left vacant, by the hasty retirement of
+many of the native merchants and traders, at the approach of
+Ayoub's force. Colonel Primrose--anxious to lessen the number of
+mouths to be fed--encouraged the exodus; promising to take charge
+of all property left behind. This duty proved a troublesome one, as
+the lower class--which still remained in the city--were constantly
+endeavoring to break into, and loot, the houses thus left vacant by
+their proprietors. In order to protect these as much as possible,
+many of the officers were directed to move from their quarters in
+the barracks, and take up their residence in them; an order which
+was gladly obeyed, as the exchange, from hot confined quarters to
+the roomy dwellings of the merchants, was a very pleasant one.
+
+Will Gale was one of those who so moved and, with Yossouf and two
+native followers, had been quartered in the house of a wealthy silk
+merchant. One night, he was aroused from sleep by Yossouf.
+
+"Sahib!" the latter whispered, "I hear people moving below. I think
+there are thieves in the house."
+
+Will rose noiselessly, slipped on his trousers and shoes and--taking
+up a revolver in one hand, and a sword in another--stole downstairs;
+followed by Yossouf, with his long Afghan knife in his hand. The door
+of the warehouse was open; and within it Will saw, by the faint light
+of a lamp which one of them carried, four Afghan ruffians engaged in
+making up silks into large bundles, in readiness to carry off. His
+approach was unnoticed; and on reaching the door he leveled his pistol,
+and shouted to the Afghans to surrender, as his prisoners.
+
+In reply, they dropped the lamp, and made a sudden rush at him. He
+fired his pistol hastily in the darkness but, in an instant, the
+Afghans were upon him. The first man he cut down, but he was
+knocked over by the rush of the others. Two fell upon him; but
+Yossouf bounded upon them like a tiger, and buried his knife to the
+hilt in their backs, in quick succession. The last of the
+party--without staying to see what was the fate of his friends--at
+once took to his heels and, rushing to the door leading to the
+street, made his escape.
+
+Yossouf raised Will to his feet,
+
+"Are you hurt?" he asked, anxiously.
+
+"Nothing to speak of," Will replied. "I am a bit shaken, and
+bruised by the fall. Those fellows, in the darkness, were upon me
+before I could see them.
+
+"Thanks to you, I have escaped without hurt, Yossouf; and had it
+not been for your aid, they would assuredly have made an end of me.
+My pistol had fallen from my hand as they knocked me down and, on
+the ground, I could not have defended myself with my sword, for an
+instant. Once more, Yossouf, I owe my life to you."
+
+So many attempts, similar to that made upon the house occupied by
+Will Gale, took place that sentries were posted, at ten o'clock at
+night, at the entrances to the various streets in which the houses
+left deserted by the native traders were situated; and orders were
+given that no natives should be out of their houses, after that
+hour, unless provided with a pass signed by the commandant of the
+city.
+
+Several messengers were from time to time sent out, to endeavor to
+get through the enemy's, lines and to carry to General Phayre the
+news of what was going on in the city. A few of these succeeded in
+getting through, but none returned; so that, until the signal
+lights were seen flashing from the distant hills, in the direction
+of Khelat-I-Ghilzai, the garrison were unaware of the steps which
+were being taken for their rescue. Even had unforeseen obstacles
+prevented the advent of either of the relieving columns, it is
+probable that the garrison of Candahar would finally have freed
+itself. Colonel Primrose had, at his disposal, a force more than
+double that which had fought at Maiwand; and had the British
+advanced into the plain, and offered battle to Ayoub on a fair
+fighting ground they should, without difficulty, have defeated his
+army; whose long delays and hesitation showed how immensely their
+morale had been affected by the previous battle.
+
+Thus it was that Sale--after sustaining a long siege in
+Jellalabad--finally sallied out, and completely defeated the
+besieging army, before the arrival of the force marching to his
+relief. The Candahar force was not commanded by a Sale but, had it
+been given a chance to retrieve Maiwand, there can be little doubt
+of what the issue would have been. Over and over again, the subject
+was discussed at the messes of the various regiments; and immense
+indignation was felt at the force being kept cooped up in Candahar,
+when the history of India recorded scores of examples of victories
+won, by British troops, against greater odds than those now opposed
+to them.
+
+It must be said, however, that the native portion of the army, in
+Candahar, was of very inferior fighting quality to that which
+operated in Eastern Afghanistan. Those regiments were, for the most
+part, either Ghoorkas, Sikhs, or Punjaubees--than whom no braver
+men exist. The Ghoorkas are small, active men; mountaineers by
+birth, and to whom war is a passion. The Sikhs and Punjaubees, upon
+the contrary, are tall, stately men; proud of the historical
+fighting powers of their race. They had fought with extreme bravery
+against the English but, once conquered, they became true and
+faithful subjects of the English crown; and it was their fidelity
+and bravery which saved England, in the dark days of the mutiny.
+
+The Bombay troops, upon the other hand, were drawn from races which
+had long ceased to be warlike. They possessed none of the dash and
+fire of the hardier troops; their organization was--and still
+is--defective; and the system of officering them was radically bad.
+The contrast between the two was strongly shown, in the conduct of
+the Sikh and Ghoorka regiments with General Stewart, when attacked
+by the sudden rush of the Ghazis, at Ahmed Khil; and that of the
+Bombay Grenadiers and Jacob's Foot, under precisely similar
+circumstances at Maiwand.
+
+There is no doubt, however, that the main reason why General
+Primrose did not sally out and give battle on the plain of Candahar
+was that, in case of defeat, the populace of the city would
+assuredly have closed their gates against the army; and that
+nothing would have remained but a disastrous retreat across the
+Kojak Pass--a retreat of which very few would ever have survived to
+tell.
+
+Their enforced idleness, in Candahar, made the time pass slowly and
+heavily; and it was with the greatest joy that the garrison hailed
+the entry of the columns of General Roberts.
+
+Upon his arrival the general lost no time in reconnoitering the
+position of the enemy. It was well chosen for defense His army was
+encamped behind the range of hills known as the Baba-Wali Hills. A
+road ran direct over these hills; and here a strong force was
+stationed, supported by artillery in position. The last hill of the
+range, on the southwest, was known as the Pir-Paimal Hill; and by
+turning this the camp of Ayoub's army would be taken in flank, and
+the defenses in front rendered useless. The reconnaissance which
+was made by the cavalry; supported by the 15th Sikhs, advanced
+close to the central hill. The enemy unmasked five guns and opened
+upon them, and the Afghans poured down to the attack. There was,
+however, no intention on the part of the British commander of
+bringing on a battle; and the troops accordingly fell back, in good
+order, to the main body.
+
+A mile and a half from the city stood a low ridge of rock--called
+the Picket Hill--in the line by which the column would have to
+move, to turn the Pir-Paimal Hill; and this was at once seized. A
+number of Ghazis stationed here fought, as usual, desperately; but
+the 4th Ghoorkas repulsed their charge, and cleared the ridge of
+the enemy. The general determined to attack the enemy's position
+with his whole force, on the following day.
+
+
+
+Chapter 21: The Battle Of Candahar.
+
+
+The plan of action upon which General Roberts determined was
+simple. The 1st and 2nd brigade were to advance abreast, the 3rd to
+follow in support. As the 66th were to take no part in the fight,
+Will Gale obtained leave to ride out with General Weatherby, with
+the 3rd division.
+
+The enemy were well aware of the weak point of the position which they
+occupied; and they had mustered thickly in the plain, in which were
+several villages; with canals cutting up the ground in all directions,
+and abounding with hedges, ditches, and enclosures--altogether, a very
+strongly defensible position.
+
+It was at 10 o'clock, on the 1st of September, that the British
+force advanced. The first division, on the right, advanced against
+the large walled village of Gundi, which was strongly held by the
+enemy. Against this General Macpherson sent the 92nd and the 2nd
+Ghoorkas and, stubbornly as the enemy fought, the place was carried
+by the bayonet.
+
+On the line taken by the 2nd division--under General Baker--three
+villages had successively to be carried: Abasabad, Kaghanary, and
+Gundigan. The 72nd Highlanders and the 2nd Sikhs advanced to the
+attack of these. The resistance of the Afghans was stubborn in the
+extreme, but they were driven out. The fighting line of the two
+divisions kept abreast and, for two miles, had to fight every inch
+of their way; from wall to wall, from garden to garden and, here
+and there, from house to house and from lane to lane.
+
+Illustration: Gundi carried by the Bayonet.
+
+Once or twice the attack was checked, for a few minutes, by the
+desperate resistance of the Afghans--at the crossing places of
+canals and in walled enclosures--and again and again, the Ghazis
+rushed down upon the troops. The 3rd Sikhs and the 5th Ghoorkas
+joined the fighting line and, step by step, the ground was won;
+until the base of the hill was turned, and the attacking force saw,
+in front of them, the great camp of Ayoub's troops. Up to this
+point, the enemy had fought with the greatest bravery; but a sudden
+panic seized them, now they saw that their line of retreat was
+threatened by our cavalry--for an Afghan always loses heart, under
+such circumstances. As if by magic, the defense ceased; and the
+enemy, horse and foot--abandoning their guns, and throwing away
+their arms--fled up the Argandab valley. Everything was abandoned.
+
+There was nothing more for the infantry to do but to sack Ayoub's
+camp, and to park the captive guns, thirty in number. The amount of
+stores and miscellaneous articles in the camp was enormous: arms,
+ammunition, commissariat, and ordnance stores; helmets, bullock
+huts crammed with native wearing apparel, writing materials,
+Korans, English tinned meats, fruit, and money. Here, in fact, was
+all the baggage which the army had brought from Herat; together
+with all the spoil which they had captured at Maiwand.
+
+The cavalry took up the pursuit. Unfortunately they had met with
+great difficulties, in advancing through the broken country in rear
+of the infantry. Had they been close at hand, when the latter
+fought their way into Ayoub's camp, very few of the fugitives would
+have escaped. As it was, they did good service in following up the
+rout; and driving the enemy, a dispersed and broken crowd, into the
+hills.
+
+To the fury of the men they found, in Ayoub's camp, the body of
+Lieutenant Maclaine; who had been taken prisoner at Maiwand, and
+who was barbarously murdered, a few minutes before the arrival of
+the English troops. The battle cost the lives of three officers:
+Lieutenant Colonel Brownlow, commanding the 72nd Highlanders;
+Captain Frome, of the same regiment; and Captain Straton, 2nd
+battalion of the 22nd. Eleven officers were wounded, 46 men were
+killed, and 202 wounded.
+
+The enemy left 1200 dead on the field. Ayoub's regular regiments
+scarcely fired a shot, and the British advance had been opposed
+entirely by the irregulars and Ghazis; the regular regiments having
+been drawn up behind the Pir-Paimal Pass, by which they expected
+our main attack to be made--a delusion which was kept up by our
+heavy fire, from early morning, upon the Afghan guns on the summit
+of the pass. When our troops appeared round the corner of the spur
+upon their flank they lost heart at once; and for the most part,
+throwing away their arms, joined the body of fugitives.
+
+"It would have been hard work, sir," Will Gale said to Colonel
+Ripon, as they rode forward in rear of the fighting brigade, "to
+have taken this position with the Candahar force, alone."
+
+"It could not have been done," Colonel Ripon replied, "but no one
+would have dreamed of attempting it. The Afghans say that the force
+which Roberts brought down, from Cabul, was so large that they
+stood on the defensive; but they would have ventured to attack us,
+had we sallied out and offered battle on the level plain, round the
+city. Then, I have no doubt we could have beaten them.
+
+"However, all is well that ends well. Roberts has come up in time,
+and has completely defeated the enemy; still, it would have been
+more satisfactory had we retrieved Maiwand, by thrashing him
+single-handed.
+
+"Well, I suppose this is the end of the Afghan war. We have beaten
+Ayoub: I hope, so effectually that Abdul-Rahman will have no
+difficulty in dealing with him, in future and, if he really means
+the professions of friendship which he has made us, we may hope for
+peace, for some time. Probably the next time we have to fight, in
+this country, it will be against the Russians and Afghans, united.
+
+"There are men in England who persist in shutting their eyes to the
+certain consequences of the Russian advance towards the northern
+frontier of Afghanistan; but the time will come when England will
+have to rue, bitterly, the infatuation and folly of her rulers.
+When that day arrives, she will have to make such an effort, to
+hold her own, as she has never had to do since the days when she
+stood, alone, in arms against Europe."
+
+Upon the following day, Will paid a visit to his friends in the
+Rangers.
+
+"So you got through Maiwand safely!" the colonel said. "Upon my
+word, I begin to think that you have a charmed life.
+
+"I hear one of your captains died, last night. That gives you your
+step, does it not?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"You are the luckiest young dog I ever heard of. You got your commission,
+within a year of enlisting; and now, by an extraordinary fatality, your
+regiment is almost annihilated; and you mount up, by death steps, to a
+captain's rank, nine months after the date of your gazette. In any other
+regiment in the service, you would have been lucky if you had got three
+or four steps, by this time."
+
+"I am fortunate, indeed, sir," Will said. "I can scarcely believe
+it, myself."
+
+"Ah! whom do I see here?" the colonel exclaimed, as a mounted
+officer rode through the camp. "My old friend, Ripon!
+
+"Ah Ripon, how are you?"
+
+The colonel reined in his horse; and the two officers, who had not
+met for some years, entered into a warm conversation; while Will
+strolled away to talk to some of the younger officers, who
+congratulated him most heartily on the luck which had, in a few
+months, taken him over their heads.
+
+In the afternoon Will received a note from Colonel Ripon, asking
+him to dine with him, as Colonel Shepherd was going to do so. Will
+replied that he would gladly dine, but must be excused for a time,
+afterwards; as he was on duty, and would have to go the rounds, in
+the evening.
+
+There were three or four other officers at dinner, as Colonel Ripon
+had many friends in the relieving column. When dinner was over,
+Will made his excuses and left; promising to look in again, in a
+couple of hours, when he had finished his rounds. Soon afterwards,
+the other young officers left. Colonel Shepherd, only, remained.
+
+"That is a singularly fine young fellow--young Gale, I mean,"
+Colonel Shepherd said; "and a singularly fortunate one. I feel
+quite proud of him. It was upon my advice that he enlisted; but if
+any one had told me, at the time, that he would be a captain in two
+years, I should have said that it was absolutely impossible."
+
+"Yes," Colonel Ripon replied, "his luck has been marvelous; but if
+ever a fellow deserved it, he did. I have a very warm liking--I may
+say an affection--for him. He saved my life, when I was attacked by
+some Ghazis here, and must have been killed, had it not been for
+his promptness, and coolness. He was wounded, too; and we were
+nursed together, here. Since then I have seen a great deal of him
+and, the more I see him, the more I like him.
+
+"Do you know anything of him, previous to the time of his
+enlisting? You told me he joined your regiment, on the day when it
+arrived at Calcutta. I know nothing of his history, before that.
+The subject never happened to occur, in conversation; and it was
+one upon which I naturally should have felt a delicacy in asking
+any questions--though I have sometimes wondered, in my own mind,
+how he came to be penniless in Calcutta; as I suppose he must have
+been, to have enlisted. Did you happen to hear anything about it?"
+
+"Yes, indeed," Colonel Shepherd answered. "Curiously enough, he was
+by no means penniless; as he had just received 100 pounds reward,
+for the services he had rendered in preventing a ship from being
+captured, by the Malays. I happened to meet its captain on shore,
+the day I landed; and heard from him the story of the affair--which
+was as follows, as nearly as I can recollect."
+
+Colonel Shepherd then related, to his friend, the story of the
+manner in which the brig--when chased by Malays--was saved, by
+being brought into the reef, by Will.
+
+"Naturally," he went on, "I was greatly interested in the story
+and--expressing a wish to see the young fellow--he was brought off
+that evening, after mess, to the Euphrates; and told us how he had
+been wrecked on the island in a Dutch ship, from which only he, and
+a companion, were saved. I was so struck with his conduct--and, I
+may say, by his appearance and manner--that I took him aside into
+my own cabin, and learned from him the full particulars of his
+story. I don't think anyone else knows it for, when he expressed
+his willingness to take my advice, and enlist, I told him that he
+had better say nothing about his past. His manner was so good that
+I thought he would pass well, as some gentleman's son who had got
+into a scrape and, as I hoped that the time might come when he
+might step upwards, it was perhaps better that it should not be
+known what was his origin."
+
+"But what was his origin, Shepherd? I confess you surprise me, for
+I have always had an idea that he was a man of good family;
+although in some strange way his education had been neglected for,
+in fact, he told me one day that he was absolutely ignorant of
+Latin."
+
+"Well, Ripon, as you are a friend of the young fellow, and I know
+it will go no further, I will tell you the facts of the case. He
+was brought up in a workhouse, was apprenticed to a Yarmouth smack
+man and--the boat being run down in a gale by a Dutch troopship, to
+which he managed to cling, as the smack sank--he was carried in her
+to Java. On her voyage thence, to China, he was wrecked on the
+island I spoke of."
+
+"You astound me," Colonel Ripon said, "absolutely astound me. I
+could have sworn that he was a gentleman by birth. Not, mind you,
+that I like or esteem him one iota the less, for what you tell me.
+Indeed, on the contrary; for there is all the more merit in his
+having made his way, alone. Still, you astonish me.
+
+"They tell me," he said, with a smile, "that he is wonderfully like
+me but, strangely enough, he reminds me rather of my wife. You
+remember her, Shepherd? For you were stationed at Meerut, at the
+time I married her there."
+
+Colonel Shepherd nodded and, for a few minutes, the two friends sat
+silent; thinking over the memories which the words had evoked.
+
+"Strange, is it not," Colonel Ripon went on, arousing himself,
+"that the child of some pauper parents should have a resemblance,
+however distant, to me and my wife?"
+
+"Curiously enough," Colonel Shepherd said, "the boy was not born of
+pauper parents. He was left at the door of the workhouse, at Ely,
+by a tramp; whose body was found, next morning, in one of the
+ditches. It was a stormy night; and she had, no doubt, lost her way
+after leaving the child. That was why they called him William Gale.
+
+"Why, what is the matter, Ripon? Good heavens, are you ill?"
+
+Colonel Shepherd's surprise was natural. The old officer sat rigid
+in his chair, with his eyes open and staring at his friend; and
+yet, apparently, without seeing him. The color in his face had
+faded away and, even through the deep bronze of the Indian sun, its
+pallor was visible.
+
+Colonel Shepherd rose in great alarm, and was about to call for
+assistance when his friend, with a slight motion of his hand,
+motioned to him to abstain.
+
+"How old is he?" came presently, in a strange tone, from his lips.
+
+"How old is who?" Colonel Shepherd asked, in surprise. "Oh, you
+mean Gale! He is not nineteen yet, though he looks four or five
+years older. He was under seventeen, when he enlisted; and I rather
+strained a point to get him in, by hinting that, when he was asked
+his age, he had better say under nineteen. So he was entered as
+eighteen, but I know he was more than a year younger than that.
+
+"But what has that to do with it, my dear old friend? What is the
+matter with you?"
+
+"I believe, Shepherd," Colonel Ripon said solemnly, "that he is my
+son."
+
+"Your son!" his comrade exclaimed, astonished.
+
+"Yes, I believe he is my son."
+
+"But how on earth can that be?" his friend asked. "Are you sure
+that you know what you are saying? Is your head quite clear, old
+friend?"
+
+"My head is clear enough," the colonel replied, "although I felt
+stunned, at first. Did you never hear of my having lost my child?"
+
+"No, indeed," Colonel Shepherd replied, more and more
+surprised--for he had at first supposed that some sudden access of
+fever, or delirium, had seized his friend. "You will remember that,
+a week or two after you were married, my regiment was moved up to
+the north; and we remained three years longer in India. When I got
+back to England, I heard that you had lost your wife, a short time
+before, and had returned. I remember our ships crossed on the way.
+When we met again, the conversation never turned on the past."
+
+"I will tell you the story," the colonel said, "and you will see
+that, at any rate, the boy may be my son and, that being so, the
+double likeness proves to me, incontestably, that he is.
+
+"I had, as you know, been ill before I left India. I had not been
+home for fifteen years, and got two years' leave. As you may know,
+I had a good fortune, irrespective of the service; and I took a
+place called Holmwood Park, near Dawlish and, as I had thought of
+retiring, at the end of my leave, I was put on the commission of
+the peace. My boy was born a few months after I got home.
+
+"Soon after I took the place, some gipsy fellows broke into the
+poultry yard, and stole some valuable chickens--which were great
+pets of my wife. I chased them and, finally, brought home the guilt
+of the theft to one of the men, in whose tent a lot of their
+feathers were found. He had been previously convicted, and was
+sentenced to a term of penal servitude.
+
+"Before the trial his wife--also a gipsy--called upon me, and
+begged me not to appear against her husband, This, of course, was
+out of the question, as he had already been sent to trial. When she
+found that her entreaties were useless she, in the most vindictive
+tone, told me that I should repent it; and she certainly spoke as
+if she meant it.
+
+"I heard nothing more of the matter, until the boy was sixteen
+months old. Then he disappeared. He was stolen from the garden. A
+clue was left, evidently that I might know from whom the blow came.
+The gipsy had been convicted partly on the evidence of the
+feathers; but principally from the fact that the boot, which he had
+on, had half the iron on the heel broken off, and this tallied
+exactly with some marks in my fowl house. An hour after the child
+was gone we found, in the center of the drive, in the park, a boot,
+conspicuously placed there to catch the eye; and this boot I
+recognized, by the broken iron, as that which had transported the
+gipsy.
+
+"That the woman had stolen the child, I had not the least doubt;
+but neither of her, nor it, could I ever gain the slightest clue. I
+advertised in every paper in the kingdom, I offered a reward of
+1000 pounds, and I believe the police searched every gipsy
+encampment in England, but without success.
+
+"My wife had never been strong and, from that day, she gradually
+sank. As long as there was hope she kept up, for a time. I hoped
+all would go well; but three months afterwards she faded rapidly
+and, ere six months had passed from the loss of the child, I buried
+her, and came straight out to India. I went home once, for two or
+three months, upon business connected with my property there, some
+seven years since. That was when we last met, you know, at the
+club. With that exception, I have remained here ever since."
+
+"The trouble will be, I fear," Colonel Shepherd said, "for you to
+identify him. That vindictive gipsy woman, who stole your child, is
+not likely to have left any marks on its clothing by which it might
+be identified at any future time, and her revenge on you
+frustrated."
+
+"Thank God!" the colonel said, earnestly, "if it be my son, he
+bears a mark by which I shall know him. That was one of his poor
+mother's greatest comforts. The child was born with an ugly blood
+mark on its neck. It used to bother my wife a good deal, and she
+consulted several surgeons whether it could not be removed; but
+they all said no, not without completely cutting out the flesh--and
+this, of course, was not to be thought of. After the child was lost
+I remember, as well as if it had been spoken today, my wife saying:
+
+"'How strange are God's ways! I was foolish enough to fret over
+that mark on the darling's neck; and now, the thought of it is my
+greatest comfort and, if it shall be God's will that years shall
+pass away, before we find him, there is a sign by which we shall
+always know him. No other child can be palmed off upon us as our
+own. When we find Tom we shall know him, however changed he may
+be.'
+
+"Listen, Shepherd! That is his step on the stairs. May God grant
+that he prove to be my son!"
+
+"Be calm, old friend," Colonel Shepherd said. "I will speak to
+him."
+
+The door opened, and Will entered.
+
+"I am glad you have not gone, colonel--I was afraid you might have
+left, for I have been longer than I expected. I just heard the news
+that the 66th are in orders this evening to march, the day after
+tomorrow, for Kurrachee; to sail for England, where we are to be
+reorganized, again."
+
+"Gale, I am going to ask you a rather curious thing. Will you do
+it, without asking why?" Colonel Shepherd said, quietly.
+
+"Certainly, colonel, if it is in my power," Will said, somewhat
+surprised.
+
+"Will you take off your patrol jacket, open your shirt, and turn it
+well down at the neck?"
+
+For a moment, Will looked astounded at this request. He saw, by the
+tone in which it was made, that it was seriously uttered and,
+without hesitation, he began to unhook his patrol jacket. As he did
+so, his eye fell upon Colonel Ripon's face; and the intense
+anxiety, and emotion, that it expressed caused him to pause, for a
+moment.
+
+Something extraordinary hung on what he had been asked to do. All
+sorts of strange thoughts flashed through his brain. Hundreds of
+times in his life he had said to himself that, if ever he
+discovered his parents, it would be by means of this mark upon his
+neck, which he was now asked to expose. The many remarks which had
+been made, of his likeness to Colonel Ripon, flashed across his
+mind; and it was with an emotion scarcely inferior to that of the
+old officer that he opened his shirt, and turned down the collar.
+
+The sight was conclusive. Colonel Ripon held out his arms, with a
+cry of:
+
+"My son, my son!"
+
+Bewildered and delighted, Will felt himself pressed to the heart of
+the man whom he liked, and esteemed, beyond all others.
+
+With a word of the heartiest congratulation, Colonel Shepherd left
+the father and son together; to exchange confidences, and tell to
+each other their respective stories, and to realize the great
+happiness which had befallen them both. Their delight was without a
+single cloud--save that which passed for a moment through Colonel
+Ripon's mind, as he thought how his wife would have rejoiced, had
+she lived to see that day.
+
+His joy was, in some respects, even greater than that of his son.
+The latter had always pictured to himself that, if he ever
+discovered his father, he should find him all that was good; but
+the colonel had, for many years, not only given up all hope of ever
+finding his son, but almost every desire to do so. He had thought
+that, if still alive, he must be a gipsy vagabond--a poacher, a
+liar, a thief--like those among whom he would have been brought up.
+From such a discovery, no happiness could be looked for; only
+annoyance, humiliation, and trouble. To find his son, then, all
+that he could wish for--a gentleman, a most promising young
+officer, the man, indeed, to whom he had been so specially
+attracted--was a joy altogether unhoped and unlooked for.
+
+Morning had broken before the newly united father and son had done
+their long and happy talk, and they separated only to take a bath,
+to prepare them for the day's work.
+
+The astonishment of everyone was unbounded when Colonel Ripon
+announced, on the following morning, that in Captain Gale of the
+66th--who, it was known, had risen from the ranks--he had
+discovered a son that had been stolen from him, as a child. No one
+entertained a doubt, for an instant, that any mistake had arisen;
+for the likeness between the two men, as they strode down the
+street together, on their way to General Roberts' quarters, was so
+marked that--now that men knew the relationship--none doubted for a
+moment that they were, indeed, father and son.
+
+The warmest congratulations poured in upon them, from all sides;
+and from none more heartily than from the general, who was more
+than ever pleased that he had been the means of Will's obtaining
+his commission from the ranks.
+
+The same day Colonel Ripon sent off, by a mounted messenger
+carrying despatches, a telegram to be sent from the nearest station
+of the flying line--which the engineers advancing with General
+Phayre's force had already carried as far as the Kojak Pass--to the
+government of India; asking leave to go home, at once, on the most
+urgent and pressing family business.
+
+Yossouf's grief, when he heard that his master was going to leave for
+England, was very great. At first, he begged that he might accompany
+him; but Tom pointed out that--much as he should like to have him with
+him--his position in England would be an uncomfortable one. He would
+meet with no one with whom he could converse; and would, after a time,
+long for his own country again.  Yossouf yielded to his reasoning;
+and the picture which Will drew of his own loneliness when in Cabul,
+separated from all his own people, aided greatly in enforcing his
+arguments on his mind. He said however that, at any rate, he would not
+return to Afghanistan, at present.
+
+"It will be long," he said, "before things settle down there; and
+it will be useless for me to put my money into a herd which might
+be driven off by plunderers, the next week.
+
+"Besides, at present the feeling against the English will be
+strong. So many have lost men of their family, in the fighting. If
+I returned, I should be a marked man. It is known that I threw in
+my lot with the English, and it will be cast in my teeth, even if
+no worse came of it.
+
+"No, I will enlist in the Guides. I shall be at home with them, for
+most of them belong to the Afghan tribes. I am young yet, not fully
+a man, and I have my life before me. Some day, perhaps, if things
+are quiet and prosperous at home, I will go back and end my days
+there."
+
+So it was arranged. One of the officers of the Guides had
+accompanied General Roberts, as interpreter; and Will handed over
+Yossouf to him, telling him how well the lad had served him. The
+officer promised to enroll him in the corps, as soon as he rejoined
+it; and also that he would not fail to report his conduct to the
+colonel, and to obtain his promotion to the rank of a native
+officer, as soon as possible. From Will Yossouf would accept
+nothing except his revolver, as a keepsake; but Colonel Ripon
+insisted upon his taking, from him, a present which would make him
+a rich man, when he chose to return to his native country.
+
+
+
+Chapter 22: At Home At Last.
+
+
+The next day Colonel Ripon started with the 66th and, at the end of
+the first day's march, met a messenger who, among other despatches,
+carried a telegram granting him, at once, the leave he asked
+for--and which, indeed, had been due, had he asked for it many
+years before. His intention was to accompany the 66th to Kurrachee,
+and to sail with it to England. This intention was carried out, and
+the remnant of the regiment safely reached England.
+
+One of Colonel Ripon's first steps was to accompany Will--or, as he
+ought now to be called, Tom--to the Horse Guards; and to procure an
+insertion in the Gazette stating that Captain William Gale, of the
+66th, would henceforth be known by his true and proper name of
+Thomas Ripon.
+
+The colonel purchased a fine estate in Somersetshire and, retiring
+from the service, settled down there. There was a considerable
+discussion, between father and son, as to whether the latter should
+remain in the army. Colonel Ripon was unwilling that his son should
+relinquish a profession of which he was fond; and in which, from
+his early promotion, he had every chance of obtaining high rank and
+honor--but Tom, who saw how great a pleasure his society was to his
+father, and how lonely the latter's life would be without him, was
+resolute in his determination to quit the service. He had already,
+as he said, passed through a far greater share of adventure than
+usually falls to one man's lot; and the colonel's property was so
+large that there was not the slightest occasion for him to continue
+in the service.
+
+Not long after his return to England, Will paid a visit to Ely
+workhouse. He was accompanied by the colonel, and the two men
+walked together up to the gate of the workhouse. He rang at the
+bell, and a woman opened the door. She curtsied, at seeing two
+tall, soldier-like gentlemen before her.
+
+"Your name is Mrs. Dickson, I think?" the younger said.
+
+The woman gave a violent start, and gazed earnestly at him.
+
+"It is Will Gale!" she exclaimed, drawing back a step. "They said
+you were dead, years ago."
+
+"No, I am very much alive, Mrs. Dickson; and glad, most glad, to
+see an old friend again."
+
+"Good Lord!" the woman exclaimed, "it is the boy himself, sure
+enough;" and, for a moment, she seemed as if she would have rushed
+into his arms; and then she drew back, abashed at his appearance.
+
+Tom, however, held out his arms; and the woman fell sobbing into
+them.
+
+"Why, you did not think so badly of me," he said, "as to think that
+I should forget the woman who was a mother to me.
+
+"Father," he said,
+
+"--For I have found my real father, Mrs. Dickson, as you always
+said I should, some day--
+
+"It is to this good woman that I owe what I am. But for her, I
+might now be a laboring man; but it is to her kindness, to her good
+advice, to her lessons, that I owe everything. It was she who
+taught me that I should so behave that, if my parents ever found
+me, they should have no cause to be ashamed of me. She was, indeed,
+as a mother to me; and this lodge was my home, rather than the work
+house, inside.
+
+"Ah! And here is Sam!"
+
+Sam Dickson, coming out at this moment, stood in open-mouthed
+astonishment, at seeing his wife standing with her hand in that of
+a gentleman.
+
+"Oh, Sam! Who do you think this is?"
+
+Sam made no reply, but stared at Tom, with all his eyes.
+
+"If it warn't that he be drowned and dead, long ago," he said, at
+last, "I should say it was Will Gale, growed up and got to be a
+gentleman. I shouldn't ha' knowed him, at first; but when he
+smiles, I don't think as how I can be far wrong."
+
+"You are right, Sam. I am the boy you and your wife were so kind
+to, from the time you picked him up, just where we are standing;
+and whom you last handed over to go aboard a smack, at Yarmouth.
+She was--as you have heard--run down in the North Sea; but I was
+saved, in the ship which ran over her, and was taken on it to the
+East. There--after being wrecked again, and going through lots of
+adventures--I went to India; enlisted there, and fought through the
+Afghan war.
+
+"I am a captain, now; and my name is no longer Will Gale, but Tom
+Ripon, for I have found my real father--this gentleman, Colonel
+Ripon."
+
+"Who feels," Colonel Ripon went on, "how much he and his son owe to
+your kindness, and that of your good wife, here; and who, as you
+will find, is not ungrateful. I have just bought an estate, down in
+Somersetshire; and I mean to install you and your wife in a pretty
+lodge, at the gates, with enough to live upon, comfortably, to the
+end of your lives."
+
+Mrs. Dickson cried with joy, as Colonel Ripon entered into details
+of what he intended to do for them; and Sam--although, as was his
+way, much less demonstrative in his gladness--was yet greatly
+delighted. There was a good garden to the lodge. They were to have
+the keep of a cow, and thirty shillings per week, as long as they
+lived. Before the colonel left, Sam Dickson's resignation of his
+post was handed in to the master.
+
+The colonel told them that at the end of the month, when Sam's
+notice would expire, they were to sell off what furniture they had,
+as it would cost more, to convey it so long a distance, than it was
+worth; and he would take care that they should find everything
+comfortable and ready for occupation, at the lodge, upon their
+arrival.
+
+Tom called upon the master and matron and schoolmaster, and thanked
+all for the kindness that they had shown him, when a boy; and
+Colonel Ripon left a check with the master, to be expended in
+tobacco, tea, and sugar for the aged inmates of the house.
+
+No words can express the delight of Sam Dickson and his wife when,
+a month later, they arrived at their new home. Tom had spared no
+trouble in seeing that it was comfortably and cosily furnished. The
+garden had been thoroughly dug up, and planted; and Mrs. Dickson
+could scarcely believe that she was the mistress of so pleasant a
+home. Tom was forgetful of none of his old friends; and he wrote to
+an address which Hans--his companion among the Malays--had given
+him when they separated, and forwarded to him a handsome watch, as
+a souvenir of his comrade.
+
+There is no more to be told. Captain Ripon--still a very young
+man--is living with his father, the colonel. He is one of the most
+popular men in his county; and there is some talk of his standing
+for one of its boroughs, at the next election; and it is rumored
+that he is likely, ere long, to bring home a lady who will be the
+future mistress of Burnham Park.
+
+He is quite content that he has left the army--though he fidgeted a
+little, while the Egyptian war was going on, and could not help
+feeling a little regret that he did not take part in the storming
+of Tel-el-Kebir.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FOR NAME AND FAME***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21979.txt or 21979.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/9/7/21979
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+